mcwp5 1

MCWP 5-1
Marine Corps
Planning Process
U.S. Marine Corps
PCN 143 000068 00

To Our Readers
Changes: Readers of this publication are encouraged to submit suggestions and changes that
will improve it. Recommendations may be sent directly to Commanding General, Marine
Corps Combat Development Command, Doctrine Division (C 42), 3300 Russell Road, Suite
318A, Quantico, VA 22134-5021 or by fax to 703-784-2917 (DSN 278-2917) or by E-mail to
morgannc@mccdc.usmc.mil. Recommendations should include the following information:
l Location of change
Publication number and title
Current page number
Paragraph number (if applicable)
Line number
Figure or table number (if applicable)
l Nature of change
Add, delete
Proposed new text, preferably double-spaced and typewritten
l Justification and/or source of change
Additional copies: A printed copy of this publication may be obtained from Marine Corps
Logistics Base, Albany, GA 31704-5001, by following the instructions in MCBul 5600, Ma-
rine Corps Doctrinal Publications Status. An electronic copy may be obtained from the Doc-
trine Division, MCCDC, world wide web home page which is found at the following universal
reference locator: http://www.doctrine.quantico.usmc.mil.
Unless otherwise stated, whenever the masculine or feminine gender is

used, both men and women are included.
DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY
Headquarters United States Marine Corps
Washington, D.C. 20380-1775
24 September 2001
CHANGE 1 to MCWP 5-1
1. This change adds new Appendix J, Rapid Planning.
2. This change also replaces the second page of the book’s Table of Contents to
include Appendix J.
3. File this transmittal sheet in the front of the publication.
BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS
/s/
EDWARD HANLON, JR.
Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps
Commanding General
Marine Corps Combat Development Command
Quantico, Virginia
DISTRIBUTION: 143 000068 01

Marine Corps Planning Process
Table of Contents
Page
Chapter 1. Planning Overview

1001 Tenets of the Marine Corps Planning Process 1-2
1002 The Marine Corps Planning Process 1-3
Chapter 2. Mission Analysis
2001 Inputs 2-2
2002 Process 2-4
2003 Outputs 2-9
Chapter 3. Course of Action Development
3001 Inputs 3-2
3002 Process 3-2
3003 Outputs 3-5
Chapter 4. Course of Action War Game
4001 Inputs 4-2
4002 Process 4-2
4003 Outputs 4-4
Chapter 5. Course of Action Comparison and Decision
5001 Inputs 5-2
5002 Process 5-2
5003 Outputs 5-3
Chapter 6. Orders Development
6001 Inputs 6-1
6002 Process 6-2
6003 Outputs 6-2
Chapter 7. Transition
7001 Inputs 7-1
7002 Process 7-2
7003 Outputs 7-3
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
MCWP 5-1
Appendices
A Marine Corps Planning in Joint Operations A-1
B Warfighting Functions B-1
C Organization for Planning C-1
D Marine Corps Planning Process Tools D-1
E Wargaming E-1
F Commander and Staff Estimates F-1
G Basic Operation Plans, Operation Orders, Annexes, and Appendices G-1
H Glossary H-1
I References I-1
J Rapid Planning J-1
Notes
DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY
Headquarters United States Marine Corps
Washington, D.C. 20308-1775
5 January 2000
FOREWORD
1. PURPOSE
Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP) 5-1, Marine Corps Planning Process, de-
scribes a planning process that supports decisionmaking by the commander. It is also a vehicle
that conveys the commander’s decisions to his subordinates. It is applicable to all echelons of
command and across all ranges of military operations.
The Marine Corps Planning Process (MCPP) complements joint deliberate and crisis action
planning and the naval planning process. It is a responsive and flexible process that can adapt to
the needs of any size unit and adjust to any timetable. The Marine Corps planning process em-
bodies our maneuver warfare doctrine with its tenets of top-down planning, single-battle con-
cept, and integrated planning in order to generate and maintain tempo.
2. SCOPE
This publication links to higher-level Marine Corps doctrine by describing how different eche-
lons of command can adapt the planning process to their needs and illustrating a variety of
planning tools (i.e., matrices, worksheets, formats, and examples). Although the publication is
written for planning at the Marine Corps component, Marine expeditionary force (MEF), and
major subordinate command (MSC) levels, the planning process is easily scalable to the regi-
ment, group, battalion, or squadron levels.
3. SUPERSESSION
MCWP 5-1 replaces the planning process and orders portions of Fleet Marine Force Manual
(FMFM) 3-1, Command and Staff Action, dated 21 May 1979.
4. CERTIFICATION
Reviewed and approved this date.
BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS
J. E. RHODES
Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps
Commanding General
Marine Corps Combat Development Command
DISTRIBUTION: 143 000068 00

Chapter 1
Planning Overview
“Planning involves projecting our thoughts forward in time and space to influ-
ence events before they occur rather than merely responding to events as they
occur. This means contemplating and evaluating potential decisions and actions
in advance.”1
—MCDP 5, Planning
The Marine Corps Planning Process (MCPP) sup- l Support the exercise of initiative.
ports the Marine Corps warfighting philosophy of l Shape the thinking of planners.
maneuver warfare. Since planning is an essential
and significant part of command and control, the More than anything else, the considerations of
Marine Corps Planning Process recognizes the time and uncertainty dictate the approach to plan-
commander’s central role as the decisionmaker. It ning, and are its defining features. Time is most
helps organize the thought processes of a com- often the scarcest resource and is vital to the plan-
mander and his staff throughout the planning and ning process. The commander must adjust the
execution of military operations. The Marine planning process to optimize this perishable re-
Corps Planning Process focuses on the mission source. When time is critical, the commander uses
and the threat. It capitalizes on the principle of intuition, judgment, and experience to guide his
unity of effort and supports the establishment and staff and subordinate commanders. Since plan-
maintenance of tempo. The Marine Corps Plan- ning is future-oriented, and the future is uncertain,
ning Process is applicable across the range of mil- all planning is based on imperfect knowledge and
itary operations and is designed for use at any involves assumptions. This uncertainty increases
echelon of command. The process can be as de- with the length of the planning horizon and the
tailed or as abbreviated as time, staff resources, rate of change in the environment. Given the fun-
experience, and the situation permit. damental uncertainty of war, planners must recog-
nize that planning will not eliminate uncertainty,
Planning is the act of envisioning and determining but it allows the commander to decide and act ef-
effective ways of achieving a desired endstate. It fectively in the midst of uncertainty.
supports the commander in making decisions in a
time-constrained and uncertain environment. The Marine Corps Planning Process is applicable
Whether planning is performed at the strategic, across the range of military operations and is de-
operational, or tactical level, its key functions, as signed for command and staff actions at any ech-
identified in MCDP 5, Planning, are to— elon of command. Commanders at higher
echelons tend to use a more formal and detailed
l Direct and coordinate actions. approach to the Marine Corps Planning Process.
l Develop a shared situational awareness. Higher echelons can consist of a component,
l Generate expectations about how actions Marine expeditionary force (MEF), and major
will evolve and how they will affect the de- subordinate commands (MSCs) (e.g., division,
sired outcome. wing, or force service support group). These
1-2_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
commands typically consist of larger staffs, have a. Top-Down Planning

longer planning horizons, and have access to Planning is a fundamental responsibility of com-
more information. Commanders at lower eche- mand. The commander must not merely partici-
lons, such as a regiment and/or group and below, pate in planning, he must drive the process. His
may modify the planning process to meet their intent and guidance are key to planning. The com-
situation (staff resources, shorter planning hori- mander uses planning to gain knowledge and situ-
zons, information available). Whether planning ational awareness to support his decisionmaking
occurs at the component level, the battalion level, process. His plan, communicated in oral, graphic,
or the squadron level, the commander and his or written form, translates his guidance into a con-
staff must master the Marine Corps Planning cept of operations. His subordinate commanders
Process so they can fully participate in integrated use his guidance and concept of operations to ac-
planning. complish the mission.
The Marine Corps Planning Process is an inter- b. Single-Battle Concept

nal planning process used by Marine Corps oper- Operations or events in one part of the bat-
ating forces. It aligns with and complements the tlespace may have profound and often unintended
joint deliberate and crisis action planning proc- effects on other areas and events, therefore a
esses found in Joint Pub 5-0, Doctrine for Plan- commander must always view the battlespace as
ning Joint Operations. Appendix A discusses the an indivisible entity. The single-battle concept
relationship between the Marine Corps Planning allows the commander to effectively focus the
Process and joint planning. When designated as a efforts of all the elements of the force to accom-
joint force commander or when preparing a sup- plish the mission. While the battlespace may be
porting plan in a campaign, a Marine commander conceptually divided as deep, close, and rear to
and his staff will use the joint planning proce- assist planning and decentralized execution, the
dures and the Joint Operation Planning and Exe-
commander’s intent ensures unity of effort by
cution System (JOPES) found in the Joint Pub 5 fighting a single battle.
series. If planning an amphibious operation, a
Marine commander and his staff refer to Joint
c. Integrated Planning
Pub 3-02, Joint Doctrine for Amphibious Opera-
tions, for guidance. Integrated planning is a disciplined approach to
planning that is systematic, coordinated, and
thorough. It is based on the warfighting functions
of command and control, maneuver, fires, intelli-
1001. Tenets of the Marine gence, logistics, and force protection. Planners
Corps Planning Process use these warfighting functions to integrate the
planning effort and supervise execution of the
The tenets of the Marine Corps Planning plan. Planners use integrated planning to consid-
Process—top-down planning, single-battle con- er all relevant factors, reduce omissions, and
cept, and integrated planning—are derived from share information across all the warfighting func-
the doctrine of maneuver warfare. These tenets tions. The key to integrated planning is the as-
guide the commander’s use of his staff to plan signment of appropriate personnel to represent
and execute military operations. Top-down plan- each warfighting function. This does not mean
ning and the single-battle concept ensure unity of that a warfighting function representative cannot
effort, while the commander uses warfighting be a staff representative. A warfighting function
functions (see app. B) as the building blocks of representative must be knowledgeable and expe-
integrated planning. rienced in his functional area. See appendix B for
further information on the warfighting functions.
Marine Corps Planning Process ________________________________________________________________________________ 1-3
1002. The Marine Corps a. Mission Analysis

Planning Process Mission analysis is the first step in planning, and
it drives the Marine Corps Planning Process. Its
The Marine Corps Planning Process establishes purpose is to review and analyze orders, guid-
procedures for analyzing a mission, developing ance, and other information provided by higher
and wargaming courses of action (COAs) against headquarters and to produce a unit mission state-
the threat, comparing friendly COAs against the ment.
commander’s criteria and each other, selecting a
COA, preparing an operation order (OPORD) or b. Course of Action Development
operation plan (OPLAN) for execution, and transi- During COA development, planners use the mis-
tioning the order or plan to those tasked with its sion statement (which includes the higher head-
execution. The Marine Corps Planning Process or- quarters commander’s tasking and intent),
ganizes these procedures into six manageable, log- commander’s intent, and commander’s planning
ical steps (see fig. 1-1). These steps provide the guidance to develop COA(s). Each prospective
commander and his staff, at all levels, a means to COA is examined to ensure that it is suitable, fea-
organize their planning activities, to transmit plans sible, acceptable, distinguishable, and complete
to subordinates and subordinate commands, and to with respect to the current and anticipated situa-
share a common understanding of the mission and tion, the mission, and the commander’s intent.
commander’s intent. Interactions among various
planning steps allow a concurrent, coordinated ef- c. Course of Action War Game
fort that maintains flexibility, makes efficient use Course of action wargaming involves a detailed
of time available, and facilitates continuous infor- assessment of each COA as it pertains to the
mation sharing. See appendix C for further infor- enemy and the battlespace. Each friendly COA is
mation on organizing the planning effort.
Figure 1-1. Steps in the Marine Corps Planning Process.

1-4_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
wargamed against selected threat COAs. Course e. Orders Development

of action wargaming assists planners in identify- During orders development, the staff uses the
ing strengths and weaknesses, associated risks, commander’s COA decision, mission statement,
and asset shortfalls for each friendly COA. and commander’s intent and guidance to develop
Course of action wargaming also identifies orders that direct unit actions. Orders serve as the
branches and potential sequels that may require principal means by which the commander ex-
additional planning. Short of actually executing presses his decision, intent, and guidance.
the course of action, COA wargaming provides
the most reliable basis for understanding and im- f. Transition
proving each COA.
Transition is an orderly handover of a plan or or-
der as it is passed to those tasked with execution
d. Course of Action Comparison and of the operation. It provides those who will exe-
Decision cute the plan or order with the situational aware-
In COA comparison and decision, the commander ness and rationale for key decisions necessary to
evaluates all friendly COAs against established ensure there is a coherent shift from planning to
criteria, then evaluates them against each other. execution.
The commander then selects the COA that will
best accomplish the mission.
Chapter 2
Mission Analysis
“There are two parts to any mission: the task to be accomplished and the rea-
son . . . . The task describes the action to be taken while the intent describes the
desired result of the action.”2
—MCDP 6, Command and Control
INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS
IDENTIFY THE HIGHER HEADQUARTERS’ MISSION STATEMENT

COMMANDER’S INTENT COMMANDER’S INTENT
IDENTIFY PURPOSE OF THE OPERATION COMMANDER’S PLANNING
IDENTIFY TASKS GUIDANCE
COMMANDER’S BATTLE- PREPARE AND DEFINE INTELLIGENCE UPDATED IPB PRODUCTS
SPACE AREA EVALUATION AND IPB PRODUCTS SPECIFIED TASKS
COMMANDER’S INITIAL ANALYZE CENTERS OF GRAVITY ESSENTIAL TASKS
GUIDANCE CONVENE AND/OR ALERT THE RED CELL WARNING ORDER
HIGHER HEADQUARTER’S WARNING BEGIN DEVELOPMENT OF STAFF RESTRAINTS AND/OR CONSTRAINTS
ORDER OR OPORD ESTIMATES ASSUMPTIONS
RESTRAINTS AND/OR CON- RESOURCE SHORTFALLS
REFINE THE AREA OF INTEREST AND
STRAINTS HIGHER HEAD- SUBJECT MATTER EXPERT
THE AREA OF INFLUENCE
QUARTERS’ INTELLIGENCE SHORTFALLS
REVIEW AVAILABLE ASSETS AND IDEN-
AND IPB PRODUCTS CENTER OF GRAVITY ANALYSIS
TIFY RESOURCE SHORTFALLS
IDENTIFY SUBJECT MATTER EXPERT APPROVED CCIRs
SHORTFALLS REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
DETERMINE ADDITIONAL RESTRAINTS INITIAL STAFF ESTIMATES
AND CONSTRAINTS
DETERMINE RECOMMENDED CCIRs
IDENTIFY REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
DETERMINE ASSUMPTIONS
DRAFT THE MISSION STATEMENT
PRESENT A MISSION ANALYSIS BRIEF
COMMANDER APPROVES MISSION
STATEMENT
DRAFT A WARNING ORDER
REFINE THE COMMANDER’S INTENT
DEVELOP THE COMMANDER’S
PLANNING GUIDANCE
Mission analysis is the first step in planning. Its The keys to successful mission analysis are prepa-
purpose is to review and analyze orders, guid- ration, professional competence, and the identifi-
ance, and other information that is provided by cation of the operation’s purpose and all its
higher headquarters in order to produce a unit essential tasks. A thorough mission analysis fo-
mission statement. Mission analysis drives the re- cuses the efforts of the commander and the staff,
mainder of the Marine Corps Planning Process. thereby saving time. The staff should be well
2-2_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
organized, prepared to plan as required, and begin l Personal reconnaissance results.

development of staff estimates during mission l Intelligence preparation of the battlespace
analysis. To plan effectively, planners should products and other input from the staff.
have access to all documents relative to the mis-
sion, area of operations, etc. (e.g., standing oper- As more information becomes available, such as a
ating procedures, operation plans). higher headquarters order (including the mission
and intent of the higher headquarters [two levels
Before the commander and the staff can begin up] and the missions of supporting, supported,
mission analysis, they must develop an under- and adjacent commands), the commander con-
standing of their potential employment. Their un- ducts his preliminary analysis of the mission (or
derstanding must include the possible area of potential mission). The commander may conduct
operations; probable mission; available forces; his analysis using mission, enemy, terrain and
and political, military, and cultural characteristics weather, troops and support available-time avail-
of the area. They can gain this understanding from able (METT-T). He must also consider the ability
national-level intelligence products, other military of his command—personnel, materiel, and mo-
and governmental organizations, nongovernmen- rale—to accomplish the mission.
tal organizations, academia (military war colleg-
es, developmental centers, etc.), businesses, and
Once the commander completes his preliminary
their innate knowledge. If operations are already
analysis, he issues his commander’s orientation.
underway, the commander and the staff will re-
The commander’s orientation includes the com-
quire less time and information to gain under-
mander’s battlespace area evaluation (CBAE) and
standing and situational awareness.
initial guidance. Ideally, the commander personal-
ly issues his guidance to subordinate commanders
and principal staff. The commander’s orientation
2001. Inputs helps shape the remainder of the planning process.
Each step in the Marine Corps Planning Process (1) Commander’s Battlespace Area Eval-
begins with inputs. Inputs may derive from higher uation. The commander’s battlespace area eval-
headquarters, the commander or staff, or outputs uation is the commander’s personal vision based
from previous steps. Inputs to mission analysis in- on his understanding of the mission, the bat-
clude, but are not limited to, the commander’s ori- tlespace, and the enemy. The commander uses
entation, higher headquarters’ warning order or this evaluation to develop, assess, and communi-
operation order, restraints and/or constraints, and cate knowledge to the staff. This knowledge sup-
higher headquarters’ intelligence and intelligence ports the planning and decisionmaking processes.
preparation of the battlespace (IPB) products. The CBAE may be as simple as the commander’s
initial thoughts or it may be as complex as the
a. Commander’s Orientation product of his detailed analysis. It identifies the
Initially, the commander’s orientation is based on battlespace, centers of gravity, commander’s in-
a preliminary analysis of available information. tent, and commander’s critical information re-
The commander’s initial information may only be quirements.
the purpose of the operation as assigned by higher
headquarters, or it might include— (a) Commander’s Battlespace. The com-
mander’s battlespace consists of his area of oper-
l Higher headquarters’ plans, orders, and esti- ations, the area of influence, and the area of
mates, including IPB products. interest. The commander uses the information
l Force availability and suitability. he receives to create his initial view of the
battlespace. The commander passes his initial Subordinate commanders and staff personnel may
view of the battlespace to his planners for use assist the commander in the identification of cen-
throughout the remainder of the planning pro- ters of gravity. The G-2/S-2 may be particularly
cess. helpful in identifying enemy centers of gravity. If
the commander is unable to identify enemy cen-
The commander is normally assigned an area of ters of gravity, he may substitute enemy strengths.
operations. He considers his mission, forces, in- The commander provides the staff with initial en-
herent warfighting functions requirements, and emy centers of gravity so they can begin to identi-
area of operations (assigned or proposed) to deter- fy possible shaping and decisive actions.
mine an area of influence. The commander com-
pares his area of operations against the area of (c) Commander’s Intent. Commander’s intent
influence to determine if its size and location al- is the commander’s personal expression of the
low him to accomplish his mission. If, during the purpose of the operation. It must be clear, concise,
comparison process, the commander determines and easily understood. It may also include how
that the area of operations is too large, too small, the commander envisions achieving a decision as
or not located appropriately, he informs his supe- well as the endstate or conditions that, when satis-
rior commander. fied, accomplish the purpose.
The commander uses all the information dis- Commander’s intent helps subordinates under-
cussed above to define his area of interest. An ar- stand the larger context of their actions and
ea of interest includes all the factors (e.g., enemy guides them in the absence of orders. It allows
forces and capabilities, host nation support, flow subordinates to exercise judgment and initia-
of forces and supply, sustainment, command relative—in a way that is consistent with the higher
tionships, boundaries, fire support coordinating commander’s aims—when the unforeseen occurs.
measures) that may influence the commander’s This freedom of action, within the broad guid-
operations. His area of interest also encompasses ance of the commander’s intent, creates tempo
the area of influence and area of operations. during planning and execution. Higher and subor-
dinate commanders’ intents must be aligned. The
(b) Center of Gravity. MCDP 1, Warfighting, purpose of the operation may be derived from the
defines a center of gravity (COG) as any impor- “in order to . . .” portion of the mission statement
tant source of strength. It may be mental, moral, or the execution paragraph of the higher com-
or physical strength, power, or will. Centers of mander’s operation plan or operation order.
gravity may exist at each level of war: strategic,
operational, and tactical. It may be tangible or in-
tangible, and there may be multiple centers of
gravity. During commander’s orientation, the
commander may only know the purpose
The concept of centers of gravity applies equally of the operation as assigned by his higher
to both threat and friendly forces. At the tactical headquarters. As the commander proceeds
level, the enemy’s center of gravity is normally an through the planning process, he gains ad-
enemy unit. At the operational level, an enemy’s ditional insight on METT-T. As a result,
center of gravity may also be a threat capability; the commander may refine his intent to
e.g., the ability to mass fires or conduct resupply. include how he plans to achieve a deci-
Friendly centers of gravity are the strengths that sion and reach the endstate that accom-
the commander uses to attack enemy weaknesses plishes the purpose of the operation.
and to protect his forces from enemy attack.
2-4_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
(d) Commander’s Critical Information Re- who are familiar with the plan can provide valu-
quirements. The commander’s critical informa- able information and should actively participate
tion requirements (CCIRs) identify information in the planning process.
on friendly activities, enemy activities, and the en-
vironment that the commander deems critical to c. Restraints and/or Constraints
maintaining situational awareness, planning future
activities, and assisting in timely and informed de- Restraints are things a command prohibits its sub-
cisionmaking. The commander’s critical informa- ordinates from doing. For example, do not dam-
tion requirements focus the commander’s staff age religious shrines, archeological sites, or
and subordinate commanders planning and civilian schools. Constraints are things that may
collection efforts. They help the commander tailor limit a commander’s freedom of action. For ex-
the command and control organization. The com- ample, avoid damaging adjacent civilian build-
manders critical information requirements are ings, use only precision-guided munitions to
central to effective information management, destroy key targets in the city. Restraints and con-
which directs the processing, flow, and use of in- straints are included in the rules of engagement,
formation throughout the force. While the staff commander’s guidance, or instructions from high-
can recommend CCIRs, only the commander can er headquarters. Simply put, restraints are things
approve them. the commander cannot do; constraints are the
things he must do.
(2) Commander’s Initial Guidance. T h e
commander develops his initial guidance using d. Higher Headquarters’ Intelligence
his commander’s battlespace area evaluation, his and Intelligence Preparation of the
experience, and the mission information avail- Battlespace Products
able from higher headquarters. The commander’s Higher headquarters’ intelligence products and
initial guidance provides the staff and subordi- the commander’s IPB products are critical inputs
nate commanders with additional insight on how to mission analysis. These products are the basis
the commander views the mission. Depending on of the commander’s IPB process and are updated
the time available, the commander may provide and used throughout the operation. Higher head-
general guidance and specific points he wants the quarters’ intelligence products include their IPB
staff and subordinate commanders to consider (a products, intelligence estimates, intelligence sum-
particular enemy capability, a certain task organi- maries, and Annex B, Intelligence, of the opera-
zation, etc.). tion order. Intelligence preparation of the
battlespace products that the commander receives
b. Higher Headquarters’ Warning from higher headquarters and the intelligence
Order or Operation Order staff may include the modified, combined obsta-
cle overlay and threat situation templates. See ap-
A verbal or written order from a higher headquar- pendix D for more information on IPB products.
ters provides important information used in mis-
sion analysis. The higher headquarters’ planning
products, such as operation plans, operation or-
ders, and contingency plans provide input 2002. Process
throughout the Marine Corps Planning Process. If
higher headquarters’ orders or guidance is un- Once planners understand higher headquarters
clear, the commander or the staff should immedi- commander’s orders and intent and their own
ately seek clarification. Liaison officers and commander’s battlespace area evaluation and ini-
higher headquarters planning representatives tial guidance, they identify specified, implied, and
(e.g., G-5 liaison cell at joint force headquarters) essential tasks. Essential tasks are the foundation
of the mission statement because they define mis- (1) Specified Tasks. Specified tasks are spe-
sion success. After evaluating the battlespace, cifically assigned to a unit by its higher headquar-
commander’s intent, available assets, restraints ters. Specified tasks are derived primarily from
and/or constraints, assumptions, risks, initial the execution paragraphs of the higher headquar-
CCIRs, ongoing intelligence operations, and the ters operation order, but they may be found else-
initial timeline, planners draft a mission state- where, such as in the mission statement,
ment. Planners list specified and implied tasks, coordinating instructions, or annexes. Any speci-
assumptions, resource and subject matter expert fied task that pertains to any element of the unit
shortfalls, restraints and/or constraints, and infor- should be identified and recorded.
mation requirements to help them identify essen-
tial tasks and develop the mission statement. (2) Implied Tasks. Implied tasks may not be
specifically stated in the higher headquarters’ or-
Planners present mission analysis results to the der, but they are performed to accomplish speci-
commander and the staff to ensure that the mis- fied tasks. Implied tasks emerge from analysis of
sion statement and identified essential tasks facili- the higher headquarters’ order, the threat, and the
tate development of a COA that will accomplish terrain. Routine, inherent, or standing operating
the mission. After the mission analysis brief, the procedure tasks are not included in the list of
commander approves or modifies the proposed tasks.
mission statement.
(3) Essential Tasks. Essential tasks are spec-
a. Identify the Higher Headquarters’ ified or implied tasks that define mission success
Commander’s Intent and apply to the force as a whole. If a task must be
successfully completed for the commander to ac-
The higher headquarters’ operation order complish his purpose, it is an essential task. The
(OPORD) or fragmentary order (FRAGO) con- mission statement is derived from the essential
tains the higher commander’s intent.
tasks.
b. Identify Purpose of the Operation d. Prepare and Refine Intelligence and

The purpose of the operation may be found in the Intelligence Preparation of the
commander’s intent (provided in the command- Battlespace Products
er’s orientation). If not specifically stated, the op- Higher headquarters’ intelligence and IPB prod-
eration’s purpose may be derived from the higher ucts are reviewed and refined by the staff. New
commander’s intent or assigned missions or tasks. intelligence and IPB products, to include enemy
A clear understanding of the purpose of the opera- COAs, are prepared by the staff to support centers
tion is essential for maintaining tempo in both of gravity and mission analysis.
planning and execution.
e. Analyze Centers of Gravity
c. Identify Tasks The staff conducts a more detailed center of grav-
Using the information provided in the command- ity analysis based on the CBAE to identify or re-
er’s orientation and higher headquarters’ orders, fine threat and friendly centers of gravity and to
the staff identifies specified and implied tasks. Of determine which friendly and threat weaknesses
these, tasks that define mission success and may are critical vulnerabilities. A critical vulnerability
be applicable to the force as a whole are further is something that a force needs to function
identified as essential tasks. Approved taskings effectively and is, or can be made, vulnerable to
may become the basis for subparagraph 3c of the attack. Critical vulnerabilities provide an aiming
5-paragraph OPLAN or OPORD. point for the application of friendly strengths
2-6_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
against threat weaknesses. The staff identifies and h. Refine the Area of Interest and Area
directs the force’s strengths against the enemy’s of Influence
critical vulnerabilities in order to hamper his abil- The staff refines the area of interest and area of
ity to function; to defend, attack, or sustain his influence, which are identified in the CBAE,
forces; or to command his forces. Once identified, based on the current terrain analysis and current
critical vulnerabilities assist the commander in analysis of friendly and threat centers of gravity,
choosing where, when, and what will constitute capabilities, and limitations. The size of the area
decisive action. By attacking critical vulnerabili- of interest may change based on the commander’s
ties, the commander increases the potential that understanding of the situation. Refining the area
the attack may in fact be a decisive action. The of interest may generate requests for information.
staff also identifies friendly critical vulnerabilities The extent of the area of influence may change if
in order to protect friendly centers of gravity from forces are added or deleted, equipment capability
enemy attack. and availability change, or rules of engagement
change.
f. Convene and/or Alert the Red Cell
i. Review Available Assets and
A red cell assists the commander in assessing
Identify Resource Shortfalls
COAs against a thinking enemy. It develops like-
ly enemy COAs and portrays a doctrinally-correct As mission analysis is conducted, resource or ca-
enemy during wargaming. A red cell can range in pability shortfalls are noted. The commander and
size from an intelligence officer to a task-orga- staff identify critical shortfalls and request sup-
nized group of subject matter experts. A red cell port from higher headquarters.
refines the threat COAs that will be used during
COA and wargaming, develops planning support j. Identify Subject Matter Expert
tools such as the synchronization matrix, and may Shortfalls
also participate in the analysis of enemy centers Based on the activities anticipated during an oper-
of gravity. See appendix E for more information ation, planners determine what specialized plan-
on the red cell. ning or other expertise may be required. If this
expertise is not readily available, the commander
g. Begin Development of Staff should request augmentation.
Estimates
k. Determine Additional Restraints
The staff begins to gather information that will be
and Constraints
refined throughout the planning process and con-
tinuously develops and refines staff estimates. A Additional restraints and constraints may be iden-
staff estimate provides a logical and orderly ex- tified as a result of mission analysis. If additional
amination of all factors that affect mission accom- restraints and constraints are identified, they are
plishment. It provides the commander and the recorded and carried forward for use in subse-
staff with necessary information that supports de- quent planning.
cisionmaking throughout the planning process
and subsequent execution of the operation. De- l. Determine Commander’s
pending on the level of command and the time Recommended Critical Information
available, the staff estimate could be as formal as Requirements
a detailed written document or as informal as an Only the commander decides what information is
oral briefing. See appendix F for more informa- critical, but the staff may propose CCIRs to the
tion on formal staff estimates. commander. Commander’s critical information
requirements are continually reviewed and updat- cepting. It may prompt the higher headquarters to
ed or deleted as required. pursue facts that support the assumption or to re-
quest additional information.
m. Identify Requests for Information
Planners identify if additional information is re- o. Draft the Mission Statement
quired to support future plans or to conduct cur- The purpose of the operation and the essential
rent operations. Based on the initial IPB and tasks are the foundation for mission statement de-
information requirements (including CCIRs), the velopment. Planners should determine if the pur-
commander and staff identify gaps in the avail- pose of the operation and essential tasks are still
able information and intelligence. As requests for valid before they draft the mission statement. A
information are identified, they are forwarded to properly constructed mission statement answers
the appropriate staff section for action or to higher the following questions:
headquarters for answers.
l Who? (the forces that will conduct the oper-
n. Determine Assumptions ation)
Assumptions are suppositions about the current l What? (the type of operation)
situation or about future events that are assumed l When? (the time the operation will start and
to be true in the absence of facts. They are made end)
for both friendly and threat situations. Assump- l Where? (the location of the area of opera-
tions should only be used when necessary to tion)
allow the commander to make a decision con- l Why? (the purpose of the operation)
cerning the COA. A valid assumption should an-
swer all of the following questions: Who, what, when, and where are derived from the
essential tasks. Why is derived from the purpose
l Is it logical? of the operation.
l Is it realistic?
l Is it essential for planning to continue? p. Present a Mission Analysis Brief
l Does it avoid assuming away a threat capa- The staff presents a mission analysis brief to the
bility? commander to obtain approval of the mission
statement. The mission analysis brief reviews the
As planning continues, additional assumptions products of mission analysis. The mission analy-
may be needed and previous assumptions may be sis brief may be as simple as a proposed mission
deleted as the operation changes. A record is kept statement, or it may include the following:
of assumptions in order to track and validate them
as they are confirmed or disapproved. Assump- l Situation update (battlespace organization,
tions are contained in operation plans, but are not area of operations, area of interest, area of
included in operation orders. If the operation plan influence).
contains assumptions that are not validated before l Intelligence estimate and IPB products (ter-
execution, the assumptions become part of the in- rain analysis, weather analysis, threat inte-
herent risk of the operation. gration [possible COAs]).
l Higher headquarters’ mission.
If possible, assumptions are forwarded to higher l Higher headquarters’ commander’s intent
headquarters for validation. This ensures that the (two levels up).
higher headquarters commander understands the l Commander’s intent.
potential risks that a subordinate command is ac- l Commander’s initial guidance.
2-8_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
l Review of purpose and tasks (specified, im- so specific as to inhibit COA development. This
plied, essential). guidance may be expressed in terms of warfight-
l Review of assumptions. ing functions, types of operations, forms of ma-
l Review of restraints and/or constraints. neuver, etc.
l Review of shortfalls (resources, subject
matter experts). Types of Operations
l Center of gravity analysis (friendly, enemy). Offense MOOTW
l Requests for information. Movement to Contact Combating Terrorism
l Recommended CCIRs. Attack Counter Drug Operations
l Proposed mission statement. Exploitation Humanitarian Assistance
Pursuit NEO
q. Commander Approves Mission
Strikes and Raids
Statement
Defense
Once the commander receives the mission analy-
Mobile Defense
sis brief, he may approve or modify the proposed
mission statement or develop a new mission Position Defense
statement. He also approves all mission analysis
products. Once the mission statement is ap- Forms of Maneuver
proved, it remains valid unless a significant Frontal Attack
change occurs. The approved mission statement Penetration
becomes paragraph 2 of the 5-paragraph opera- Flank Attack
tion plan or operation order. Envelopment
Turning Movement
r. Draft a Warning Order Infiltration
Once the commander approves or modifies the re-

sults of mission analysis, the staff may draft and Planning guidance should include the command-
issue a warning order to subordinate units. The er’s vision of decisive and shaping actions, which
warning order should include the approved mis- assists the staff in determining the main effort,
sion statement (to include the commander’s in- phases of the operation, location of critical events,
tent), the commander’s guidance and any other and other aspects of the operation the commander
information that will assist subordinate units with deems pertinent to COA development. Guidance
their planning (e.g., changes in task organization, may include (but is not limited to)—
earliest time of movement).
l Threat vulnerabilities.
s. Refine the Commander’s Intent l Risk.
After reviewing the mission analysis briefing and l Any further restraints and/or constraints.
the mission statement, the commander may con- l Decisive and shaping actions.
sider making refinements to his previously issued l Selection and employment of the main ef-
commander’s intent. fort.
l Types of operations.
t. Develop the Commander’s l Forms of maneuver.
Planning Guidance l Command relationships.
The commander’s planning guidance focuses the l Task organization.
staff during COA development. It should be spe- l Arrangement of the operation (phasing).
cific enough to assist the planning effort, but not l Timing of the operations.
l Reserve. friendly maneuver, and dictates the time and place

l Evaluation of the battlespace. for decisive actions. It forces the enemy to adopt
l Mobility and countermobility. courses of action favorable to the commander’s
plans. The commander attempts to shape events in
(1) Decisive Actions. The purpose of any a way that allows him several options, so that by
military operation is mission success. Decisive the time the moment for decisive action arrives,
actions achieve mission success with the least loss he is not restricted to only one course of action.
of time, equipment, and, most importantly, lives.
They cause a favorable change in the situation or
cause the threat to change or to cease planned and 2003. Outputs
current activities. For an action to be truly deci-
sive, it must result in an action that is larger than Mission analysis activities produce outputs that
itself. Decisive actions create an environment in are vital inputs to subsequent steps in the Marine
which the enemy has either lost the physical capa- Corps Planning Process. The required outputs are
bility or the will to resist. The unit conducting the the mission statement, commander’s intent, and
decisive action is normally identified as the main commander’s planning guidance. Additional out-
effort. puts may include—
(2) Shaping Actions. Shaping sets condi- l Updated IPB products.

tions for decisive actions. Shaping actions are ac-
tivities conducted throughout the battlespace to l Specified tasks.
influence a threat capability or force, or the ene- l Implied tasks.
my’s decisionmaking process. The commander l Essential tasks.
shapes the battlespace by protecting friendly criti- l Warning order.
cal vulnerabilities and attacking enemy critical l Restraints and/or constraints.
vulnerabilities. Shaping incorporates a wide array
of functions and capabilities and is more than just l Assumptions.
fires and targeting. It may include direct attack, l Resource shortfalls.
psychological operations, electronic warfare, de- l Subject matter experts shortfalls.
ception, civil affairs, information management, l Center of gravity analysis (friendly and
public affairs, engineer operations, and preventive enemy).
medical services. Logistic operations (e.g., the l Approved CCIRs.
stockpiling of critical ammunition, fuel, and sup-
plies to facilitate future operations) shape both l Requests for information.
friendly and threat forces. l Initial staff estimates.
Shaping makes the enemy vulnerable to attack, All outputs should be retained and refined as nec-
impedes or diverts his attempts to maneuver, aids essary throughout the planning process.
(reverse blank)
2-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Chapter 3
Course of Action Development
“Decisionmaking requires both the situational awareness to recognize the

essence of a given problem and the creative ability to devise a practical
solution.”3
—MCDP 1, Warfighting
MISSION STATEMENT UPDATE INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION COMMANDER’S DESIGNATED

COMMANDER’S INTENT OF THE BATTLESPACE COAs FOR WARGAMING
COMMANDER’S PLANNING COMMANDER’S WARGAMING
GUIDANCE DISPLAY FRIENDLY FORCES
GUIDANCE
ASSESS RELATIVE COMBAT POWER COMMANDER’S EVALUATION
UPDATED IPB PRODUCTS
REFINE CENTER OF GRAVITY CRITERIA
SPECIFIED TASKS
DEVELOP INITIAL COAs:
IMPLIED TASKS UPDATED IPB PRODUCTS
COMMANDER’S INPUT
ESSENTIAL TASKS PLANNING SUPPORT TOOLS
COA REFINEMENT
WARNING ORDER INCLUDING COA GRAPHIC AND
DEVELOP COA GRAPHIC AND NARRATIVE
RESTRAINTS AND/OR CONSTRAINTS NARRATIVE
ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH COA
ASSUMPTIONS COURSE OF ACTION BRIEFING
CRITERIA
RESOURCE SHORTFALLS INITIAL ESTIMATES OF
PREPARE COA BRIEFING
SUBJECT MATTER EXPERT SHORT- SUPPORTABILITY AND ADDITIONAL
SELECT AND/OR MODIFY A COA:
FALLS REQUIREMENTS FROM
DEVELOP COMMANDER’S WAR-
CENTER OF GRAVITY ANALYSIS SUBORDINATE COMMAND
GAMING GUIDANCE
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION INITIAL STAFF ESTIMATES
DEVELOP COMMANDER’S EVALUA-
INITIAL STAFF ESTIMATES AND ADDITIONAL
TION CRITERIA
REQUIREMENTS FROM STAFF
AND WARFIGHTING
REPRESENTATIVES
A course of action (COA) is a broadly stated, po- Each prospective COA is examined to ensure that
tential solution to an assigned mission. The COA it is suitable, feasible, acceptable, distinguishable,
development step of the Marine Corps Planning and complete with respect to the current and an-
Process is designed to generate options for fol- ticipated situation, the mission, and the com-
low-on wargaming and comparison that satisfy mander’s intent.
the mission, commander’s intent, and guidance of
the commander. During COA development, plan- Normally, the commander develops several
ners use the mission statement (which includes COAs for follow-on wargaming and comparison.
the higher headquarters commander’s tasking and The commander may limit the number of COAs
intent), commander’s intent, and commander’s that the staff develops, especially if the staff is op-
planning guidance to develop courses of action. erating under severe time constraints.
3-2_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
3001. Inputs a. Update Intelligence Preparation of

the Battlespace
Course of action development requires a mission Intelligence preparation of the battlespace enables
statement, commander’s intent, and commander’s planners to view the battlespace in terms of the
planning guidance before development can begin. threat and the environment. It helps planners de-
Other planning tools useful in COA development termine how the enemy will react to proposed
include— friendly COAs, the purpose of enemy actions, the
most likely and most dangerous enemy COAs,
l Updated IPB products. and the type of friendly operations that the terrain
l Specified tasks. and infrastructure will allow. It is critical that
l Implied tasks. planners use IPB to answer the two fundamental
l Essential tasks. questions—What do I want to do? How do I want
l Warning order. to do it?—posed in COA development.
l Restraints and/or constraints.
l Assumptions. b. Display Friendly Forces
l Resource shortfalls. The graphic display of friendly forces allows
l Subject matter expert shortfalls. planners to see the current and projected locations
of friendly forces.
l Centers of gravity analysis (friendly and en-
emy).
l Commander’s critical information require- c. Assess Relative Combat Power
ments. Relative combat power assessment provides plan-
l Requests for information. ners with an understanding of friendly and threat
l Initial staff estimates. force strengths and weaknesses relative to each
other. While force ratios are important, the nu-
merical comparison of personnel and major end
items is just one factor that must be balanced with
3002. Process other factors such as weather, morale, level of
training, and cultural orientation. The goals of rel-
Planners develop broad COAs using METT-T, ative combat power assessment are to identify
threat versus friendly capabilities assessment, and threat weaknesses that can be exploited through
possible employment options. Using at least the asymmetric application of friendly strengths and
minimum required inputs, planners consider two identify friendly weaknesses that require protec-
fundamental questions: tion from threat actions.
l What do I want to do? d. Refine Center of Gravity Analysis

l How do I want to do it? Center of gravity analysis began during mission
analysis. The commander and staff refine center
Answering the question, “How do I want to do of gravity analysis based on updated intelligence
it?” is the essence of COA development. The fol- and IPB products, initial staff estimates, and input
lowing paragraphs address actions that assist from the red cell. The refined centers of gravity
COA development. and critical vulnerabilities are used in the devel-
opment of the initial centers of gravity.
e. Develop Initial Courses of Action (2) Course of Action Refinement. U s i n g

Using the commander’s planning guidance, as the commander’s planning guidance and input
well as updated IPB products, the relative combat from the initial COAs, the staff further develops,
power assessment, and center of gravity analysis, expands, and refines the courses of action to be
planners begin developing possible ways that the used in COA wargaming. The staff may also rec-
force can accomplish the mission. This requires ommend to the commander how a course of ac-
creativity, imagination, and unbiased and open- tion should be wargamed. This recommendation
minded participants. The number and detail of the may include the war game method to be used and
COAs to be developed depend on the time avail- which enemy COAs should be wargamed. See ap-
able for planning. Planners do not judge or elimi- pendix E for a discussion of wargaming.
nate potential COAs; all possibilities are recorded
for potential use. It is critical that COAs provide f. Develop Course of Action Graphic
the commander with a variety of employment op- and Narrative
tions. Factors that impact COA variety include— The COA graphic and narrative clearly portray
how the organization will accomplish the mission.
l Commander’s planning guidance. Together, the graphic and narrative identify who
l Forms of maneuver. (notional task organization), what (tasks), when,
where, how, and why (intent). The COA graphic
l Type of attack.
and narrative are essential and inseparable. To-
l Designation of main effort. gether, they help the commander, subordinate
l Requirement for supporting effort(s). commanders, and the staff understand how the or-
l Scheme of maneuver (land, air, or mari- ganization will accomplish its mission. The
time). graphic clearly portrays the scheme of maneuver
l Sequential and simultaneous operations. of the main and supporting efforts and critical ma-
neuver and fire support control measures, such as
l Sequencing essential task accomplishment.
objectives, boundaries, phase lines, and fire sup-
l Task organization. port coordination lines. The narrative provides the
l Use of reserves. purpose and tasks of the main and supporting ef-
l Rules of engagement. forts, the reserve, and the sequencing of the oper-
ation. The COA graphic and narrative, when
Planners use METT-T and an array of employ- approved by the commander, form the basis for
ment possibilities to design a broad plan of “how” the concept of operations and operations overlay
they intend to accomplish the mission. How they in the basic plan or order. See appendix D for
intend to accomplish the mission becomes the more information.
course of action.
g. Ensure Conformance with Course
(1) Commander’s Input to Initial Cours- of Action Criteria
es of Action. The commander reviews the ini- Once courses of action are developed, they should
tial COAs to see if they meet his commander’s conform with the following criteria:
intent. This is normally an informal review that is
conducted as rapidly as possible. This review en- l Suitability: Does the COA accomplish the
sures that valuable time is not spent developing purpose and tasks? Does it comply with the
COAs that will not be approved. The commander commander’s planning guidance?
may direct modifications to the initial courses of l Feasibility: Does the COA accomplish the
action or that additional courses of action to be mission within the available time, space,
developed. and resources?
3-4_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
l Acceptability: Does the COA achieve an ad- make recommendations on which course of action
vantage that justifies the cost in resources? they can best support. Staff estimates are devel-
l Distinguishability: Does the COA differ sig- oped by the commander’s staff and warfighting
nificantly from other COAs? representatives. They summarize those significant
l Completeness: Does the COA include all aspects of the situation which influence the course
tasks to be accomplished? Does it describe a of action, analyze the impact of all factors upon
complete mission (main and supporting ef- the course of action, and evaluate and determine
forts, reserve, and associated risks)? how the means available can best support the
course of action.
h. Prepare Course of Action Brief
i. Select and/or Modify a Course of
Developed courses of action, along with updated
Action
facts, assumptions, risk, etc., are briefed to the
commander. Each course of action is briefed sep- Following the COA briefing, the commander may
arately and is sufficiently developed to withstand select or modify the courses of action to be evalu-
the scrutiny of COA wargaming. Although the ated during COA wargaming. He may also pro-
COA briefing is tailored to the needs of the com- vide additional COA and wargaming guidance
mander and the time available, standardized brief- and express his desires concerning evaluation cri-
ing formats help focus the briefing and prevent teria.
omission of essential information. The COA
briefing will include the COA graphic and narra- (1) Develop Commander’s Wargaming
tive. It may also include— Guidance. The commander’s wargaming guid-
ance may include—
l Updated intelligence estimate (terrain and
weather analysis, threat evaluation). l A list of friendly courses of action to be
l Possible enemy COAs (at a minimum the wargamed against specific threat courses of
most likely and most dangerous, situation action (e.g., COA 1 against the enemy’s
template[s]). most likely, most dangerous, or most advan-
tageous COA).
l Mission statement.
l The timeline for the phase or stage of the
l Higher headquarters commander’s intent.
operation.
l Own commander’s intent.
l A list of critical events (e.g., shifting the
l Commander’s planning guidance. main effort).
l Relative combat power assessment. l Level of detail (e.g., two levels down).
l Rationale for each COA (why specific tac-
tics were used, why selected control mea- (2) Develop Commander’s Evaluation
sures were used, why units are arrayed on Criteria. Before the staff can begin the next
the map as depicted). step—the COA war game—the commander must
l Updated facts and assumptions. choose the evaluation criteria he will use to select
l Recommendations for wargaming (enemy the course of action that will become his concept
COAs, evaluation criteria). of operations. The commander establishes evalua-
tion criteria based on METT-T, judgment, and
The COA briefing may also include initial esti- personal experience. Commanders may choose
mates of supportability from subordinate com- evaluation criteria related to the principles of war,
mands and staff estimates. Estimates of such as mass or surprise. These evaluation criteria
supportability are provided by subordinate com- help focus the wargaming effort and provide the
manders. They evaluate the courses of action and framework for data collection by the staff. The
commander uses the collected data during COA l Force protection.

comparison and decision. Other criteria may in- l Time available and timing of the operation.
clude—
l Commander’s intent and guidance. 3003. Outputs

l Limitation on casualties.
l Exploitation of enemy weaknesses and/or Course of action development activities produce
friendly strengths. outputs that drive subsequent steps in the Marine
Corps Planning Process. Required outputs of
l Defeat of the threat centers of gravity. COA development are the commander’s designat-
l Degree of asymmetrical operations. ed COAs for wargaming, commander’s wargam-
l Opportunity for maneuver. ing guidance, and commander’s evaluation
l Concentration of combat power. criteria. Additional outputs may include—
l Speed.
l Updated IPB products.
l Balance between mass and dispersion. l Planning support tools including the COA
l Success despite terrain or weather restric- graphic and narrative.
tions. l Course of action briefing.
l Risk. l Initial estimates of supportability and addi-
l Phasing. tional requirements from subordinate com-
mands.
l Weighting the main effort.
l Initial staff estimates and additional require-
l Logistical supportability. ments from staff and warfighting function
l Political considerations. representatives.
(reverse blank)
3-6_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Chapter 4
Course of Action War Game
“Know the enemy and know yourself; in a hundred battles you will never be in
peril. When you are ignorant of the enemy but know yourself, your chances of
winning or losing are equal. If ignorant both of your enemy and of yourself, you
are certain in every battle to be in peril.”4
—Sun Tzu
Course of action wargaming allows the staff and nate commanders. Course of action wargaming
subordinate commanders to gain a common un- involves a detailed assessment of each course of
derstanding of friendly—and possible enemy— action as it pertains to the enemy and the bat-
courses of action. This common understanding al- tlespace. Each friendly course of action is war-
lows them to determine the advantages and disad- gamed against selected threat courses of action.
vantages of each course of action and forms the Course of action wargaming assists planners in
basis for the commander’s course of action com- identifying strengths and weaknesses, associated
parison and decision. It is based on wargaming risks, and asset shortfalls for each friendly course
and estimates prepared by the staff and subordi- of action. Course of action wargaming may
4-2_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
identify branches and potential sequels that re- tion against enemy courses of action, it does not
quire additional planning. Short of actually exe- compare friendly courses of action against each
cuting the course of action, COA wargaming other. Friendly courses of action are compared
provides the most reliable basis for understanding against each other in the next step, COA compari-
and improving each course of action. son and decision. Estimates provide the staff and
subordinate commanders views on the courses of
action. These views assist the commander during
4001. Inputs COA comparison and decision.
Course of action wargaming requires the com- a. Conduct COA War Game
mander’s designated courses of action for war- The staff may conduct wargaming using the ene-
gaming, wargaming guidance, and evaluation my’s most likely, most dangerous, and most ad-
criteria. Other inputs useful in COA wargaming vantageous (to friendly forces) courses of action.
include— The commander approves the enemy courses of
action that will be used during wargaming. If pos-
l Updated IPB products. sible, enemy courses of action are played by a
l Planning support tools including the COA “thinking enemy” in the form of a red cell. See
graphic and narrative and synchronization appendix E for additional discussion on wargam-
matrix. ing and the red cell.
l Estimates of supportability and additional
requirements from subordinate command- When conducted formally, wargaming is a disci-
ers. plined, interactive process that examines the exe-
l Staff estimates and additional requirements cution of the friendly courses of action in relation
from staff and/or warfighting representa- to the enemy. When conducted informally, it may
tives, including an updated intelligence esti- be as simple as a “What if?” conversation be-
mate with an event template and threat tween the commander and staff. Wargaming re-
courses of action. lies heavily on the operational judgment and
l Updated facts and assumptions. experience of the participants. Whether formal or
informal, wargaming attempts to foresee the ac-
tion, reaction, and counteraction dynamics of
friendly versus enemy courses of action. During
4002. Process wargaming—
During COA wargaming, the staff evaluates the l Evaluate each course of action independent-
effectiveness of friendly courses of action against ly. Do not compare one course of action
both the enemy’s courses of action and the com- with another during the war game.
mander’s evaluation criteria. The staff makes ad- l Remain unbiased and avoid making prema-
justments to identified problems and weaknesses ture conclusions.
of the friendly courses of action and identify
l Continually assess the suitability, feasibili-
branches and sequels. Each friendly course of ac-
ty, acceptability, distinguishability, and
tion is wargamed independently against selected
completeness of each course of action.
enemy courses of action. Course of action war-
l Record the advantages and disadvantages of
gaming helps the commander determine how best
each course of action.
to apply his strength against the enemy’s critical
vulnerabilities while protecting his critical vulner- l Record data based on commander’s evalua-
abilities. Wargaming pits friendly courses of action criteria for each course of action.
l Keep to the established timeline of the war war game. The brief includes the advantages and
game. disadvantages of each course of action and sug-
l Identify possible branches and potential se- gested modifications. It may also include—
quels for further planning.
l Enemy COA situation templates:
b. Refine Staff Estimates and n Updated intelligence estimate (terrain,
Estimates of Supportability weather, enemy).
The commander’s staff and subordinate com- n Wargamed enemy courses of action.
mands continue to develop their staff estimates l Mission analysis and COA development
and estimates of supportability. These estimates products:
are used during the next step, COA comparison n Higher, supporting, supported, and adja-
and decision. Criteria used in the development of cent commander’s mission statements
estimates may include— (two levels up).
n Tasks and intent provided by higher head-
l Risk assessment. quarters.
l Casualty projections and/or limitations. n Commander’s intent for subordinate
l Personnel replacement requirements. units.
l Projected enemy losses. n Overview of courses of action.
l Enemy prisoners of war procedures. n Wargame technique used.
l Intelligence collection requirements and n Wargamed critical events.
limitations.
l COA war game products and results (see
l Rules of engagement. app. D for more information on Marine
l High-value targets. Corps Planning Process tools)—
l High-payoff targets. n COA war game worksheet.
l Support (fires, logistics, aviation) strengths n Identification of any additional tasks.
and limitations.
n Revised COA graphic and narrative.
l Projected assets and resource requirements.
n List of critical events and decision points.
l Operational reach.
l Projected allocation of mobility assets, lift, n Branches and potential sequels.
and sorties versus availability. n Assets required and shortfalls.
l Requirement for prepositioning equipment n New requests for information.
and supplies. n Estimated time required for the operation.
l Projected location of units and supplies for n Any accepted risk.
future operations. l Recommended changes to the commander’s
l Projected location of the combat operations evaluation criteria.
center and command post echelons (rear,
main, tactical). d. Refine Intelligence Preparation of
l Command and control system’s require- the Battlespace Products
ments. The staff refines and prepares IPB products as
necessary to support the next step, COA compari-
c. Prepare Course of Action War son and decision.
Game Brief
The COA war game brief presents the command-
er with the results of the staff’s evaluation and
4-4_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
4003. Outputs n Synchronization matrix.

l War game results:
COA war game activities produce outputs that n Initial task organization.
drive subsequent steps in the Marine Corps Plan- n Identification of assets required and short-
ning Process. Required outputs of COA wargam- falls.
ing are the wargamed COA graphic and narrative n Refined CCIRs.
and information on the commander’s evaluation n List of critical events and decision points.
criteria. Additional outputs may include—
l Refined staff estimates.
l Updated IPB products. l Subordinate commander’s estimates of sup-
portability.
l Planning support tools:
l Branches and sequels identified for further
n COA war game worksheet.
planning.
Chapter 5
Course of Action Comparison and Decision
“The first principle of a [commander] is to calculate what he must do, to see if

he has all the means to surmount the obstacles with which the enemy can oppose
him and, when he has made his decision, to do everything to overcome them.”5
—Napoleon Bonaparte
WARGAMED COA(s) GRAPHICS AND

NARRATIVE
INFORMATION ON COMMANDER’S
EVALUATION CRITERIA
UPDATED IPB PRODUCTS
PLANNING SUPPORT TOOLS:
COA WAR GAME WORKSHEET CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS
SYNCHRONIZATION MATRIX PERFORM COA EVALUATION UPDATED IPB PRODUCTS
WAR GAME RESULTS: PERFORM COA COMPARISON PLANNING SUPPORT TOOLS
INITIAL TASK ORGANIZATION MAKE COMMANDER’S DECISION UPDATED CCIRs
IDENTIFICATION OF ASSETS PREPARE THE CONCEPT OF STAFF ESTIMATES
REQUIRED AND SHORTFALLS OPERATIONS COMMANDER’S IDENTIFICATION
UPDATED CCIRs ISSUE THE WARNING ORDER OF BRANCHES FOR FURTHER
LIST OF CRITICAL EVENTS AND REFINE IPB PRODUCTS PLANNING
DECISION POINTS WARNING ORDER
REFINED STAFF ESTIMATES
SUBORDINATE COMMANDER’S
ESTIMATES OF SUPPORTABILITY
BRANCHES AND SEQUELS
IDENTIFIED FOR FURTHER
PLANNING
During COA comparison and decision, the com- tion that needs further staff attention. Finally, a
mander evaluates all friendly courses of action warning order may be issued to subordinate com-
against established criteria, evaluates them manders.
against each other, and selects the course of action
that he believes will best accomplish the mission. This step requires the commander, subordinate
The commander may also refine his mission state- commanders, and staff involvement from start to
ment (including his commander’s intent and es- finish. Ideally, all participants attend one collec-
sential tasks) and concept of operations, and tive meeting. If attendance by all participants is
identify any branches of the chosen course of ac- not possible, the commander may interact with
5-2_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
subordinates in several separate meetings or a. Perform Course of Action

through electronic means (e.g., video teleconfer- Evaluation
ence). The commander uses the information gathered,
which was based on his evaluation criteria, to
elect a course of action to develop into his con-
5001. Inputs cept of operations. In a discussion led by the com-
mander or his representative (i.e., chief of staff,
COA comparison and decision inputs require deputy commander), each course of action is ex-
wargamed COA(s) graphics and narratives and in- amined against the commander’s evaluation crite-
formation on the commander’s evaluation criteria. ria. Advantages and disadvantages of each course
Other inputs useful in COA comparison and deci- of action are discussed and recorded. Subordinate
sion may include— commanders, staffs, and planners provide feed-
back in their areas of expertise.
l Updated IPB products.
l Planning support tools: The commander can evaluate courses of action
n COA war game worksheet. through a number of approaches. One approach is
n Synchronization matrix. to evaluate each course of action against all the
commander’s evaluation criteria to give the com-
l War game results:
mander a view of the entire course of action. An-
n Initial task organization. other approach is to evaluate all of the courses of
n Identification of assets required and short- action against each of the commander’s evalua-
falls. tion criteria so the commander gains a perspective
n Updated CCIRs. from each separate criterion. Regardless of the ap-
n List of critical events and decision points. proach used, staff and subordinate commanders
l Refined staff estimates. provide estimates and judgments to the com-
l Subordinate commander’s estimates of sup- mander.
portability.
l Branches and sequels identified for further b. Perform Course of Action
planning. Comparison
The results of the COA evaluation allow the com-
mander to conduct COA comparison. The com-
5002. Process mander may use a comparison and decision
matrix to help him compare one course of action
The COA comparison and decision process at against another. (See app. D for more information
lower levels of command may simply be an infor- on the comparison and decision matrix.) Course
mal exchange of information between the com- of action comparison provides the commander
mander and selected staff members concerning with an understanding of the relative merit of
the results of the war game. At higher levels of each course of action and aids in his decisionmak-
command, the process is normally a formal se- ing process.
quence of activities that may involve the follow-
ing actions. c. Make Commander’s Decision
Once all courses of action are evaluated and com-
pared, the commander selects a course of action.
In making his decision, the commander may— The concept of operations includes a complete de-
scription with graphics and narrative.
l Select a course of action without modifica-
tion. e. Issue the Warning Order
l Modify a course of action to overcome dis- With the preparation of the concept of operations,
advantages. the commander may issue another warning order
l Develop a new course of action by combin- to allow subordinate commanders to begin con-
ing favorable elements of multiple courses current planning.
of action.
l Discard all courses of action and resume f. Refine Intelligence Preparation of
mission analysis or COA development, as the Battlespace Products
required. The staff refines and prepares IPB products as a
result of COA comparison and decision.
Once the commander has made a decision, he
should conduct a review of the course of action
with subordinate commanders. He must review 5003. Outputs
his mission statement to ensure that he has cap-
tured all essential tasks required by the selected
The output of COA comparison and decision pro-
course of action. The commander’s decision
vides the basis for orders development. The re-
guides the preparation of the concept of opera-
quired output is the concept of operations.
tions and orders development.
Additional outputs may include—
d. Prepare the Concept of Operations l Updated IPB products.
The staff prepares the concept of operations that l Planning support tools.
is the basis of the next step, orders development. l Updated CCIRs.
The concept of operations is the basis for support-
l Staff estimates.
ing concepts such as the concept of fires, logis-
l Commander’s identification of branches for
tics, or force protection. Included in the concept
further planning.
of operations is a general description of actions to
be taken and a generic organization for combat. l Warning order.
(reverse blank)
5-4_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Chapter 6
Orders Development
“As a rule, plans should contain only as much detail as required to provide sub-
ordinates the necessary guidance while allowing as much freedom of action as
possible.”6
—MCDP 5, Planning
INITIAL TASK ORGANIZATION

MISSION STATEMENT
COMMANDER’S INTENT
CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS
SPECIFIED AND IMPLIED TASKS REFINE IPB PRODUCTS
UPDATED INTELLIGENCE AND IPB PREPARATION OF ORDER
THE ORDER OR PLAN
PRODUCTS REFINED INTELLIGENCE
OR PLAN
PLANNING SUPPORT TOOLS AND IPB PRODUCTS
ORDERS RECONCILIATION
UPDATED CCIRs PLANNING SUPPORT TOOLS
ORDERS CROSSWALK
STAFF ESTIMATES OUTLINE FRAGOs
COMMANDER APPROVES
COMMANDER’S IDENTIFICATION OF FOR BRANCHES
ORDER OR PLAN
BRANCHES FOR FURTHER PLANNING
WARNING ORDER
EXISTING PLANS, SOPs, AND ORDERS
CHIEF OF STAFF OR EXECUTIVE
OFFICER ORDERS DEVELOPMENT
GUIDANCE
The orders development step in the Marine Corps The chief of staff or executive officer, as appro-
Planning Process communicates the commander’s priate, directs orders development. The order con-
intent, guidance, and decisions in a clear, useful tains only critical or new information—not
form that is easily understood by those executing routine matters normally found in standing oper-
the order. An order is a written or oral communi- ating procedures. A good order is judged on its
cation that directs actions and focuses a subordi- usefulness—not its weight.
nate’s tasks and activities toward accomplishing
the mission. Various portions of the order, such as
the mission statement and staff estimates, have 6001. Inputs
been prepared during previous steps of the Marine
Corps Planning Process. The initial task organization, mission statement,
commander’s intent, concept of operations, and
6-2_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
specified and implied tasks are the required inputs and plans must be clear, concise, timely, and
to orders development. Other inputs may in- useful. See appendix G for operation plan, opera-
clude— tion order, annex, and appendix formats.
l Updated intelligence and IPB products. c. Orders Reconciliation

l Planning support tools. Orders reconciliation is an internal process in
l Updated CCIRs. which the staff conducts a detailed review of the
l Staff estimates. entire order. This reconciliation ensures that the
l Commander’s identification of branches for basic order and all the annexes, appendixes, etc.,
further planning. are complete and in agreement. It identifies dis-
l Warning order. crepancies or gaps in the planning. If discrepan-
l Existing plans, standing operating proce- cies or gaps are found, the staff takes corrective
dures, and orders. action. Specifically, the staff compares the com-
l Chief of staff or executive officer orders de- mander’s intent, the mission, and the CCIRs
velopment guidance. against the concept of operations and the support-
ing concepts (e.g., maneuver, fires, support).
Priority intelligence requirements and the intelli-
gence collection plan must support the CCIRs.
6002. Process
d. Orders Crosswalk
Normally, the chief of staff or executive officer
coordinates with staff principals to assist the G-3/ During the orders crosswalk, the staff compares
S-3 in developing an order. The chief of staff or the order with the orders of higher and adjacent
executive officer dictates the format for the order, commanders to achieve unity of effort and ensure
sets and enforces the time limits and development that the superior commander’s intent is met. It
sequence, and determines which annexes are pub- identifies discrepancies or gaps in planning. If
lished by which staff section. discrepancies or gaps are found, the staff takes
corrective action.
a. Refine Intelligence Preparation of
the Battlespace Products e. Commander Approves Order or
Plan
The staff refines or prepares IPB products to sup-
port orders development. The final action in orders development is the ap-
proval of the order or plan by the commander.
While the commander does not have to sign every
b. Preparation of Order or Plan
annex or appendix, it is important that he reviews
Orders are produced in a variety of forms. Orders and signs the basic order or plan.
or plans can be detailed, written documents with
many supporting annexes, or they can be simple
verbal commands. Their form depends on time
available, complexity of the operation, and levels 6003. Outputs
of command involved. Supporting portions of the
order or plan, such as annexes and appendixes, The output of orders development is an approved
are based on staff estimates, subordinate com- order or plan. Additional outputs may include—
mander’s estimates of supportability, and other
planning documents. If the basic order has been l Refined intelligence and IPB products.
published, a FRAGO may be issued to subordi- l Planning support tools.
nate commanders. Whatever the format, orders l Outline FRAGOs for branches.
Chapter 7
Transition
“. . . plans and orders exist for those who receive and execute them rather than
those who write them.”7
—MCDP 5, Planning
THE ORDER OR PLAN

REFINED INTELLIGENCE AND IPB SUBORDINATE COMMANDER
PRODUCTS AND STAFFS THAT ARE:
TRANSITION BRIEF
PLANNING SUPPORT TOOLS READY TO EXECUTE THE ORDER
DRILLS
OUTLINE FRAGOs FOR BRANCHES AND POSSIBLE BRANCHES
CONFIRMATION BRIEF
INFORMATION ON POSSIBLE FUTURE PREPARED TO PLAN
MISSIONS (SEQUELS) SEQUELS
ANY OUTSTANDING ISSUES
The purpose of transition is to provide a success- Transition occurs at all levels of command. A for-
ful shift from planning to execution. It enhances mal transition normally occurs on staffs with sep-
the situational awareness of those who will exe- arate planning and execution teams. Planning
cute the order, maintains the intent of the concept time and personnel may be limited at lower levels
of operations, promotes unity of effort, and gener- of command, such as the regiment, aircraft group,
ates tempo. or below; therefore, transition may take place in-
tuitively because the planners are also the execu-
Transition is a continuous process that requires a tors.
free flow of information between commanders
and staffs by all available means. At higher eche-
lons, such as the component, the MEF, or an MSC 7001. Inputs
where the planners may not be executors, the
commander may designate a representative as a For transition to occur, an approved order or plan
proponent for the order or plan. After orders de- must exist. The approved order or plan, along
velopment the proponent takes the approved order with the products of continuing staff actions,
or plan forward to the staff charged with supervis- forms the input for transition. These inputs may
ing execution. As a full participant in the develop- include—
ment of the plan, the proponent is able to answer
questions, aid in the use of the planning support l Refined intelligence and IPB products.
tools, and assist the staff in determining necessary l Planning support tools.
adjustments to the order or plan.
l Outline FRAGOs for branches.
7-2_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
l Information on possible future missions (se- before the transition brief. The brief may include
quels). items from the order or plan such as—
l Any outstanding issues.
l Higher headquarters mission (tasks and in-
tent).
7002. Process l Mission.
l Commander’s intent.
Successful transition ensures that those charged l Commander’s critical information require-
with executing the order have a full understanding ments.
of the plan. Regardless of the level of command, l Task organization.
such a transition ensures that those who execute l Situation (friendly and enemy).
the order understand the commander’s intent, the
l Concept of operations.
concept of operations, and Marine Corps Planning
Process tools. Transition may be internal or exter- l Execution (including branches and potential
nal in the form of briefs or drills. Internally, tran- sequels).
sition occurs between future plans or future and l Planning support tools.
current operations. Externally, transition occurs
between the commander and his subordinate com- b. Transition Drills
mands. Drills are important techniques used during tran-
sition to ensure the greatest possible understand-
a. Transition Brief ing of the plan or order by those who must
At the higher levels of command, transition may execute it. Drills improve the ability of the com-
include a formal transition brief to subordinate or mander and staff to command and control opera-
adjacent commanders and to the staff supervising tions. A transition drill is a series of briefings,
execution of the order. At lower levels, it might guided discussions, walk throughs, or rehearsals
be less formal. The transition brief provides an used to facilitate understanding of the plan
overview of the mission, commander’s intent, throughout all levels of the command. Transition
task organization, and enemy and friendly situa- drills are conducted by the commander and his
tion. It is given to ensure that all actions necessary subordinate commanders or the commander and
to implement the order are known and understood the staff tasked with execution of the plan or or-
by those executing the order. The commander, der. Typically, a transition drill is the only drill
deputy commander, or chief of staff provides used at lower levels of command, where the staff
transition brief guidance, which may prescribe both develops and executes the plan. Transition
who will give the brief, the briefing content, the drills increase the situational awareness of the
briefing sequence, and who is required to attend. subordinate commanders and the staff and instill
Time available dictates the level of detail possible confidence and familiarity with the plan. Sand ta-
in the transition brief. Orders and supporting ma- bles, map exercises, and rehearsals are examples
terials should be transmitted as early as possible of transition drills.
c. Confirmation Brief how subordinate commanders intend to accom-

A confirmation brief is given by a subordinate plish their mission.
commander after he receives his order or plan.
Subordinate commanders brief the higher com-
mander on their understanding of commander’s
intent, their specific task and purpose, and the re-
7003. Outputs
lationship between their unit’s missions and the
other units in the operation. The confirmation The outputs of a successful transition are subordi-
brief allows the higher commander to identify nate commanders and staffs that are ready to exe-
gaps in his plan, identify discrepancies between cute the order and possible branches and prepared
his and subordinate commander’s plans, and learn to plan sequels.
(reverse blank)
7-4_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Appendix A
Marine Corps Planning in

Joint Operations
The Marine Corps will continue to operate in a joint environment. The Marine
Corps Planning Process is the vehicle through which commanders and their
staffs in the operating forces provide input to the joint planning process.
1. Types of Joint Planning

There are three types of planning at the joint level: campaign planning, deliber-
ate planning, and crisis action planning. Deliberate and crisis action planning
have distinct processes. Campaign planning uses deliberate and crisis action
processes to develop plans.
a. Deliberate Planning
The joint staff and combatant commanders use deliberate planning to develop
plans such as operation plans (OPLANs) and operation plans in concept form
(CONPLANs) in support of national strategy. The Joint Strategic Capabilities
Plan apportions forces and resources for use during deliberate planning by com-
batant commanders and their Service component commanders.
b. Crisis Action Planning
Crisis action planning is conducted in response to crises where national interests
are threatened and a military response is being considered. In crisis action plan-
ning, the time available for planning at the national level may be as little as a
few days. Crisis action planning procedures promote the logical, rapid flow of
information and the timely preparation of campaign plans or OPORDs.
2. The MCPP and Joint Planning

The Marine Corps Planning Process interfaces with the joint deliberate planning
process during the supporting plan development phase. See figure A-1. Support-
ing plans are developed once the combatant commander’s concept has been ap-
proved and a plan has been developed. Marine Corps supporting plans address
the tasks identified for Marine Corps operational forces and outline the actions
of assigned and augmenting forces. The Marine Corp Planning Process provides
a disciplined approach for the Marine Corps component commanders and staffs
to prepare Marine Corps supporting plans.
A-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Figure A-1. MCPP Interface with the Deliberate

Planning Process.
Marine Corps Order P3000.18, Marine Corps Planner’s Manual, establishes

Marine Corps policies, procedures, and standards for the development, mainte-
nance, and execution of Marine Corps war plans. The Marine Corps Planner’s
Manual describes Marine Corps service responsibilities within JOPES. It pro-
vides specific procedures for Headquarters, Marine Corps planners and for the
commanders and staffs in the Marine Corps operating forces for deliberate and
crisis action planning. This order addresses the combatant commander’s re-
quirements for standing plans, which includes sourcing the types and numbers
of units, sustainment for units, and replacement manpower.
The Marine Corps Planning Process interfaces with the crisis action planning
process beginning in situation development and throughout the process as
Marine Corps planners develop new plans, or expand or modify existing plans.
See figure A-2.
Marine Corps Planning Process ________________________________________________________________________________ A-3
Figure A-2. MCPP Interface with the Crisis Action

Planning Process.
(reverse blank)
1-4_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Appendix B
Warfighting Functions
Marine Corps warfighting functions encompass all military activities in the bat-
tlespace. Planners consider and integrate the warfighting functions when analyz-
ing how to accomplish the mission. Integrating the warfighting functions helps
achieve unity of effort and focus.
As stated in MCDP 1-2, Campaigning, maximum impact is obtained when all

warfighting functions are harmonized to accomplish the desired objective with-
in the shortest time possible and with minimum casualties. The six warfighting
functions are command and control, maneuver, fires, intelligence, logistics, and
force protection. These warfighting functions apply equally to both convention-
al operations and other types of operations such as military operations other than
war and information operations.
1. Command and Control

Command and control is the exercise of authority and direction over assigned or
attached forces in the accomplishment of a mission. It is how the commander
transmits his intent and decisions to the force and receives feedback. Command
and control involves arranging personnel, equipment, and facilities to allow the
commander to extend his influence over the force during the planning and con-
ducting of military operations.
2. Maneuver
Maneuver is the movement of forces for the purpose of gaining an advantage
over the enemy in order to accomplish an objective. It normally includes the
movement of forces on the battlefield in combination with fire or fire potential.
Maneuver is a dynamic element of combat, a means of concentrating forces for
decisive action to achieve the surprise, psychological shock, physical momen-
tum, and moral dominance that enables smaller forces to defeat larger ones.
3. Fires
Fires are the employment of firepower against the enemy’s air, ground, and sea
targets. Fires delay, disrupt, degrade, or destroy enemy capabilities, forces, or
facilities, as well as affect the enemy’s will to fight. It includes the collective
B-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
and coordinated use of target acquisition systems, direct and indirect fire weap-
ons, armed aircraft of all types, and other lethal and nonlethal means. Fires are
normally used in concert with maneuver and help to shape the battlespace, set-
ting conditions for decisive action.
4. Intelligence
Intelligence provides the commander with an understanding of the enemy and
the battlespace as well as identifying the enemy’s centers of gravity and critical
vulnerabilities. It assists the commander in understanding the situation, alerts
him to new opportunities, and helps him assess the effects of actions upon the
enemy. This warfighting function supports and is integrated with the overall op-
erational effort and is always focused on the enemy.
5. Logistics
Logistics encompasses all activities required to move and sustain military forc-
es. At the tactical level, logistics is referred to as combat service support and in-
volves arming, fueling, fixing equipment, moving, supplying, manning, and
providing personnel health and services.
6. Force Protection
Force protection is the measures taken to protect the force’s fighting potential so
that it can be applied at the appropriate time and place. It includes those mea-
sures the force takes to remain viable by protecting itself from the effects from
enemy activities and natural occurrences. Force protection safeguards friendly
centers of gravity and protects, conceals, reduces, or eliminates friendly critical
vulnerabilities.
Appendix C
Organization for Planning
The commander organizes his staff to gather, manage, and process information
essential to decisionmaking. Organization for planning not only involves per-
sonnel and structure, it is also affected by planning modes and the planning, de-
cision, execution, and assessment (PDE&A) cycle.
1. Planning Modes
The Marine Corps Planning Process is designated to facilitate planning at all
levels and to satisfy three modes of planning (orientation, contingency, and
commitment) as described in MCDP 5, Planning. Orientation planning is used
when the degree of uncertainty is so high that it is not worthwhile to commit to a
specific plan. Planners focus on assessing the situation and designing flexible
preliminary plans that can be adapted to a broad variety of situations. Contin-
gency planning is used when there is less uncertainty but enough is not known
about the situation to allow for the adoption of a specific plan. Normally, plan-
ners prepare for several contigencies, allowing the commander to respond
quickly when the situation requires action. Commitment planning is used when
there is certainty about the situation and the commander has selected a plan and
committed resources to executing the plan. See MCDP 5 for further discussion
on planning modes. Commanders and planners consider these modes when or-
ganizing their planning efforts to ensure they use a mode and planning sequence
appropriate to the situation. The Marine Corps Planning Process facilitates plan-
ning in each of these modes of planning.
These modes span the planning horizon based on degrees of uncertainty. Addi-
tionally, planning may also be viewed as a hierarchial continuum with conceptu-
al, functional, and detailed levels of planning. Conceptual planning is the
highest level, establishing aims, objectives, and broad concepts for action. De-
tailed planning is the lowest level of planning, translating the broad concept into
a complete and practicable plan. In between these two levels is the functional
level of planning. Functional planning involves elements of both conceptual and
detailed planning and is concerned with designing supporting concepts for war-
fighting functions such as maneuver or force protection. For instance, commit-
ment planning normally includes considerable detailed planning that facilitates
execution, while orientation planning most often remains at the conceptual plan-
ning level.
To gain and maintain tempo, commanders and their staffs must be involved in
all modes and levels of planning by ensuring a constant flow of information
C-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
vertically within the chain of command and laterally among staff sections. At
the small-unit level, this information exchange can be simple and direct—
commander to commander or operations officer to operations officer. In larger-
sized units, such as the component or MEF, a more formal arrangement that us-
es liaison officers and distinct planning organization is necessary due to the
scope and detail involved. The requirement to align with higher headquarters
planning organizations and to properly address the entire planning continuum
will also be a factor in determining the size and complexity of the planning or-
ganization.
Planning is an event-dominated process. Therefore, planning organizations

should be designed to enhance planning for significant events such as changes
in mission. Conversely, time-driven processes are a necessary, yet subordinate,
aspect of planning. Planners must address both time- and event-driven process-
es, while maintaining the proper perspective between the two. For example, the
air tasking order is critical to the planning and execution of operations, and it is
produced in a cycle that requires timely input from subordinates. Nevertheless,
the air tasking order is produced in support of the plan—it is not the plan.
2. Planning, Decision, Execution, and

Assessment Cycle
The PDE&A cycle is the process the commander and his staff use to plan opera-
tions, make accurate and timely decisions, direct the effective execution of oper-
ations, and assess the results of those operations. See figure C-1.
DECISION
PLANNING EXECUTION
ASSESSMENT
Figure C-1. Planning, Decision, Execution, and Assessment Cycle.

Marine Corps Planning Process ________________________________________________________________________________ C-3
The PDE&A is a complete cycle that starts with the initial receipt of the mission
and continues through mission accomplishment. It is both time and event driv-
en. It provides a framework that supports the commander’s efforts to assimilate
information in the chaotic environment of war to increase tempo through timely
and decisive actions.
3. Planning Organizations
The Marine Corps Planning Process is scaleable from the component level
down to the battalion and squadron level. Typically, resources, information, and
time available for planning are limited at the lower command levels; therefore,
planning organizations must form or adapt to meet these limitations. Command
and staff relationships are established and function within a defined
organizational structure. These relationships are key to providing the command
and control necessary to effect operational success.
Lower command levels, like battalions and air groups, adapt and consolidate
certain Marine Corps Planning Process planning responsibilities and functions
within their limited structures. Normally at these command levels, most Marine
Corps Planning Process procedures are performed by the commander and his
primary staff officers and selected special staff officers. Figure C-2 shows the
planning organization and relationships found at lower levels of command, such
as a battalion.
Figure C-2. Lower Level Organizations and Planning Relationships.

C-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Only at the higher levels of command (MEF, division, wing, or force service
support group) are specialized planning staff elements and organizations
formed. Figure C-3 illustrates planning organizations at the Marine Corps com-
ponent and MEF and their link to higher headquarters. The Marine Corps Plan-
ning Process at the component and MEF levels is primarily conducted by three
planning organizations: future plans, future operations, and current operations.
Their efforts must be coordinated for the smooth transition from long-term
planning to execution. To ensure integrated planning, these agencies must have
warfighting function representation from within the command, as well as subor-
dinate and adjacent commands. Manning limitations may require placing some
of this expertise in general support of the planning effort as a whole.
a. Sections
(1) Future Plans Section. The future plans section is normally under the
staff cognizance of the G-5. The G-5 forms a liaison element to the higher head-
quarters’ staff and integrates the higher headquarters plan into the MEF’s plan-
ning process, ensuring that it meets the intent of the higher commander.
The future plans section focuses beyond the immediate next battle or next phase
that is being planned to provide a link between higher headquarters and the fu-
ture operations section. The future plans section plans the command’s next mis-
sion. Upon receipt of a mission from higher headquarters, this section initiates
JOINT FORCE
COMMANDER
JOINT PLANNING
GROUP MARINE CORPS COMPONENT
CURRENT
OPERATIONS
FUTURE
OPERATIONAL PLANS
PLANNING
GROUP
FUTURE
OPERATIONS
PLANS
CURRENT FUTURE LIAISON
OPERATIONS PLANS ELEMENT
OPERATIONAL
PLANNING
CRISIS
TEAM
ACTION
TEAM
Figure C-3. Component and MEF Oraganizations and Planning

Relationships.
the MEF’s planning process and develops an outline plan. Depending on the sit-
uation, it may focus on a phase of a campaign, develop reconstitution require-
ments, or plan deployment. An operational planning team (OPT) may be formed
to focus the planning effort and gather relevant planning expertise. This sec-
tion’s responsibility is to get the mission correct with regard to MEF capabili-
ties, command relationship requirements, and battlespace geometry. It is this
effort that generates tempo external to the force.
The future plans section may also develop sequels, support relationships for the
next phase, and develop plans to ensure that the force does not reach a culminat-
ing point. It transitions to the future operations section the outline plan that pro-
vides the salient features of a mission that precedes detailed planning.
(2) Future Operations Section. The future operations section is under the
staff cognizance of the G-3 and is the focal point of the planning process. It usu-
ally forms the nucleus of the OPT and coordinates with both the future plans and
current operations sections to integrate planning of the next battle. The future
operations section fully integrates the other staff sections’ plans officers, war-
fighting function representatives, and subordinate unit liaison officers into the
planning process. It takes the outline plan from the future plans section and uses
it as the basis for further planning. The future operations section focuses on
changes to MEF or MSC missions; develops branch plans and sequels; and rec-
ommends potential CCIRs. This section interacts with intelligence collection
and the targeting process to shape the next battle. The current operations section
may provide a representative to the future operations section to guarantee that
the transition process is continuous (this representative returns to the current op-
erations section as a proponent for the next OPORD). The future operations sec-
tion’s efforts generate tempo internal to the force.
(3) Current Operations Section. The current operations section is under

the staff cognizance of the G-3. During operations, it receives the OPORD from
the OPT at the transition brief. The current operations section—
l Coordinates and executes the OPORD.

l Prepares and transmits OPORDs.
l Monitors operations of the force.
l Tracks CCIRs and immediately reports relevant information to the com-
mander.
l Analyzes battlespace information.
Branch plans are normally passed to the current operations section during the
transition brief. When an unforeseen enemy action begins to develop, the cur-
rent operations section will refine already existing branch plans or develop a
C-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
branch plan. To support the commander, the current operations section may de-
velop new COAs, allocate resources, and prepare FRAGOs to modify the cur-
rent OPORD. This section assesses shaping actions and the progress toward the
commander’s decisive actions, monitors the status of forces and materiel, moni-
tors rear area operations, coordinates terrain management, maintains essential
maps and information, and provides the future operations section with situation-
al awareness.
b. Teams
(1) Operational Planning Team. The OPT is a dynamic, ad hoc organiza-
tion that may be formed by either the future plans section or future operations
section to conduct integrated planning. It helps conduct mission analysis, devel-
ops and war games COAs, and assists the staff in the preparation and transition
of the order. Normally, the OPT is built around a core of planners from either
the future plans section or the future operations section and may include the fu-
ture plans or future operations officer, assistant plans or assistant future opera-
tions officer, future plans or future operations chief, and a clerk/plotter. It
integrates additional staff representatives (e.g., G-1, G-2, G-3, G-4, G-5, G-6,
staff judge advocate, provost marshal, health services, public affairs) as appro-
priate to the mission. The OPT may also be augmented by warfighting function
representatives, liaison officers, and subject matter experts needed to support
planning. The OPT serves as the linchpin between the future plans, future oper-
ations, and current operations sections.
(2) Crisis Action Team. The crisis action team falls under the staff cogni-
zance of the G-3. The crisis action team is usually formed in the initial stages of
a crisis and has the requirement to rapidly collect and manage information. It
can be task-organized to reflect the unique nature of each crisis. Often, at the
initial stage of a crisis, the commander’s primary concern is force readiness sta-
tus and deployment planning. The crisis action team may initiate the planning
process, develop situational awareness, and access previously prepared and
emerging planning products from JOPES. To facilitate a common situational
awareness, potential members of the crisis action team are identified in advance
and are recalled for initial crisis action planning. For extended operations, the
crisis action team’s planning and execution functions transition to the normal
planning sections (current operations, future operations, and future plans) and
their manning and functions are redefined. The crisis action team may assume
the functions of a rear element, primarily maintaining situational awareness for
follow-on and supporting units.
4. Warfighting Function Representatives

Warfighting functions encompass all military activities in the battlespace. Plan-
ners consider and integrate the warfighting functions when analyzing how best
to accomplish the mission. The warfighting functions include maneuver, intelli-
gence, fires, logistics, command and control, and force protection. The integra-
tion of warfighting functions helps to achieve focus and unity of effort and
provides a method for planners to think in terms of how each function supports
the accomplishment of the mission. Critical to this approach to planning is the
coordination of activities not only within each warfighting function but also
among all the warfighting functions. By using warfighting functions as the inte-
gration elements, planners ensure all functions are focused toward a single pur-
pose. This does not mean that the MEF or a major subordinate command is
restricted in their planning or conduct of operations (e.g., the ground combat el-
ement only considering maneuver or the aviation combat element only consider-
ing fires). Planners at all echelons of command must consider and integrate
activities within and among all the warfighting functions.
Warfighting function representatives should be selected because of their experi-

ence and training in the functional area. They should be trained and experienced
in the Marine Corps Planning Process. Consideration as to the rank of the war-
fighting function representative may be necessary at higher command levels. A
warfighting function representative may be on the commander’s staff, a member
of a subordinate unit staff, a commander of a supporting unit or organization
from another Service or nation, or any Marine qualified to address the issues of
a particular functional area. Designation as a warfighting function representative
may be an additional responsibility; for example, a Marine could serve simulta-
neously as a warfighting function representative, a staff member, and a staff rep-
resentative to the OPT.
5. Liaison to Support the MCPP

Liaison is the contact or intercommunication maintained between elements of
military forces to ensure mutual understanding and unity of purpose and action.
Liaison helps to reduce the fog of war through direct communications. It ensures
that senior commanders remain aware of the tactical situation by providing them
with exceptional, critical, or routine information; verification of information;
and clarification of operational questions. Overall, liaison is another tool to help
commanders overcome friction and accomplish their mission.
C-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
a. Command Liaison
Commanders of all organizations routinely initiate contact with commanders of
other units in their locale even though there may be no official command or sup-
port relationship between them. This contact opens the channels of communica-
tions to facilitate mutual security and support. This is dictated by METT-T as
well as by command relationships or by direction from a common superior.
b. Staff Liaison
Staff officers of all organizations routinely initiate contact with their counter-
parts at higher, lower, adjacent, supporting, and supported commands. This con-
tact opens channels of communication that are essential for the proper planning
and execution of military operations. Staff liaison may also include temporary
assignment of liaison elements to other commands.
c. Liaison Officers
The liaison officer is the most commonly used means of maintaining close, con-
tinuous contact with another command. He is the commander’s personal repre-
sentative. He has the special trust and confidence of the commander to make
appropriate recommendations and estimates in the absence of communications.
As necessary, the commander uses a liaison officer to transmit or receive critical
information directly with key persons in the receiving headquarters. The liaison
officer must possess the requisite rank and experience to properly represent his
command. The ability to communicate effectively is essential, as is sound judg-
ment. Equally, he must have immediate access to his commander.
d. Operational Planning Team Liaison Officers

The subordinate command’s OPT liaison officers are key contributors to the
Marine Corps Planning Process and the future operations plan. These liaison of-
ficers provide timely and accurate movement of information between the OPT
and their commands. Normally, this officer’s primary responsibility is to the
planning effort. He may only be able to provide part-time support to other activ-
ities such as logistic coordination or targeting.
e. Liaison Team
A liaison team, usually headed by an officer, is assigned when the workload or
need for better communications is greater than the capabilities of a single liaison
officer. The liaison team will normally consist of an officer, a liaison chief, cler-
ical personnel, drivers, and communications personnel with equipment. Mem-
bers of the liaison team may function as couriers when necessary. The grade of
the senior member of the liaison team depends on unit size and personnel avail-
able. Liaison teams are generally required for continuous operations.
f. Couriers
Although infrequently used because of the capabilities of electronic communi-
cations, the courier remains a valuable liaison element. The courier is more than
a messenger. He is expected to provide more information than is contained in
the message he is delivering. For this reason, the courier should possess suffi-
cient experience and maturity to respond to questions and provide more than su-
perficial insight into the situation or issues of concern. Individuals selected as
couriers are often junior officers or staff noncommissioned officers. If such per-
sonnel are available, dedicated couriers may be used to augment the liaison of-
ficer or liaison team.
(reverse blank)
C-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Appendix D
Marine Corps Planning Process

Tools
The commander and his staff use Marine Corps Planning Process tools to
record, track, and analyze critical planning information relative to the bat-
tlespace, the enemy, and friendly actions. These tools, when used properly, as-
sist the commander and the staff in building situational awareness, assist in the
preparation of plans and orders, facilitate the commander’s decisionmaking pro-
cess, and increase tempo. Marine Corps Planning Process tools must serve the
needs of the commander and the requirements of the situation. Use of Marine
Corps Planning Process tools consists of IPB products and planning support
tools.
Table D-1 identifies commonly used templates, worksheets, and matrices and
how each tool supports the Marine Corps Planning Process. The examples in
this appendix are at the MEF level, but these tools may be employed at any level
of command. The formats and uses of these tools may be modified as required.
Table D-1. Marine Corps Planning Process Tools.
OVERLAYS, TEMPLATES,
MATRICES, WORKSHEETS, MISSION COA COA COMPARI- ORDERS
AND GRAPHICS AND ANALY- DEVEL- WAR SON AND DEVELOP- TRANSI-
NARRATIVES SIS OPMENT GAME DECISION MENT TION
Modified Combined Obstacle x x x

Overlay (see fig. D-1, page
D-4)
Doctrinal Template (see fig. x x x

D-2, page D-5)
Situation Template (see fig. x x x

D-3, page D-6)
Event Template (see fig. D-4, x x x

page D-7)
Event Matrix (see table D-3, x x x

page D-8)
Decision Support Template x x x x x

(see fig. D-5, page D-9)
Decision Support Matrix (see x x x x x

table D-4, page D-10)
D-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Table Table
D-1. Marine
D-1. Marine
CorpsCorps
Planning
Planning
Process
Process
Tools—Continued.
Tools.
OVERLAYS, TEMPLATES,
MATRICES, WORKSHEETS, MISSION COA COA COMPARI- ORDERS
AND GRAPHICS AND ANALY- DEVEL- WAR SON AND DEVELOP- TRANSI-
NARRATIVES SIS OPMENT GAME DECISION MENT TION
Course of Action Graphic and x x x x

Narrative (see fig. D-6, page
D-11)
Synchronization Matrix (see x x x x x

COA War Game Worksheet x x x

(see table D-6, page D-14)
Comparison and Decision x

Matrix with Comments (see
Comparison and Decision x

Matrix with Sample Ranking
(see table D-8, page D-15)
1. IPB Products
Intelligence preparation of the battlespace is a systematic, continuous process of
analyzing the threat and the environment in a specific geographic area. The IPB
process helps the commander selectively apply and maximize his combat power
at critical points in time and space. It determines the threat’s likely COA, and it
describes the environment in which the command is operating and the effects of
the environment on the command’s operations. Battlespace and weather evalua-
tions assist in identifying obstacles, mobility corridors, and avenues of ap-
proach; predicting weather effects for numerous mobility options; and
estimating sea conditions. Intelligence preparation of the battlespace includes
templating with a threat doctrinal assessment to show potential threat objectives
and activities. This templating continues from planning to execution, both to as-
sess current operations and to support planning for future operations.
Marine Corps Planning Process ________________________________________________________________________________ D-3
Intelligence preparation of the battlespace products graphically record and dis-

play the results of the IPB process. Table D-2 identifies the major IPB products
and shows where they are integrated into the planning process. Note that both
the G-2/S-2 and the G-3/S-3 are responsible for specific products. While IPB
starts as an intelligence effort, it expands to an operational process and has lo-
gistic and communications applications that are not shown in the table. The fol-
lowing subparagraphs provide a short description of each product.
Table D-2. IPB Integration Throughout the Marine Corps

Planning Process.
NT
N/
SI S
ME
O
ME
LY
IO N R I S
T
OP
NA
GA
EN
CIS MPA
N
EL
PM
NA
IO
AR
EV
DE E RS
SIT
O
LO
IO
AW
AC
AD
AN
SS
VE
D
OR
CO
CO
CO
TR
DE
MI
Modified Combined G-2/S-2

Obstacle Overlay
Doctrinal Template G-2/S-2

Continuous1
Situation Template G-2/S-2

Continuous1
G-2/S-2
Pertinent Threat COAs Continuous1
Refined and Prioritized Threat G-2/S-2 Continuous1

COAs and Event Templates and
Matrices
G-3/S-3/OPT
Initial Decision Support Template Continuous1
G-3/S-3/OPT
Decision Support Template Matrix Continuous1
1
Templates are updated
throughout the operation.
D-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
a. Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay

The modified combined obstacle overlay is a graphic of the battlespace’s effects
on military operations. It is normally based on a product depicting all obstacles
to mobility, and it is modified as necessary. Modifications can include cross-
country mobility classifications, objectives, avenues of approach and mobility
corridors, likely obstacles, defensible battlespace, likely engagement areas, key
terrain, and built-up areas and civil infrastructure.
Figure D-1. Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay.

D-5 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
b. Doctrinal Template
Doctrinal templates are models based on postulated threat doctrine. They illus-
trate the disposition and activity of threat forces conducting a particular opera-
tion arrayed on ideal terrain. Doctrinal templates depict the enemy’s nominal
organization, frontages, depths, boundaries, and control measures for combat.
They are usually scaled for use with a map background, and they are one part of
a threat model. See figure D-2.
Figure D-2. Doctrinal Template.

c. Situation Template
A situation template is a doctrinal template that has been modified to depict
threat dispositions based on the effects of the battlespace and the pursuit of a
particular COA. This accounts for the threat’s current situation with respect to
the terrain, training and experience levels, logistic status, losses, and disposi-
tions. Normally, the situation template depicts threat units two levels down and
critical points in the COA. Situation templates are one part of a threat COA
model. Models may contain more than one situation template to depict locations
and formations at various times. See figure D-3.
Figure D-6. Course of Action Graphic and Narrative.
Figure D-3. Situation Template.

d. Event Template and Matrix

The event template is derived from the situation template and depicts the named
areas of interest. Named areas of interest are areas where activity (or lack of ac-
tivity) will indicate which COA the threat has adopted. Named areas of interest
are described in FM 34-130/FMFRP 3-23-2, Intelligence Preparation of the Bat-
tlefield. Time phase lines indicate movement of forces and the expected flow of
the operation, and they are also indicated on the event template. The event tem-
plate is a guide for collection planning. The event matrix depicts types of activity
expected in each named area of interest, when the named area of interest is ex-
pected to be active, and any additional information to aid in collection planning.
See figure D-4 and table D-3.
Figure D-4. Event Template.

Table D-3. Event Matrix.
NO
NAMED AREA OF NO EARLIER LATER
INTEREST THAN THAN EVENT/INDICATOR
1 H+6 H + 12 Brigade-sized forces moving

north.
2 H+6 H + 12 Brigade-sized forces moving

north.
3 H + 12 H + 24 Orangeland forces enter Blue-

land. Northern Operational
Group driving on Jesara oil-
fields.
4 H + 14 H + 24 Orangeland forces seize junc-

tion of Highways 7 and 8.
Northern Operational Group
turns northwest toward Jesara.
5 H + 18 H + 24 Orangeland forces enter Teal-

ton. Northern Operational
Group driving on Jesara.
e. Decision Support Template and Matrix

The decision support template is normally developed during COA wargaming.
It is derived from doctrinal, situational, and event templates. The decision sup-
port template depicts decision points, time phase lines associated with move-
ment of threat and friendly forces, the flow of the operation, and other
information required to execute a specific friendly COA. The decision support
template is a key planning tool for use during transition and execution. The deci-
sion support matrix provides a recap of expected events, decision points, and
planned friendly actions in a narrative form. It shows where and when a decision
must be taken if a specific action is to take place. It ties decision points to named
areas of interest, targeted areas of interest, CCIRs, collection assets, and poten-
tial friendly response options. The decision support template and matrix may be
refined as planning progresses after the war game. See figure D-5 and table D-4.
Figure D-5. Decision Support Template.

D-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Table D-4. Decision Support Matrix.
NO EARLIER NAMED TARGETS

EVENT THAN/NO AREA OF AREAS OF
NUMBER EVENT LATER THAN INTEREST INTEREST FRIENDLY ACTION
1 Orangeland forces H + 14/H + 24 1, 2 A, B Covering force with-

enter Blueland, draws; Marine
Northern Opera- aircraft wing (MAW)
tional Group division conducts interdiction
driving on Tealton. west of phase line
TEAL.
2 Orangeland forces H + 18/H + 24 3, 4 C 1st and 3d Marine

seize junction of Divisions (MARDIVs)
Highways 7 and 8. execute branch plan
Northern Opera- HAWK.
tional Group turns
northwest on Jesara.
2. Planning Support Tools

Planning support tools support the commander’s and staff’s planning effort by
recording and displaying critical planning information on the COAs and the
commander’s decisions and guidance. They aid the commander in decisionmak-
ing by displaying critical information in a useful format. Planning support tools
include the COA graphic and narrative, synchronization matrix, COA war game
worksheets, and the comparison and decision matrix.
a. Course of Action Graphic and Narrative

The COA graphic and narrative are a visual depiction and written description of
a COA. They clearly portray how the organization will accomplish the mission,
identifying the who (notional task organization), what (tasks), when, where,
how, and why (intent). It should include the tasks and purpose of the main ef-
fort, supporting efforts, and reserve. It also includes maneuver control measures,
such as boundaries. The COA narrative and graphic, when approved by the
commander, forms the basis for the concept of operations and operations over-
lay in the OPLAN or OPORD. See figure D-6.
Marine Corps Planning Process ______________________________________________________________________________ D-11
A MARDIV, as the main effort, conducts an envelopment to defeat enemy

forces north of Gray City. A MARDIV(-)(Rein); as a supporting effort, it at-
tacks in zone to fix and defeat enemy forces west of Tealton and conducts a
link up with Blueland forces in Tealton. The MAW, as a supporting effort, iso-
lates the MEF battlespace from enemy reinforcement from the south, while fo-
cusing efforts against the 102d and 103d Armored Brigades and the 401st and
402d Artillery Regiments. The supporting MARDIV(-)(Rein) designates one
infantry regiment as the MEF reserve and one battalion as the MEF tactical
combat force. This phase concludes with enemy forces defeated north of Gray
City.
Figure D-6. Course of Action Graphic and Narrative.

D-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
b. Synchronization Matrix
A synchronization matrix is a planning support tool designed to integrate the ef-
forts of the force across the warfighting functions and to record the results of the
COA war game. It depicts, over time, the diverse actions of the entire force that
are necessary to execute the COA. When completed, it provides the basis for an
execution matrix or Annex X, Execution Checklist, to the OPLAN or OPORD.
See table D-5.
Table D-5. Synchronization Matrix.
TIME/EVENT PRE D-DAY D-DAY – D + 2 D+3–D+4 D+5–D+6
Enemy Action
Decision Points 1 2
MEF conducts
reconnais-
sance in zone.
Intelligence
Named 1, 2 3, 4 5
area of
interest
Surviv- Establish com-

ability bat air patrol
over MEF area
Force Protection of operation.
NBC Priority of support to

aviation combat ele-
ment (ACE).
Table D-5.
TableSynchronization Matrix—Continued.
D-5. Synchronization Matrix.
Deep MAW attacks North- MAW attacks

ern Operational 102, 103,
Group armor and 401, and
artillery, command 402.
and control (C2),
and combat service
support (CSS)
facilities.
Security Covering forces

conduct security
operations
Close 1st and 3d MARDIVs 1st MARDIV 1st MARDIV and

complete rupture of attacks MAW defeat
enemy defenses. enemy forces enemy forces
south of south of phase
phase line line TEAL. The
TEAL. 3d 3d MARDIV
MARDIV conducts a link
conducts link up with Special
Maneuver up with Blue- Purpose
land forces. MAGTF-B
(SPMAGTF-B).
Reserve 3d MARDIV—
one regiment to
MEF reserve.
Rear 3d MARDIV—
one battalion to
tactical combat
force.
Mobility Priority of main

supply route
development in
main effort
zone.
Counter- Complete
mobility execution of
Barrier Plan
South.
Lethal Execute long-

duration family
of scatterable
mines (FAS-
CAM) in
targeted areas
of interest B.
Nonlethal Fire expend-

Fires able jammer
to disrupt
Northern
Operational
Group attack.
Tar- A B
geted
areas of
interest
Table
Table D-5. D-5. Synchronization
Synchronization Matrix.
Matrix—Continued.
Sustain- Logistic
ment Throughput
Logistics Plan.
Trans- Movement
port Control Plan.
MEF
assumes tac-
tical control
of Blueland
Forces in the
vicinity of
C2 Tealton.
Informa- Build enemy Attack Northern

tion electronic order Operational Group
warfare of battle nodal C2 nodes.
and C2 analysis.
warfare
c. Course of Action War Game Worksheet

The COA war game worksheet is used during the war game to record friendly
action, enemy reaction, and friendly counter-action involved in each COA. It is
also used to capture critical information that may be identified during the war
game, such as potential CCIRs, decision points, and named areas of interest. See
table D-6.
Table D-6. Course of Action War Game Worksheet.
COA 1, STAGE A; BOX: MOST LIKELY
ACTION REAC- COUNTER ASSETS APPROX. DECISION CCIR REMARKS

TION ACTION TIME POINT (DP)
MARDIV envel- 102d and MAW inter- Surge D+3 DP 3 Will 102d MARDIV
ops Orangeland 103d dicts MAW and has prior-
forces north of Armored moving attack 103d ity of
Gray City. Brigades enemy assets to Armored close air
counter- forces. interdict Bri- support.
attack. MARDIV enemy gades
engages armor. move
and west to
destroys counter-
enemy attack.
armor at
long range.
d. COA Comparison and Decision Matrix

The COA comparison and decision matrix is a planning support tool designed to
assist the commander and staff in recording the advantages and disadvantages of
each COA as it is compared against the commander’s evaluation criteria. It may
reflect various techniques for weighing the COA against the commander’s eval-
uation criteria, as shown below in tables D-7 and D-8. The commander may use
the COA comparison and decision matrix to aid his decisionmaking process
during the selection of a COA for execution.
Table D-7. Comparison and Decision Matrix with Comments.
COMMANDER’S
EVALUATION
CRITERIA COA 1 COA 2 COA 3
Force Protection Moderate casualties. High casualties. Light casualties.

Increased nuclear, bio-
logical, and chemical
threat.
Tempo, Surprise Achieving surprise High chance of achiev-

unlikely. ing surprise.
Shapes the ACE interdiction of enemy Deception likely to be

Battlespace lines of communication limits effective.
enemy’s ability to reinforce.
Asymmetrical ACE operates against second MEF mechanized

Operations echelon armor forces. forces against enemy
Ground combat element mechanized forces.
(GCE) mechanized forces
attack enemy dismounted
infantry.
Maneuver Frontal attack followed by Frontal attack. Turning movement.

penetration.
Decisive Actions ACE disrupts deployment of Isolate first echelon

second echelon forces through forces.
interdiction. Disrupt lines of commu-
nication, logistics
facilities, and assembly
areas.
Simplicity Simplest. Demanding command

and coordination
requirements.
Table D-8. Comparison and Decision Matrix with Sample Ranking.
COMMANDER’S EVALUATION
CRITERIA COA 1 COA 2 COA 3
Intelligence 3 2 1
Force Protection 2 1 3
Tempo, Surprise 1 2 3
Focus, Speed, Concentration 3 2 1
Shapes the Battlespace 3 2 1
Asymmetrical Operations and 1 2 3

Combined Arms
Maneuver 2 1 3
Decisive Actions 3 2 1
Simplicity 2 3 1
Friendly Casualties 2 3 1
TOTAL 22 20 18
(reverse blank)
Appendix E
Wargaming
Wargaming evaluates friendly COAs against enemy COAs to identify weak-

nesses of the friendly COAs and opportunities that can be exploited in future op-
erations. During wargaming, each friendly COA is individually wargamed
against selected enemy COAs—most likely, most advantageous, most danger-
ous—to determine how best to attack enemy critical vulnerabilities while pro-
tecting friendly critical vulnerabilities.
The red cell plays the enemy during wargarming. The red cell is a task-or-
ganized element under the staff cognizance of the G-2/S-2. It presents a “think-
ing” enemy that uses threat doctrine and operational experience to react to
friendly threats and dispositions in order to test friendly COAs during wargam-
ing. The red cell ensures that assessed threat capabilities and vulnerabilities are
realistically evaluated against each friendly COA. At the MEF or MSC level,
the red cell may include four to six personnel; while at the battalion or squadron
level, the red cell may be the S-2 or a representative designated by the com-
mander.
Generally, wargaming includes the commander’s wargaming guidance and

evaluation criteria, war game preparation, and the conduct of the war game. The
results of the war game are used during COA comparison and decision. The fol-
lowing general guidelines may assist in conducting the COA war game step in
the Marine Corps Planning Process.
1. Commander’s Wargaming Guidance and

Evaluation Criteria
The commander assesses the time available at the conclusion of the COA devel-
opment brief before providing guidance for the war game. The degree to which
a COA achieves the essential tasks allows the commander to determine which
COA is optimum with respect to suitability, feasibility, acceptability, distin-
guishability, and completeness based on the available time, space, and resourc-
es. His evaluation criteria addresses specific issues and/or questions that he
wants the staff to determine on each validated COA during the conduct of the
war game. At this point in the planning process, the commander has begun to
think about various options and capabilities available to the enemy commander.
He is also mindful of his own command’s vulnerabilities. He will evaluate the
major concerns, select the most important concerns, and incorporate them into
his wargaming guidance.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
E-2 MCWP 5-1
a. Wargaming Guidance
The commander’s wargaming guidance may include, but is not limited to, the
following items:
l Friendly COAs that will be wargamed against specific threat COAs (e.g.,
COA against the threat’s most likely, most dangerous, or most advanta-
geous COA).
l A determination, within each COA, of the number of essential tasks that
can be successfully executed concurrently in order to generate more simul-
taneous attacks throughout the area of operations.
l A requirement to execute the war game assuming the threat does not react
to a deception being conducted by the higher headquarters and targeted on
the threat operational level commander in the command’s zone.
l Critical events that must be wargamed in specific detail, such as critical
decision points identified during COA development.
l The level of war game detail.
l Validation that the command can achieve the commander’s intent (i.e.,
subordinate commands in prescribed positions, each at a prescribed level
of readiness, and the enemy force also in the posture specified).
l A requirement to determine whether specific timelines are attainable.
l Reinforcement of the importance and role of the main effort so that priori-
ty of support can be delineated.
l Specification of the weather conditions to be assumed by the wargamers
(e.g., rainy conditions, although the norm for the time of year is dry weath-
er).
l Timeline for the phase or stage of the operation.
b. Commander’s Evaluation Criteria

To be adopted as the plan, a COA has to survive two sets of evaluation criteria.
The first broad set, discussed in COA development in chapter 3, requires that a
COA must be suitable, feasible, acceptable, distinguishable, and complete. The
second set is intended to identify which COA—among those that did prove to be
suitable, feasible, acceptable, distinguishable, and complete—is the best COA.
The commander’s evaluation criteria may include, but are not limited to, the fol-
lowing items:
l Principles of war.
l Commander’s intent and guidance.
l Limitation on casualties.
l Exploitation of enemy weaknesses and/or friendly strengths.
Marine Corps Planning Process ________________________________________________________________________________ E-3
l Defeat of the threat centers of gravity.

l Degree of asymmetrical operations.
l Opportunity for maneuver.
l Concentration of combat power.
l Speed.
l Balance between mass and dispersion.
l Success despite terrain or weather restrictions.
l Risk.
l Phasing.
l Weighting the main effort.
l Logistical supportability.
l Political considerations.
l Force protection.
l Time available and timing of the operation.
c. Staff Evaluation Criteria

The staff should also develop their own evaluation criteria to support their staff
estimates. This provides the basis for their effort in preparing staff estimates to
be presented during the COA comparison and decision step. The staff criteria
may include, but are not limited to, the following items:
l Risk assessment.
l Casualty projections and/or limitations.
l Personnel replacement requirements.
l Projected enemy losses.
l Enemy prisoner of war handling procedures.
l Intelligence collection requirements and limitations.
l High-value target acquisition.
l High-payoff target identification.
l Supporting arms limitations.
l Support limitations or opportunities.
l Projected assets and resource requirements.
l Projected reach of capabilities against distance or time required.
l Projected allocation of assets, lift, and sorties against availability.
l Requirement for prepositioning equipment and supplies.
l Projected location of units and/or supplies for future operations.
l Projected location of combat operations centers or command posts (rear,
main, tactical).
l Command and control systems shortfalls and limitations.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
E-4 MCWP 5-1
2. War Game Preparations

Before beginning wargaming, the planners should post the following informa-
tion or have it readily accessible in workbooks:
l Approved mission statement.

l Commander’s intent and planning guidance.
l Assumptions.
l Constraints and restraints.
l Commander’s critical information requirements.
l Maps covering the entire area of operations and area of interest.
l Friendly force list.
l Enemy order of battle.
l Modified combined obstacle overlay with terrain and weather analysis.
l Current and projected enemy situation overlay.
l Current and projected friendly situation overlay.
l Enemy situation templates for each enemy COA.
l Enemy event template and matrix.
Planners should also have the following additional tools that were completed
during the COA development:
l Assessment of relative combat power.

l Courses of action as selected and amended by the commander. This in-
cludes COA graphic and narrative, event template, decision support tem-
plate and matrix.
Planners will also need to have the following items at the beginning of the COA
analysis:
l War game rules.

l Recording tools (synchronization and COA war game matrices).
a. Review the Friendly Force List

The planning group reviews the friendly force list to consider all available units
that can be committed to the battle, paying special attention to command rela-
tionships and task organization. They ensure that the force list reflects all units
that may be employed by the wargamers. Ideally, the wargamers employ units
two levels down from their level of command. For instance, MEF wargamers
will represent the wing and division commanders and will therefore include all
aircraft groups and infantry regiments on their force list—as well as all Marine
expeditionary units and separate battalions (e.g., light armored reconnaissance
battalion, tank battalion). Because commanders frequently task-organize forces,

wargamers should also list the number of subordinate units in each element;
e.g., one regiment is currently operating with two battalions, another with three.
Similarly, the wargamer employing the MAW would be expected to know the
number of squadrons in each group (by type) and the number of aircraft in each
squadron. Although task organizations may vary by COA, the friendly force list
remains constant for all analyzed COAs.
b. Analyze Assumptions
The planners review previous assumptions to determine whether they are still
valid. Most assumptions will impact the war game. It is important that the war-
gamers analyze each assumption as they proceed. This enables them to accurate-
ly brief the commander regarding the consequences of the assumptions.
c. List and Graphically Display Known Critical Events

and Decision Points
Critical events are events that influence mission accomplishment. They in-
clude—
l Events that accomplish essential tasks listed during mission analysis.

l All major events from current locations to mission accomplishment.
l Enemy initiated events that trigger significant friendly actions or deci-
sions.
l Complex activities initiated by the friendly force that, even without direct
pressure from the enemy, must be completed by a set time; e.g., a passage
of lines or opening a main supply route.
A decision point is an event or a location in the battlespace where a tactical deci-

sion is required during mission execution. Decision points do not dictate the
substance of the decision, only that a decision must be made because the event is
expected to affect friendly COAs. Geographical decision points are almost al-
ways related to a specific type of enemy unit appearing at a specific location in
the battlespace. Event-related decision points can relate to either the friendly
force or the enemy. Examples of decision points are as follows:
l The friendly commander specifies that the main attack will not begin until
the supporting attack has reached phase line red.
l The friendly force is in defensive positions waiting for additional follow-
on forces. The commander determines that if the enemy does not begin an
attack on the friendly vital area within 48 hours, he will conduct a limited
objective attack to harass the enemy and continue to keep the enemy’s
timetable in turmoil.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
E-6 MCWP 5-1
Decision points relate to critical events and are linked to named areas of interest
and tactical areas of interest. A decision point may have an associated CCIR.
When the commander receives the information he requires, it becomes the trig-
ger to make a decision. Critical events and decision points come from several
planning documents that at this point in the planning process have been com-
pleted by the G-2/S-2. The G-2/S-2 will already have completed situation tem-
plates for each enemy COA, as well as a consolidated situation template
superimposing all enemy COAs onto one graphic. From that graphic, the G-2/
S-2 will have developed an event template to identify named areas of interest.
The G-2/S-2 has also identified the enemy’s high-value targets and the times
that these targets may move through the named areas of interest. The planners,
in preparing the friendly COAs, will have assessed which of the high-value tar-
gets should be considered high-payoff targets.
d. Select the War Game Method

Four wargaming techniques—sequence of essential tasks, avenue in depth, belt,
and box—are available. Each technique is suited to a particular situation or type
of command.
(1) Sequence of Essential Tasks. The sequence of essential tasks high-

lights the initial shaping actions necessary to establish a sustainment capability
and to engage enemy units in the deep battle area. At the same time, it enables
the planners to adapt if the red cell commander executes a reaction that necessi-
tates the reordering of the essential tasks. This technique also allows wargamers
to concurrently analyze the essential tasks required to execute the concept of op-
erations.
(2) Avenue in Depth. Avenue in depth focuses on one avenue of approach at

a time, beginning with the main effort. This technique is good for offensive
COAs or for defensive situations when canalizing terrain inhibits mutual sup-
port.
(3) Belts. Belts divide the terrain into belts that span the width of the sector
(defense), zone (offense), or area of operation. This technique is most effective
when the terrain is divided into well-defined cross compartments during phased
operations (e.g., a river crossing or helicopterborne assault), or when the enemy
is deployed in clearly defined echelons. This technique is based on the sequen-
tial analysis of events in each belt; that is, events are expected to occur more or
less simultaneously. This type of analysis is preferred because it focuses on es-
sentially all forces affecting particular events in one timeframe. A belt will nor-
mally include more than one event. When time is short, the commander may use
a modified belt technique; i.e., belts are separated and selected on the basis of
the locations of critical events, which, again, are expected to occur in the same
timeframe. At a minimum, belts should include the area of—.
l Initial contact along the forward line of own troops, the line of departure
and/or the line of contact, or in the covering force area.
l Initial penetration or initial contact along the forward edge of the battle
area.
l Passage of the reserve or commitment of a counterattack.
l The objective (offense) or defeat of the enemy (defense), such as the limit
of advance for the counterattack.
(4) Box. The box technique is a detailed analysis of a critical area, such as a
colored landing beach, an infiltration route, or a raid objective. It is most useful
when time is limited. This technique applies to all types of units. When using it,
the staff isolates the area and focuses on the critical events within that area. The
assumption is that the friendly units not engaged in the action can handle the sit-
uations in their region of the battlespace and the essential tasks assigned to
them.
e. Select a Method to Record and Display Results

Recording the war game results gives the planners a record from which to—
l Confirm and refine event templates.

l Integrate all warfighting functions.
l Develop decision support templates.
l Analyze the COA by using the evaluation criteria outlined earlier.
l Build the task organization.
l Prepare the order.
One method for recording the results of the war game is the synchronization ma-
trix. It allows the staff to synchronize a COA across time and space in relation to
the enemy COA. As shown in table D-5, on pages D-12 through D-14, the first
entry is the time period or phase of the operation. The second entry is the enemy
action as determined by the red cell. The third entry records friendly decision
points identified for that time interval based on the enemy’s actions. Recorded
on the remainder of the matrix are the activities during the game turn that the
friendly force wargamers decide need to be performed to support the COA. The
result is that the planners have evaluated their COA for a specific period of time,
they have recorded the activities necessary to support the COA, and they have
prepared a comprehensive snapshot of what the entire command should be exe-
cuting during that period. As wargamers work across the remaining time periods
or phases, they obtain a clear understanding of what the command and its subor-
dinate commands must do to accomplish the mission.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
E-8 MCWP 5-1
The completed matrix facilitates the writing of two portions of the order if this
COA is selected as the basis for the plan. By working horizontally across the
matrix for each warfighting function, planners are able to describe in writing a
clear concept for each warfighting function. By working across the matrix for
each subordinate command, planners are able to prepare the tasks to subordinate
commands portion of the OPORD.
3. Conduct the War Game

a. General Rules of Wargaming
Time is a critical resource during wargaming, and rules are key to accomplish-
ing the objectives of the war game in the least amount of time possible. Rules
structure the discussions and keep the process objective and focused.The fol-
lowing rules may be used during wargaming:
l Use approved enemy COAs as developed by the G-2/S-2. The goal is to

evaluate the friendly COA, not for the red cell to win the war game.
l Remain objective and unbiased.
l Assess feasibility continually. If a COA becomes infeasible during the war
game, the commander rejects the COA.
l Analyze each COA independently.
l Avoid comparing one COA with another.
l Record advantages and disadvantages of each COA.
l Ensure that the established timeline is not violated.
l Avoid premature conclusions.
l Record counteractions.
l Record data.
l Use COA war game worksheets.
b. Game Turns
A game turn covers all friendly and threat actions that are planned to occur dur-
ing a specified time interval and are focused on a specific task or event. Each
game turn usually consists of three moves—two by the friendly force, one by
the threat force. The friendly force has two moves because the activity is intend-
ed to validate and refine the friendly forces’ COA, not the threat’s. If necessary,
additional moves may be required to achieve desired effects.
c. War Game Preparations

The facilitator has already determined the H-hour being replicated at the war
game’s starting point. The red cell commander and the friendly force command-
ers will have drawn their situation overlays at war game H-hour on the war
game map. The red cell commander apprises the facilitator of the starting point
locations of his key forces and their missions. The facilitator will use the event
template and matrix provided by the G-2 to address friendly intelligence collec-
tion activities (reconnaissance and surveillance).
d. Game Turn Objective

The objective for each game turn is to answer one or a combination of the fol-
lowing questions:
l Does the friendly forces’ planned action achieve all purposes intended?
l What additional actions (and resources) would be necessary to achieve the
purpose if the original actions fall short?
l Has the threat force executed any actions that were not anticipated and that
would require the friendly force to change their COA or prepare a branch
plan?
e. Sequence of Moves
Although direct contact between forces normally will not occur at the starting
point, the red cell has the first move by virtue of positioning its forces and ap-
prising the facilitator of its activities at H-hour. From this point, each game
turn proceeds as described in the following paragraphs.
(1) Friendly Force Action. Friendly force commanders describe the opera-
tions of all forces involved during this event. They describe the force, its mis-
sion, and the desired outcome. They annotate the force list to account for all
forces employed in the event.
(2) Threat Reaction. The red cell commander describes the operations that
all of his forces are currently executing. He includes the forces outside the im-
mediate area of operations but within the area of interest that he intends to em-
ploy during this event. This allows friendly wargamers to validate the portion of
their plan that addresses these additional threat forces. The red cell commander
and friendly commanders determine where they would have had contact.
The red cell commander describes the locations and activities of his assets iden-
tified as high-value targets. He highlights points during the operation where
these assets are important to the threat’s COA. If these points affect the friendly
COA, friendly wargamers identify the high-value targets as high-payoff targets,
thereby making their engagement an integral part of the friendly COA. With this
information, the operational planning team updates the situation and event tem-
plates to reflect tactical areas of interest that support the engagement of those
high-payoff targets.
The operational planning team discusses the probable outcome of the contact
on both friendly and threat forces. Recording tools are used to annotate the
E-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
discussion. If they can agree on the outcome, the game turn proceeds. If they do
not agree, the facilitator determines the outcome, and the war game proceeds. If
one of the participants disagrees with the facilitator’s ruling, and if the matter
will bear on the feasibility, suitability, or acceptability of the COA, the point is
referred to an arbiter (chief of staff, G-3, G-5) for final resolution.
Each unanticipated event in the red cell commander’s reactions may become a
potential decision point for the commander when executing the approved plan.
Each time the friendly wargamers identify a decision point, the recorder makes
appropriate entries in the recording tools, such as the decision support template,
COA war game worksheet, and the synchronization matrix. The recorder should
capture enough information to allow the staff to anticipate and plan for each de-
cision. At a minimum, the recorder includes these elements—
l Decision Points. Estimated time, H + number of hours, and location.

l Decision Criteria. What activity, event, or information prompts a deci-
sion? This translates into potential CCIRs—information that could trigger
a decision to execute a planned action.
l Friendly Action and/or Response. What friendly action must be decided?
Decisions usually result in engagement of high-payoff targets that may
have a decisive impact on one or more of the enemy’s critical vulnerabili-
ties.
l Targeted Areas of Interest. The planners ensure that the physical distance
between the decision point and the targeted areas of interest are computed
on the basis of the time-distance requirements involved.
l Named Areas of Interest that Support the Decision Point. The recorder
must tie each decision point to its associated named areas of interest.
At this point, one of two outcomes will be evident; either the friendly force’s
planned action was sufficient to achieve its purpose or it was not sufficient. If
the action was sufficient and the COA is on track, the players can proceed to the
next game turn. If the action was not sufficient to achieve the desired effect, the
friendly force considers its counteraction.
(3) Friendly Counteraction. The friendly force commander, in discussion

with the red cell commander and the facilitator, determines the additional ac-
tions and resources necessary to achieve the original purpose. When modifying
the COA, it is necessary to revalidate the location and composition of the main
and supporting efforts, reserves, and control measures that affect their employ-
ment. If resources needed for the counteraction are available and can be reallo-
cated from any intended use in a subsequent game turn, the friendly commander
can add the additional forces to the COA.
Appendix F
Commander and Staff Estimates
The following are samples of the formats used during the Marine Corps Plan-
ning Process to prepare commander and staff estimates. These formats may be
used to assist the commander and planners in recording, tracking, and analyzing
important information. Local variations and modifications may be made as nec-
essary to meet situational requirements. Commander and staff estimates will be
as formal as the situation requires. The following estimate formats are formal
and are consistent with the formats contained in Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of
Staff Manual (CJCSM) 3122.03, Joint Operation Planning and Execution Sys-
tem Volume II Planning Formats and Guidance.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-2 MCWP 5-1
This page intentionally left blank.
UNCLASSIFIED
Marine Corps Planning Process ________________________________________________________________________________ F-3
Sample Format of a Commander’s Estimate of the Situation

(Local variations and modifications may be made as necessary to meet requirements.)
CLASSIFICATION
Copy no.__ of __copies

OFFICIAL DESIGNATION OF COMMAND
PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
Message reference number
COMMANDER’S ESTIMATE (U)

(U) REFERENCES:
(a) Maps and charts.
(b) Other information or documents the commander thinks appropriate.
1. (U) Mission. A commander receives a mission from his superior commander or

derives his mission from previous instructions and his knowledge of the situation. It
may be necessary for the commander to make several estimates if the mission or con-
cept of operations changes.
a. (U) Basic Mission. The basic mission and its purpose, as assigned or derived.
b. (U) Previous Decisions. Decisions resulting from previous estimates, if any.
c. (U) Purpose of Estimate. The specific task within the basic mission that this
particular estimate is concerned.
2. (U) Situation and Course of Action. The commander lists the factors, assump-
tions, and previous guidance that will influence his selection of a course of action
(COA). He then describes the COAs that he has that could accomplish his mission.
a. (U) Considerations Affecting Possible Courses of Action. The commander

considers those factors that may affect the ability of his command to accomplish its
mission or the ability of the enemy to act. Factors are grouped into two broad cate-
gories: characteristics of the operation and relative combat power. In considering
each factor, known facts are stated, logical assumptions are made where facts are
not available, and pertinent deductions are drawn from the facts and assumptions.
The deductions indicate the influence each factor may have on the enemy’s capabil-
ities and on the commander’s ability to act. Subparagraphs (1) and (2) provide
checklists of factors that might be considered, in whole or in part, in any estimate.
The commander considers only those factors that have a bearing on the actual situ-
ation.
1
CLASSIFICATION
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-4 MCWP 5-1
Sample Format of a Commander’s Estimate of the

Situation—Continued
CLASSIFICATION
(1) (U) Characteristics of the Area of Operations
(a) (U) Weather. Temperature, winds, cloud cover, visibility, precipita-

tion, and icing conditions, together with their effects on roads, rivers, soil,
trafficability, observation, air operations, naval operations, and other essen-
tial activities.
(b) (U) Terrain. Factors of relief and drainage, vegetation, surface materi-
als, and cultural features. These factors are described in terms of critical ter-
rain features, obstacles, observation, fields of fire, concealment, cover,
avenues of approach, and routes of communication.
(c) (U) Hydrography. Extent of offshore mineable waters, islands, rocks,

shoals, reefs; location and extent of usable landing beaches and beach for-
mations; gradients; depths of water; currents; and tides.
(d) (U) Politics. Organization and functioning of the civil government in

the area of operations. Emphasize the relationships between political organi-
zations and the military, possible use of the civil population by the enemy
and own forces, and the effect of the presence of the civil population on mil-
itary operations.
(e) (U) Economics. Agriculture, commerce, industry, the trades, profes-

sions, public works, utilities, transportation, communications, finance, cur-
rency, and banking.
(f) (U) Sociology. Language, religion, social institutions, attitudes, popu-

lation distribution, labor conditions, and health and sanitation.
(g) (U) Other Pertinent Factors
(2) (U) Relative Combat Power
(a) (U) Composition. Structure of enemy and friendly ground, air, and
naval forces, with emphasis on balance or imbalance, unusual organizational
features, and identification of units.
(b) (U) Strength and Combat Efficiency. Enemy and friendly strengths
(including units and numbers of personnel and factors influencing combat
leadership). Enemy and friendly will to fight.
(c) (U) Dispositions. Disposition and combat readiness of enemy and

friendly ground, air, and naval units.
2
CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION
(d) (U) Arms and Armament. The types and quantities of arms and arma-
ment available to the enemy and to friendly forces. This applies only to ene-
my forces actually in the area of operations, and to friendly forces under the
control of the commander making the estimate.
(e) (U) Recent and Present Activities. Recent enemy and friendly activity
of importance (including supporting activity). Known or suspected enemy
knowledge of friendly situation or plans is also addressed here.
(f) (U) Time and Space. Distances over which movements may be neces-
sary, and the time required to make such movements. In amphibious opera-
tions, include a listing of the principal enemy and friendly bases with the
land, sea, and air distances between each base and the objective and the
times required for various types of transport to cover these distances. If the
area of operations is located in a large land mass or island group, an addi-
tional listing is prepared to show the distances and times from other points of
interest to the objectives.
(g) (U) Combat Service Support. Combat service support functions that
affect the tactical situation. These include friendly and enemy levels of sup-
ply, prisoner of war support, control of civilians, availability of replace-
ments, maintenance, and other combat service support matters.
(h) (U) Personnel Situation. Personnel factors that affect the tactical situ-
ation, such as prisoners of war, control of civilians, and replacements.
(i) (U) Reinforcements. Estimated reinforcement capabilities of enemy

and friendly forces. Factors that can affect the reinforcement capabilities are
considered, such as air and naval superiority, terrain, weather, suitability of
the road net, and availability of transportation.
(j) (U) Assistance from Adjacent Forces. Tactical and logistical assis-
tance that adjacent ground, air, and naval forces are capable of rendering to
enemy and friendly forces in the area of operations. The character, type, and
extent of such assistance are considered. In connection with an amphibious
operation, any pre-D-day operations of air, naval, or ground forces in the ob-
jective area are included.
(k) (U) Peculiarities and Weaknesses. Significant peculiarities and weak-

nesses of enemy and friendly forces that may affect the accomplishment of
the mission, such as peculiar tactical doctrine, unconventional methods, and
idiosyncrasies of individual commanders.
3
CLASSIFICATION
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-6 MCWP 5-1

CLASSIFICATION
b. (U) Enemy Capabilities. Enemy capabilities are those actions that the enemy is
physically capable of and which, if adopted, will favorably or unfavorably affect
the accomplishment of the commander’s mission. These capabilities are enumerat-
ed in this subparagraph for subsequent analysis in connection with the command-
er’s own COAs. When justified by facts and logical assumptions, the relative order
of probability of adoption of enemy capabilities is noted. Statements of attack, de-
fense, and reinforcement capabilities address how, when, where, and in what
strength. The statement of a withdrawal capability is usually a statement that the
enemy can withdraw, usually beyond our objective, at any time.
c. (U) Own Courses of Action. In preparing this subparagraph, the commander

visualizes all reasonable and practicable COAs that, if successful, will accomplish
his mission. He then eliminates from further consideration those COAs that are ob-
viously inferior to the others. Finally, he lists the COAs that he will analyze, based
on enemy capabilities and other factors, in paragraphs 3 and 4.
There may be only one reasonable and practicable COA open to the commander in
a simple situation, in a small command, or in a case where the commander’s free-
dom of action has been limited by a detailed mission assigned by his superior. Even
in these cases, the decision should not be stated until the COA has been analyzed
and the how determined.
3. (U) Analysis of Opposing Courses of Action. Each COA listed in subparagraph 2c
is analyzed to determine its probable outcome when opposed by each of the enemy’s
capabilities listed in subparagraph 2b. The commander does this by visualizing the
results that would occur if each COA were opposed separately by each enemy capabil-
ity. Enemy capabilities that have little or no effect on the COA are not included in this
analysis.
The commander considers the influence of the factors in subparagraph 2a to visualize

each COA’s possibilities and to develop and refine the how of the decision. At this
point in the estimate, the commander determines how he can best exploit the factors to
enhance the advantages and reduce the disadvantages of each COA under consider-
ation. This may result in the introduction of new COAs or major changes in the ones al-
ready under consideration. The steps that the commander determines to be essential to
the success of a COA becomes a part of his concept of operation, if that COA is select-
ed for execution.
From his visualization of the results of each COA, the commander can determine the
enemy’s ability to oppose that COA, and the degree of success that can be expected
from it. The commander then isolates the governing factors of the situation that have
the most important bearing on his choice of the most suitable COA. The governing
factors are carried forward to paragraph 4 for use in comparing several COAs available
to him.
4
CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION
4. (U) Comparison of Own Courses of Action. The commander summarizes the

advantages and disadvantages of each of his COAs and compares and weighs them
against each other. The COA that appears to offer the greatest prospect of success is
selected and stated as a conclusion. If several COAs offer equal prospects of success, he
chooses the one that most favors future action. During this comparison, certain favor-
able aspects of two or more COAs may result in formulation of a new COA or combi-
nation of COAs that the commander may adopt and state in his decision. In some cases,
it will be possible to eliminate all but one of the commander’s own COAs by means of
deductions made in subparagraph 2a. In such cases, the comparison required by para-
graph 4 is omitted.
5. (U) Decision. The COA selected for adoption is formally stated in this paragraph
as the decision. The decision is a clear, concise, and logical statement of the com-
mander’s intentions. Appropriately amplified, it becomes the commander’s concept of
operation. The decision and the concept of operation form the basis for the preparation
of plans and orders.
A commander’s decision always indicates what the command as a whole is to do. It al-
so indicates as much of the who, when, where, how, and why as may be appropriate and
practicable under the circumstances. Specifically—
l What is a statement of the course of action to be executed to accomplish the mis-
sion; e.g., to land and secure, to continue the march, to attack, or to defend.
l Who usually refers to the command as a whole, but may refer to a designated
subordinate command. If the former, the who may be omitted.
l When is a statement of when the course of action is to be initiated; e.g., on D-day
at H-hour, or without delay.
l Where is a statement of the position or area from which, to which, or over which
the COA is to be executed; e.g., over Beaches RED and GREEN, or from carriers
and offshore bases. In defense, it is a statement of the positions to be defended.
l How is a statement of the scheme of maneuver or major tactical formation to be
employed in executing the COA; e.g., with two divisions in the assault, or with
maximum-range air strikes and fighter sweeps. Details are usually reserved for
the concept of operation.
l Why is a statement of the purpose of the operation; e.g., to permit the establish-
ment of air and naval bases in the area, or to neutralize enemy air attacks. It is
usually limited to information necessary to ensure intelligent compliance by sub-
ordinates. Additional details may be included in the concept of operation.
5
CLASSIFICATION
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-8 MCWP 5-1

CLASSIFICATION
/s/
ANNEXES: (As required)
6
CLASSIFICATION
Sample Format of an Intelligence Estimate

CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
INTELLIGENCE ESTIMATE (NUMBER) (U)

(U) REFERENCES
(a) Maps and charts.
(b) Other appropriate documents.
1. (U) Mission. State the assigned mission and its purpose.
2. (U) Area of Operations. State conditions that exist and indicate the effect of these
conditions on enemy capabilities and the assigned mission.
a. (U) Characteristics of the Area of Operations
(1) (U) Military Geography. Topography, hydrography, climate and weather.
(2) (U) Transportation
(3) (U) Telecommunications
(4) (U) Politics
(5) (U) Economics
(6) (U) Sociology
(7) (U) Science and Technology
b. (U) Enemy Military Situation. Ground, naval, air, services.
(1) (U) Strengths. Committed forces, reinforcements.
(2) (U) Composition
(3) (U) Location and Disposition
(4) (U) Movements and Activities
(5) (U) Availability of Reinforcements
(6) (U) Logistics
(7) (U) Operational Capability to Launch Missiles
1
CLASSIFICATION
F-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Sample Format of an Intelligence Estimate—Continued
CLASSIFICATION
(8) (U) Serviceability and Operational Rates of Aircraft
(9) (U) Operational Capabilities of Combatant Vessels
(10) (U) Technical Characteristics of Equipment
(11) (U) Electronics Intelligence
(12) (U) Weapons of Mass Destruction. Nuclear, chemical, biological, and ra-
diological weapons.
(13) (U) Air Defense
(14) (U) Significant Strengths and Weaknesses
(15) (U) Recent and Present Significant Activities
c. (U) Enemy Unconventional and Psychological Operations Situation
(1) (U) Guerrilla
(2) (U) Psychological
(3) (U) Subversion
(4) (U) Sabotage
d. (U) Enemy Intelligence and Counterintelligence Activities
3. (U) Enemy Capabilities. List separately each enemy capability that can affect the
accomplishment of the assigned mission.
4. (U) Analysis of Enemy Capabilities. Analyze each capability in light of the

assigned mission, considering all applicable factors from paragraph 2. Attempt to deter-
mine and give reasons for the relative order of probability of adoption by the enemy.
State the effect the enemy adoption of each capability will have on the accomplishment
of the mission.
5. (U) Conclusions. Conclusions resulting from discussion in paragraph 4, and

including, when possible:
a. (U) Enemy courses of action beginning with the most probable and continuing
down the list in order of relative probability.
b. (U) Enemy vulnerabilities where applicable.
2
CLASSIFICATION
Marine Corps Planning Process ______________________________________________________________________________ F-11
Sample Format of an Intelligence Estimate—Continued
CLASSIFICATION
/s/
3
CLASSIFICATION
F-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
Marine Corps Planning Process _______________________________________________________________________________ F-13
Sample Format of a Logistic/Combat Service Support Estimate

CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
LOGISTIC/COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT ESTIMATE (U)

(U) REFERENCES: As appropriate to the preparation of the estimate.
1. (U) Mission
a. (U) Basic Mission. State the mission and its purpose as described in the basic
plan.
b. (U) Purpose of the Estimate
(1) (U) Determine if combat service support capabilities are sufficient to sup-
port proposed courses of action (COAs).
(2) (U) Determine which COA is most desirable from a logistic and/or com-
bat service support standpoint.
(3) (U) Determine what measures must be taken by the commander to over-
come logistic and/or combat service support problems and/or limiting factors in
supporting each COA.
2. (U) Situation and Considerations
a. (U) Enemy Forces
(1) (U) Present Disposition of Major Elements. Reference may be made to

the Intelligence Estimate.
(2) (U) Major Capabilities. Enemy tactical capabilities likely to affect friend-
ly logistic and/or combat service support matters.
(3) (U) Other Capabilities and/or Limitations. Enemy capabilities and/or lim-
itations likely to affect the logistics and/or combat service support or tactical sit-
uation.
1
CLASSIFICATION
F-14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Sample Format of a Logistic/Combat Service Support

Estimate—Continued
CLASSIFICATION
b. (U) Own Forces
(1) (U) Present Disposition of Major Combat and Combat Support Elements.
May be shown as a situation map or an overlay appended as an annex with
reference to the aviation combat element Logistic/Combat Service Support Esti-
mate by including the statement: “See also Aviation Combat Element Logistic/
Combat Service Support Estimate.”
(2) (U) Courses of Action. A statement of the COA under consideration.
c. (U) Characteristics of the Area. Those likely to affect the logistic and/or com-
bat service support situation, such as weather, terrain, hydrography, communication
routes, and local resources.
d. (U) Current Logistic and/or Combat Service Support Status. A brief descrip-
tion of the current logistic and/or combat service support status, which includes
planned or known changes before and during the period covered by the estimate.
The following subparagraphs address typical combat service support areas of con-
cern. If possible, state specific quantities.
(1) (U) Combat Service Support Organizations and Task Organizations. Each
organic combat service support organization or task organization is described
using the following format:
(a) (U) Locations. May be an overlay.
(b) (U) Missions and/or Tasks
(c) (U) Task Organizations and Command Relationships
(d) (U) General Capabilities and Status. Capabilities and status are de-
scribed in terms of task organization using the applicable categories listed in
paragraphs (2) through (13) below.
(e) (U) Tactical Responsibilities. If any.
(f) (U) Communications and Automated Data Processing Systems Sup-

port Arrangements
(2) (U) Personnel
(a) (U) Strengths. Identify strengths of each major subordinate unit.
(b) (U) Replacements. Identify replacements on hand, replacements to be

received, and the quality of the replacements.
2
CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION
(c) (U) Morale. Determine the level of fighting spirit, significant factors
affecting current morale, religious and welfare matters, and awards.
(d) (U) Personal Services Support. Identify the required exchange, postal,
recreational, and special services support.
(e) (U) Military Justice. Court marital and correction facilities.
(f) (U) Personnel Procedures. Significant items, if any.
(3) (U) Supply. Procurement, storage, distribution, and salvage.
(4) (U) Maintenance. Management, operations, and workload.
(5) (U) Transportation. Motor transport, helicopters, amphibious vehicles,

and cargo aircraft; motor transport convoy control; and main supply routes.
(6) (U) Engineer Support. Construction and maintenance of roads, bridges,

airfields, helicopter landing sites, bulk fuel sites and pipelines, camps, and utili-
ties (including bath, fumigation, laundry, electrical power, and water points).
(7) (U) Landing Support. Beach, landing zone, and air delivery support oper-
ations.
(8) (U) Medical/Dental. Preventive medicine, graves registration, and casual-

ty collection, evacuation (including evacuation policy), and hospitalization.
(9) (U) Military Police. Prisoners of war (number on hand and evacuation
procedures), straggler rates and control, and traffic control.
(10) (U) Civilian Employees. Number, restrictions on use, and organization.
(11) (U) Civil Affairs Support. Combat service support of the civil affairs ef-
fort.
(12) (U) Automated Data Processing Systems. Management, operation, and

support of command automated data processing systems support.
(13) (U) Miscellaneous. Food services, material handling equipment, and fi-
nancial management (disbursing, budgeting, and accounting).
e. (U) Assumptions. A statement of those assumptions made for the preparation

of this estimate. An example of the critical assumption is the estimation of the
length of time for the entire operation and for each COA (if different).
f. (U) Special Factors. Items not covered elsewhere, such as state of training of
combat service support personnel or task organizations.
3
CLASSIFICATION
F-16 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

CLASSIFICATION
3. (U)Analysis. Each COA under consideration is analyzed, in the light of all signifi-
cant factors, to determine problems that may arise, measures required to resolve those
problems, and any limiting factors that may exist. Omit areas not applicable. State all
considerations of the analysis that have equal effects on all proposed COAs.
a. (U) Course of Action #1
(1) (U) Logistic and/or CSS Organizations and Task Organizations. Each or-
ganic logistic and/or combat service support organization or task organization is
described using the following format.
(a) (U) Locations. May be an overlay.
(b) (U) Missions and/or Tasks
(c) (U) Task Organizations and Command Relationships
(d) (U) General Capabilities and Status. Capabilities and status are de-
scribed in terms of task organization using the applicable categories listed in
paragraphs (2) through (13) below.
(e) (U) Tactical Responsibilities. If any.
(f) (U) Communications and Automated Data Processing Systems Sup-

port Arrangements
(2) (U) Personnel
(a) (U) Strengths. Of each major subordinate unit.
(b) (U) Casualties. Expected for this course of action.
(c) (U) Replacements. Identify replacements on hand, replacements to be

received, and the quality of the replacements.
(d) (U) Morale. Significant factors affecting current morale, religious and
welfare matters, and awards.
(e) (U) Personal Services Support. Exchange, postal, and recreation and/
or special services support.
(f) (U) Personnel Procedures. Significant items, if any.
(3) (U) Supply. Procurement, storage, distribution, and salvage.
(4) (U) Maintenance. Management, operations, and workload.
4
CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION
(5) (U) Transportation. Motor transport, helicopters, amphibious vehicles,

and cargo aircraft; motor transport convoy control; and main supply routes.
(6) (U) Engineer Support. Construction and maintenance of roads, bridges,

airfields, helicopter landing sites, bulk fuel sites and pipelines, camps, and utili-
ties (including bath, fumigation, laundry, electrical power, and water points).
(7) (U) Landing Support. Beach, landing zone, and air delivery support oper-
ations.
(8) (U) Medical and/or Dental. Preventive medicine, graves registration, ca-
sualty collection, evacuation (including evacuation policy), and hospitalization.
(9) (U) Military Police. Prisoners of war (number on hand and evacuation
procedures), straggler rates and control, and traffic control.
(10) (U) Civilian Employees. Number, restrictions on use, and organization.
(11) (U) Civil Affairs Support. Combat service support of the civil affairs ef-
fort.
(12) (U) Automated Data Processing Systems. Management, operation, and

support of command automated data processing systems support.
(13) (U) Miscellaneous. Food services, material handling equipment, and fi-
nancial management (disbursing, budgeting, and accounting).
b. (U) Course of Action #2. Same subparagraphs as shown for COA #1.
c. (U) Course of Action #3. Same subparagraphs as shown for COA #1.
4. (U) Evaluation. From a logistic and/or combat service support standpoint and
based on the foregoing analyses, summarize and compare the advantages and disadvan-
tages of each COA under consideration.
5. (U) Conclusion
a. (U) Preferred Course of Action. A statement as to which course of action, if

any, can best be supported from a logistic and/or combat service support viewpoint.
b. (U) Major Disadvantages of Other Courses of Action. A statement whether

any or all remaining COAs can be supported from a logistic and/or combat service
support viewpoint citing the disadvantages that render the other COAs less desir-
able or unsupportable.
5
CLASSIFICATION
F-18 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

CLASSIFICATION
c. (U) Logistic and/or Combat Service Support Problems and Limitations. A

statement of significant problems to be resolved and any limitations to be consid-
ered in each COA.
d. (U) Decision or Action. A statement of measures required to resolve logistic

and/or combat service support problems cited above that must be brought to the at-
tention of the commander.
/s/
6
CLASSIFICATION
Sample Format of a Communications and

Information Systems Estimate
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
COMMUNICATIONS AND INFORMATION SYSTEMS ESTIMATE (U)

1. (U) Mission. This subparagraph states the basic mission of the command. Speci-
fied, implied, and essential tasks should be listed in the appropriate subparagraph.
a. (U) Intelligence Situation. Information known or obtained from the G-2/S-2.

Where appropriate, reference may be made to the Intelligence Estimate or other in-
telligence documents.
(1) (U) Characteristics of the Area. Those likely to affect communications

and information systems, such as weather, terrain, transportation networks,
communications routes.
(2) (U) Enemy Strengths and Disposition of Major Units
(a) (U) Tactical Units
(b) (U) Signals Intelligence and/or Electronic Warfare. Jamming, wire-

tapping, imitative deception, etc.
b. (U) Tactical Situation. Information obtained from the commander’s planning

guidance and from the G-3/S-3.
(1) (U) Present Disposition of Major Units. Show tactical units and commu-
nications and control elements. May be shown as a situation map or an overlay
appended as an annex.
(2) (U) Courses of Action. A statement of the courses of action (COAs) under
consideration.
(3) (U) Projected Operations. If known, the projected operations that will af-
fect the communications and information systems (CIS) situation. Consider
rates of advance, command post locations and displacement, uncovering of ma-
jor communications routes, etc.
1
CLASSIFICATION
F-20 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Sample Format of a Communications and Information

Systems Estimate—Continued
CLASSIFICATION
c. (U)Personnel Situation. Information known or obtained from the G-1/S-1 re-

garding personnel matters affecting the CIS system. Where appropriate, reference
may be made to the personnel estimate or other personnel documents. Consider
strengths, replacements, command post organization and operation, etc.
d. (U) Logistic Situation. Information known or obtained from the G-4/S-4 about
logistic matters affecting the command and control (C2) system. Where appropri-
ate, reference may be made to the Logistics Estimate or other logistic documents.
Consider availability of equipment, condition of equipment, availability of repair
parts and consumable items, etc.
e. (U) Assumptions. Any assumptions required as a basis for initiating planning

or for the preparation of the estimate.
f. (U) Command and Control System Situation
(1) (U) General. Information regarding current communication installations,

the status of the overall communications system, and the location and mission of
communication and control agencies. Reference may be made to the communi-
cations standing operating procedures and operations instruction or to Annex K
(Combat Information System) of the basic operation order of plan.
(2) (U) Special. Items not covered elsewhere that affect the C2 system situa-
tion. These may include availability and assignment of radio frequencies, as-
signment of call signs, availability of shipboard communications equipment for
troop use, arrangements for communications guard, anticipated traffic volumes,
cryptographic matters, etc.
3. (U) Analysis. Each COA under consideration is analyzed, in the light of all signif-
icant factors, to determine problems that may arise, measures required to resolve those
(1) (U) Support Requirements
(a) (U) Terrain and Distance Factors. A discussion of terrain and distance
factors that may affect the location of command posts, installations, and the
use of communications means.
2
CLASSIFICATION
Sample Format of a Communications and Information

Systems Estimate—Continued
CLASSIFICATION
(b) (U) Installations. A discussion of communications requirements for

each communications and control agency and other units. These require-
ments may be expressed as need lines or may be detailed to include types of
circuits and terminal service or other forms of communications required by
these activities.
(2) (U) Support Capability. A discussion of the capability to employ all avail-
able means of communications to satisfy the foregoing support requirements.
(a) (U) Radio and Wire. Discussed together with the capability to pro-
vide various types of circuits and attendant terminal service; e.g., telephone,
facsimile, data.
(b) (U) Messenger
(c) (U) Visual and Sound
4. (U) Evaluation. From a C2 system standpoint and based on the foregoing analy-
ses, summarize and compare the advantages and disadvantages of each COA under
consideration.
5. (U) Conclusion
a. (U) Preferred Course of Action. A statement as to which COA, if any, can best
be supported from a CIS viewpoint.

any or all remaining COAs can be supported from a CIS viewpoint citing the disad-
vantages that render the other COAs less desirable or unsupportable.
c. (U) C2 System Problems and Limitations. A statement of significant problems

to be resolved and any limitations to be considered in each COA.
d. (U) Decision or Action. A statement of measures required to resolve those CIS

problems cited above that must be brought to the attention of the commander.
3
CLASSIFICATION
F-22 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Sample Format of a Communications and Information Systems

CLASSIFICATION
/s/
4
UNCLASSIFIED
Sample Format of an Aviation Estimate

CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
AVIATION ESTIMATE (U)

1. (U) Mission
a. (U) Basic Mission. This subparagraph contains a brief restatement of the basic
mission of the command as a whole as previously announced by the commander.
b. (U) Previous Decisions. State any previous decisions by the commander, such
as when aviation is to be phased into advance bases and airfields.
a. (U) Enemy. Refer to the Intelligence Estimate.
b. (U) Friendly. State the friendly aviation forces available for the operation and
their disposition. State probable tactical developments influencing aviation.
c. (U) Courses of Action. The proposed courses of action (COAs) are stated in
full.
d. (U) Characteristics of the Area. Refer to the Intelligence Estimate.

(1) (U) Employment. State the employment of aviation units.
(2) (U) Enemy Situation and Capabilities. State the enemy capabilities with
respect to air support of the force.
1
CLASSIFICATION
F-24 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Sample Format of an Aviation Estimate—Continued
CLASSIFICATION
(3) (U) Requirement for Aviation Support. A general statement as to which

COA will require the most aviation support.
(4) (U) Topography. A general statement of potential sites and landing zones
for possible use in the operation.
(5) (U) Weather. A general statement of the impact of weather on aviation

support of the operation.
(6) (U) Observation and Surveillance. A general statement regarding obser-

vation and surveillance as they concern aviation support of the operation.
(7) (U) Communications. A general statement regarding communications re-

quirements for aviation support of the operation.
(8) (U) Logistic Support. A general statement regarding logistic support for
aviation support of the operation.
4. (U) Evaluation. From an aviation standpoint and based on the foregoing analyses,
summarize and compare the advantages and disadvantages of each COA under consid-
eration.
5. (U) Conclusion
be supported from an aviation viewpoint.

any or all remaining COAs can be supported from an aviation viewpoint citing the
disadvantages that render these other courses of action less desirable or unsupport-
able.
c. (U) Aviation Problems and Limitations. A statement of significant problems to

be resolved and any limitations to be considered in each COA.
d. (U) Decision or Action. A statement of measures required to resolve those avi-

ation problems cited above that must be brought to the attention of the commander.
2
CLASSIFICATION
Sample Format of an Aviation Estimate—Continued
CLASSIFICATION
/s/
3
CLASSIFICATION
F-26 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
Sample Format of an Artillery Estimate

CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
ARTILLERY ESTIMATE (U)

1. (U) Mission. This paragraph contains a brief restatement of the basic mission of
the command as a whole as previously announced by the commander.
a. (U) Artillery Concept of Employment. State the artillery concept to support

the mission.
b. (U) Previous Decisions. State any previous decisions by the commander, such
as the employment of specific types of munitions.
b. (U) Friendly. State the friendly artillery forces available for the operation or
refer to the planning document or other document setting forth available forces.
c. (U) Courses of Action. The proposed courses of action (COAs) are stated in
full.

or for preparing the estimate.
(1) (U) Artillery Coverage. State the ability of artillery to cover the zone of
action of the supported unit.
1
CLASSIFICATION
F-28 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Sample Format of an Artillery Estimate—Continued
CLASSIFICATION
(2) (U) Positioning and Displacing Requirements. State the positioning and
displacement requirements of the supporting artillery units.
(3) (U) Ability to Mass Fires. A general statement of the ability of artillery to
mass fires.
(4) (U) Weapons Ammunition. A general statement on the availability, type,

and amount of ammunition for use in the operation.
(5) (U) Terrain and Weather. A general statement of the effects of terrain and
weather on observations, ammunition effectiveness, etc.
(6) (U) Security. A general statement about security requirements for artillery
units.

quirements for artillery support of the operation.
(8) (U) Logistic Support. A general statement about logistic and support re-
quirements for the artillery units, and the ability of the artillery units to provide
combat service support.
4. (U) Evaluation. From an artillery standpoint and based on the foregoing analyses,
summarize and compare the advantages and disadvantages of each COA under consid-
eration.
5. (U) Conclusion
be supported from an artillery viewpoint.

any or all remaining COAs can be supported from an artillery viewpoint citing the
disadvantages that renders the other COAs less desirable or unsupportable.
c. (U) Artillery Problems and Limitations. A statement of significant problems to

be resolved and any limitations to be considered in each COA.
d. (U) Decision or Action. A statement of measures required to resolve those ar-

tillery problems cited above that must be brought to the attention of the command-
er.
2
CLASSIFICATION
Sample Format of an Artillery Estimate—Continued
CLASSIFICATION
/s/
3
CLASSIFICATION
F-30 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
Sample Format of a Naval Surface Fire Support Estimate

CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
NAVAL SURFACE FIRE SUPPORT ESTIMATE (U)

1. (U) Mission. This paragraph contains a brief restatement of the basic mission of
the command as a whole as previously announced by the commander.
a. (U) Naval Surface Fire Support Concept of Employment. State the naval sur-
face fire support concept to support the mission.
b. (U) Previous Decisions. State any previous decisions by the naval or MAGTF
commander, such as the employment of specific types of munitions.
b. (U) Friendly. State the friendly naval surface fire support means (number and
types of ships) available for the operation and their disposition. (At this stage of
planning, this may be only an estimate.) Include information on the state of training
of shore fire control parties and the ships that will be supporting the operation, if
known. State probable tactical developments influencing naval surface fire support.
c. (U) Courses of Action. The proposed courses of action are stated in full.

3. (U) Analysis. Each course of action (COA) under consideration is analyzed, in the
light of all significant factors, to determine problems that may arise, measures required
to resolve those problems, and any limiting factors which may exist. Omit areas not
applicable. State all considerations of the analysis that have equal effects on all pro-
posed COAs.
1
CLASSIFICATION
F-32 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Sample Format of a Naval Surface Fire Support

CLASSIFICATION
(1) (U) Hydrography. A general statement of the impact of hydrography on

naval surface fire support of the operation.
(2) (U) Terrain. A general statement of the impact of terrain on naval surface
fire support of the operation.
(3) (U) Weather. A general statement of the impact of weather on naval sur-
face fire support of the operation.
(4) (U) Means Required. A general statement about the number and types of
ships required to support the COA.
(5) (U) Electronic Warfare. A general statement regarding observation and
surveillance as they concern naval surface fire support of the operation.
quirements for naval surface fire support of the operation.
(7) (U) Logistic Support. A general statement regarding support requirements
(logistics, transportation, etc.)
4. (U) Evaluation. From a naval surface fire support standpoint and based on the
foregoing analyses, summarize and compare the advantages and disadvantages of each
course of action under consideration.
5. (U) Conclusion.
be supported from a naval surface fire support viewpoint.

any or all remaining COAs can be supported from a naval surface fire support
viewpoint citing the disadvantages that render these other COAs less desirable or
unsupportable.
c. (U) Naval Gunfire Problems and Limitations. A statement of significant prob-

lems to be resolved and any limitations to be considered in each COA.
d. (U) Decision or Action. A statement of measures required to resolve those na-

val surface fire support problems cited above that must be brought to the attention
of the commander.
2
CLASSIFICATION
Sample Format of a Naval Surface Fire Support

CLASSIFICATION
/s/
3
CLASSIFICATION (reverse blank)
1-34 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Appendix G
Basic Operation Plans, Operation Orders,

Annexes, and Appendices
This appendix provides instructions and formats that govern the development of
a basic operation plan and order, referred to as OPLAN and OPORD, respec-
tively. The formats are based on the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Man-
ual (CJCSM) 3122.03, Joint Operation Planning and Execution System Volume
II Planning Formats and Guidance, and should be used by all staffs, subordi-
nate commands, and support agencies.
This appendix applies to commanders of Marine Corps forces at all levels. It
contains three sections. Section I provides general administrative guidance for
writing a basic operation order or plan. An operation plan/order foldout is in-
cluded at the end of this appendix for easy reference. Section II provides sample
formats of a plan summary, operation plan or order, appendices, tabs, etc. Sam-
ple formats are descriptive in nature and identify the information that needs to
be placed in the appropriate paragraph. The formats provided in section II will
be followed except when, in the judgment of the commander, modifications are
required to meet command requirements. Only those annexes, appendices, and
tabs applicable to the level of command are required within the operation order.
Section III provides examples of a plan summary, operation plan or order, and
some appendices, tabs, etc. Examples are notional and provide a written repre-
sentation of an actual operation order, appendices, tabs, etc.
G-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Section I. General Administrative Guidance
The arrangement of information in a basic operation order or plan will conform

to the formats shown in this appendix. Paragraph and subparagraph headings in-
dicated in the format will always appear in each plan. In operation orders, if in-
formation or instructions are not required in a particular paragraph that
paragraph is noted as “not applicable” in order to show that consideration has
been given to that part of the order. Further subdivisions, if required, should
conform to the basic system of paragraph titles and numbering discussed below.
The sequencing for naming is as follows: annex, appendix, tab, exhibit.
The basic operation order or plan and each attachment will contain, on its last
page, a list of any included documents. The basic operation order or plan should
refer to each annex. Information provided in the basic operation order or plan is
not normally repeated in the attachments.
1. Paragraphing, Titling, and Numbering

Paragraph titles are upper and lower case and underlined (e.g., Situation). All
subparagraphs and subtitles are upper and lower case and underlined (e.g., Con-
cept of Operations), except forces, commands, or agencies. Forces, commands,
and agencies are capitalized and underlined only in titles (e.g., SPECIAL PUR-
POSE MAGTF).
When a paragraph is subdivided, it must have at least two subdivisions. When
paragraphs are subdivided, they will be numbered and lettered as follows:
1.
a.
(1)
(a)
1
a
(1)
(a)
Subsequent lines of text for each paragraph may be flush left or equally indented
at the option of the chief of staff or executive officer as long as consistency is
maintained.
Marine Corps Planning Process _______________________________________________________________________________ G-3
Flush Left
a. (U) Situation. Text text text text text text text text text text text text text text
text text text text.
Equally indented.
a. (U) Situation. Text text text text text text text text text text text text text text
text.
2. Classification Markings
Mark front and back covers with the overall classification of the plan. Mark the
first page of plan elements (e.g., plan summary, basic plan, and each annex, ap-
pendix, tab, and exhibit) with the overall classification of the element. Unclassi-
fied plan elements are marked as such. Mark each interior page of the classified
plan element with the highest classification and sensitive classified information
code word of the material contained on the page. If the page does not contain
classified material, mark it as unclassified. Center classification markings be-
tween the left and right margins at both the top and bottom of the page. The clas-
sification marking is written in all caps (e.g., UNCLASSIFIED).
All paragraphs will have a security classification level. Use parenthetical sym-
bols (TS), (S), (C), and (U) to indicate the security classification level of titles,
paragraphs, and subparagraphs.
3. Page Numbering
Page numbers are located at the bottom of the page and centered. For example,
page C-1-A-3 denotes page 3 of Tab A to Appendix 1 to Annex C. There is a
single space between the page number and the classification marking.
4. Formatting Instructions
Formatting instructions are contained on pages G-4 through G-9.
G-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Line 1. Classification.
Line 2. Changes from Oral Orders. Used when oral orders regarding this operation were previously is-
sued. Enclosed in parentheses. Example: “(No change from oral orders except paragraphs 3b and 3f.).”
Omitted in plans and in orders when no oral orders were issued.
Lines 3-7. Heading Data
Copy no. ____ of ____ copies
PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
The first line of the heading is the copy number assigned by the issuing headquarters. A copy number is
given to each copy. It is not shown on attached annexes. A log will be maintained of specific copies issued
to addressees. The second line is the official designation of the command. It is always capitalized. Use a
code name if required for security. The third line is the place of issue. It may be a code name, postal desig-
nator, or geographic location (including coordinates). The place of issue is always capitalized. The fourth
line is the date or date/time group the plan or order is signed, issued, and becomes effective unless specified
otherwise in coordinating instructions. The fifth line is the message reference number. It is assigned by the
originator and contains letters, numbers, or a combination of the two. The message reference number has
no connection with the message center numbering system. Annexes issued separately are assigned different
message reference numbers. It allows acknowledgement in the clear.
Line 8. Title. Orders are numbered consecutively for a calendar year. Two or more orders issued on the
same day are given consecutive numbers. A joint operation plan or order is so designated. The code name if
any, is shown.
Line 9. Title
Lines 10-13. References. Documents (maps, charts, photo maps, standing operating procedures, etc.) nec-
essary for understanding must be available to recipients. This entry is always included (use “References:
None” when applicable). Map entries include series number, country, sheet names or numbers, edition, and
scale.
Line 14. Time Zone. If the time zone is the same for the place of issue and execution, and will be the same
throughout execution, this entry may be omitted. If the time zone is different in the area of execution (fre-
quently occurs in amphibious or air-transported operations), state when the indicated time zone becomes
effective.
Line 15. Task Organization. Task organization may be shown in the following ways:
1. As an unnumbered entry before paragraph 1, Situation. Used when entire command of issuing headquar-
ters is organized into task organizations for a particular operation, and task organizations are too complicat-
ed to be shown using other methods.
2. If there is no change to previous task organization, show as “No change.”
3. Under the proper subparagraph of paragraph 3. This is the simplest, and therefore preferred, method in
continuing ground combat situation. Show as “No change except paragraph 3b . . . .”
4. As an annex when lengthy; e.g., division or higher. Used in amphibious operations (permits early dis-
semination and assists concurrent planning). Also used where planning precedes operation by a consider-
able period of time.
Shown in 1 and 4 above, the organization of the issuing headquarters, including service and administrative
groupings that will perform normal functions, is the first entry. Following that, each task groupment that is
to receive a tactical mission is shown in the sequence in which the missions are assigned in paragraph 3.
1 CLASSIFICATION
2 (No change from oral orders)
3 Copy no.__ of __ copies

4 I MEF
5 GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
6 17 Apr 2001
7 ABD-1
8 OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION SHARP SWORD) (U)

9 BASIC ORDER (U)
10 (U) REFERENCES:
11 (a) Maps and Charts: Series ONC, sheet G-2 (ORANGELAND, BLUELAND),
12 edition 12, 1:1,000,000
13 (b) USCINCPAC Planning Directive, 27 March 2001
14 (U) TIME ZONE: Zulu

15 (U) TASK ORGANIZATION. Annex A
UNCLASSIFIED
G-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Lines 17-18. General. For plans only, describe the general politico-military environment that would estab-
lish the probable preconditions for execution of the plan.
Line 19. Battlespace. Battlespace includes the higher commander’s area of operation and the command’s
areas of interest, influence, and operations described by physical area and forces of concern.
Line 20. Enemy Forces. Enemy forces include information vital to the entire command or information
likely to affect accomplishment of mission. It may refer to the intelligence annex, operation overlay (if en-
emy information is shown), intelligence summaries, etc. It contains disposition, intent, objectives, vulnera-
bilities, centers of gravity, and courses of action.
Line 21. Friendly Forces. Friendly forces include information on own forces having a bearing on the oper-
ation (higher, adjacent, and supporting). Artillery is listed as the first supporting unit and then others are
listed alphabetically. It may reference an annex or the operation overlay.
Lines 23-26. Paragraph 2. Paragraph 2 is a clear concise statement of the tasks and purpose of the opera-
tion. State the who, what, when, where, why, and as much of the how as necessary. There are no subpara-
graphs. The mission is always stated here even if shown on an operation overlay or map.
Line 27. Paragraph 3. Paragraph 3 addresses execution.
Line 28. Commander’s Intent. Commander’s intent is the commander’s personal expression of the pur-
pose of the operation. It must be clear and concise. The purpose of providing intent is to allow subordinates
to exercise judgement and initiative—to depart from the plan when the unforeseen occurs—in a way that is
consistent with the higher commander’s aims.
Line 29. Concept of Operations. The concept of operations is a summary statement of how the operation
will be accomplished. It amplifies paragraph 2. It may be shown graphically or published as an appendix to
annex C. Specific unit designations are not used.
Lines 30-36. Tasks. This subparagraph identifies tasks to subordinate elements. Each task assigned to a
unit will include the purpose of the task (e.g., in order to . . .). Each unit, organic or attached, or tactical
grouping that is executing a tactical task is assigned a separate, numbered subparagraph. All tactical tasks
must be listed in the body of the basic order. List tasks for major subordinate elements as follows:
l Offensive order: Ground combat units (infantry first followed by artillery and combat support units
numerically or alphabetically), aviation combat units or elements (aircraft units, combat support,
combat service support), combat service support units or elements.
l Defensive order: Units or elements closest to the enemy are listed first. Ground and aviation combat
units in the forward defense area are then listed in numerical order followed by other units alphabet-
ically.
Each tactical task assignment may show the assets (attached or in support) available to the unit or element
for the operation first, then tasks are enumerated. Priority must be stated if missions are multiple and prior-
ity of accomplishment is desired. If all instructions to a unit are shown on the operations overlay, list the
unit after proper subparagraph number and reference the operation overlay appendix.
Line 37. Reserve. The reserve is tasked separately from the remainder of the units. It is usually designated
the main effort when committed. If there is no reserve designated, then so state.
Line 38. Commander’s Critical Information Requirements. Commander’s critical information require-
ments (CCIRs) identify information the commander has deemed critical to maintaining his situational
awareness, planning future activities, and assisting in timely and informed decisionmaking.
Line 39. Coordinating Instructions. This paragraph is the final subparagraph in paragraph 3. It contains
instructions common to two or more units, coordinating details and control measures applicable to the
command as a whole, and time or conditions when plan is to be executed. It refers to annexes or references
for coordinating details when appropriate. Communications instructions are shown in paragraph 5 only.
Line 40. Paragraph 4. Paragraph 4 contains logistic and personnel information and instructions for the op-
eration. It usually refers to appropriate annexes.
Line 41. Page number.
16 1. (U) Situation
17 a. (U) General. With the failure of deterrence, Blueland forces crossed the Or-
18 angeland border and have been successful in their initial battles.
19 b. (U) Battlespace. See Appendix 18 to Annex C.

20 c. (U) Enemy Forces. See Annex B and current INTSUMs.
21 d. (U) Friendly Forces
22 e. (U) Attachments and Detachments
23 2. (U) Mission. On order, I MEF, as the main effort, conducts offensive operations
24 to defeat enemy forces in zone in order to restore the Blueland border. Be prepared to
25 continue offensive operations into Orangeland to destroy remaining Orangeland
26 offensive military capabilities.
27 3. (U) Execution
28 a. (U) Commander’s Intent

29 b. (U) Concept of Operations. This operation will be conducted in three phases.
30 c. (U) Tasks
31 (1) (U) 1st MARINE DIVISION (Rein)
32 (2) (U) 3d MARINE DIVISION (-) (Rein)
33 (3) (U) 3d MARINE AIRCRAFT WING
34 (4) (U) 1st FORCE SERVICE SUPPORT GROUP (-) (Rein)
35 (5) (U) SPECIAL PURPOSE MAGTF-B
36 (6) (U) REAR AREA COMMANDER
37 d. (U) MEF Reserve

38 e. (U) Commander’s Critical Information Requirements
39 f. (U) Coordinating Instructions
40 4. (U) Administration and Logistics
41 Page number
42 CLASSIFICATION
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Lines 2-6. Paragraph 5. Paragraph 5 contains instructions that establish and maintain command and signal
procedures.
Command Relationships. Used in a large operation, or when relationships are unusual. Otherwise omit-
ted.
Command Posts and Headquarters. May reference operations overlay for locations.
Succession to Command. Designates the succession to command for the operation.
Signal. Usually references annex K and other communication publications such as standing operating
procedures or communications-electronics operating instructions. Includes instructions or restrictions
about communications-electronic such as radio restrictions or pyrotechnic signals.
Use additional subparagraphs to show location and time of opening communications centers, recognition
and identification instructions, code words and names, and liaison.
Line 7. Acknowledgement Instructions. Acknowledgement instructions are included in every order and
in separately issued portions. It ensures that recipients receive and understand the order.
Lines 8-10. Signature and Authentication. The basic operation order or plan and each annex are signed
or authenticated by the commanding officer. Full signature blocks are used. Appropriate officers may be
given authority to sign portions of the order. The commander is the only person authorized to sign (au-
thorize) any portion of the order unless by direction authority has been granted to another individual.
Appendixes, tabs, exhibits, and maps do not require signature or authentication except when distributed
separately from the basic operation order or plan.
1. Original signed by commander:
Name
Rank and Service
Title
2. Original signed by chief of staff/executive officer:
BY COMMAND OF COLONEL NAME
Name
Rank and Service
Title
1 CLASSIFICATION
2 5. (U)Command and Signal
3 a. (U) Command Relationships. See Annex J (Command Relationships).

4 b. (U) Command Posts and Headquarters
5 c. (U) Succession to Command
6 d. (U) Signal. See Annex K (Combat Information System).
7 ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
8 GERALD C. THOMAS
9 Lieutenant General, USMC
10 Commanding
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Lines 11-31. Annexes. Annexes form a portion of the completed plan or order. They pertain to a particular
concept, subject, or coordination aspect that is too voluminous, of insufficient general interest, or in an ir-
regular form (overlays, graphs, or tables) for the body of the plan or order. They contribute to the brevity
and clarity of the basic operation plan or order. Sequence and lettering must not be changed. Annexes may
be omitted when not required. Annexes are amplified where necessary by appendices to annexes, tabs to
appendices, and exhibits to tabs.
The annex formats and designations shown in this appendix are mandatory unless otherwise indicated. The
annex title is upper and lower case. Within the body of the basic operation order or plan, the annex title is
also enclosed in parentheses. When any of these annexes are not required, the annex is noted as “not used”
or “not applicable” in the table of contents. Elements that will be developed later may be noted as “to be is-
sued.” The annex format is preferred for other attachments (appendixes, tabs, etc.), but it may be altered
when information or instructions must be included for which no provision is made in the standard format.
Additional annexes may be added when necessary to permit distribution separate from the basic operation
order or plan or when information must be included where no provision is made in standard annexes. When
included, letter additional annexes consecutively, beginning with the letter “R, V, W and Y.” Do not use
the letters “I” and “O” as an annex designation.
Usually annexes A through D, J, and K will be provided as part of the basic operation order or plan. Devel-
op additional annexes and their associated appendices in an abbreviated format for those areas significantly
affecting mission accomplishment.
Line 32-36. Authentication. Authenticated by G/S-3 when commander’s or executive officer’s signature
is on the original only; G/S-3 authentication appears on all other copies.
Line 37. Page number.
Marine Corps Planning Process ______________________________________________________________________________ G-11
11 ANNEXES:
12 A – Task Organization
13 B – Intelligence
14 C – Operations
15 D – Logistics
16 E – Personnel
17 F – Public Affairs
18 G – Civil Affairs
19 H – Meteorological and Oceanographic Operations
20 J – Command Relationships
21 K – Combat Information Systems
22 L – Environmental Considerations
23 M – Geospatial Information and Services
24 N – Space Operations
25 P – Host Nation Support
26 Q – Medical Services
27 S – Special Technical Operations
28 U – Information Management
29 W – Aviation Operations
30 X – Execution Checklist
31 Z – Distribution
32 OFFICIAL:
33 s/
34 M.B. TWINING
35 Colonel, USMC
36 AC/S G-3
37 Page number
38 CLASSIFICATION
G-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Section II. Sample Formats
Section II provides examples of a plan summary, basic operation plan or order,

and some appendices and tabs. Sample formats are descriptive in nature and
identify the information that needs to be placed in the appropriate paragraph.
The following table of contents lists standing formats. Bold text indicates that
the format is provided in this section and its page location. Bold, italic text indi-
cates that a particular format is not used in Marine Corps plans or orders, but it
is included in the list to conform to CJCSM 3122.03.
Page
Plan Summary G-19
Basic Order or Plan G-23
Annex A. Task Organization G-29
Appendix 1. Time-Phased Force and Deployment List
Appendix 2. Shortfall Identification
Appendix 3. Force Module Identification
Appendix 4. Deterrent Options
Appendix 5. Reserve Component Requirements Summary
Annex B. Intelligence G-33
Appendix 1. Priority Intelligence Requirements
Appendix 2. Signals Intelligence
Tab A. Communications Intelligence Collection
Requirements
Tab B. Operational Electronic Intelligence Collection
Requirements
Appendix 3. Counterintelligence
Tab A. Counterintelligence Target List
Tab B. Multidiscipline Counterintelligence Threat Report
Tab C. Designation of Theater CI Executive Agency
Appendix 4. Targeting Intelligence
Tab A. Target List (Conventional)
Appendix 5. Human-Resource Intelligence
Tab A. HUMINT Operations Cell Operations
Tab B. EPW/Civilian Detainees
Appendix 6. Intelligence Support to Command and Control
Warfare
Appendix 7. Imagery Intelligence
Appendix 8. Measurement and Signature Intelligence
Appendix 9. Captured Enemy Equipment
Tab A. Specific Prioritized Intelligence Collection
Requirements
Tab B. Equipment Releasable for Operational Purposes
Appendix 10. National Intelligence Support Team
Appendix 11. Intelligence Estimate
Appendix 12. Intelligence Products
G-14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Page
Appendix 13. Intelligence Collection Plan
Appendix 14. Reconnaissance and Surveillance Plan
Appendix 15. Geographic Intelligence
Appendix 16. Intelligence Operations
Appendix 17. Support to Survival, Evasion, Resistance, and
Escape
Annex C. Operations G-39
Appendix 1. Nuclear Operations
Appendix 2. Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Defense
Operations
Appendix 3. Information Operations/Command and G-43
Control Warfare
Tab A. Military Deception G-47
Exhibit 2. Intelligence G-53
Attachment A. Priority Intelligence G-57
Requirements
Tab B. Electronic Warfare
Tab C. Operations Security
Tab D. Psychological Operations
Tab E. Physical Destruction
Appendix 4. Special Operations
Appendix 5. Evasion and Recovery Operations
Appendix 6. Rules of Engagement
Appendix 7. Reconnaissance
Appendix 8. Air Base Operability
Appendix 9. Combat Camera
Tab A. COMCAM Customer Support
Requirements
Appendix 10. Noncombatant Evacuation Operations
Appendix 11. Escape and Evasion Operations
Appendix 12. Counterattack
Appendix 13. Explosive Ordnance Disposal
Appendix 14. Amphibious Operations
Tab A. Advance Force Operations
Tab B. Embarkation Plan
Tab C. Landing Plan
Tab D. Rehearsal Plan
Tab E. CSS Control Agencies Plan
Appendix 15. Force Protection
Tab A. Combating Terrorism
Tab B. Physical Security
Tab C. Base Defense
Appendix 16. Rear Area Operations
Page
Appendix 17. Aviation Operations (omitted when Annex W
is used)
Appendix 18. Operations Overlay G-59
Appendix 19. Fire Support
Tab A. Air Fire Plan
Tab B. Artillery Fire Plan
Tab C. Naval Surface Fire Support Plan
Tab D. Chemical Fire Plan
Tab E. Targeting
Tab F. Fire Support Coordination Plan
Appendix 20. Countermechanized Plan
Appendix 21. Breaching Plan
Appendix 22. Obstacle Plan
Annex D. Logistics/Combat Service Support G-61
Appendix 1. Petroleum, Oils, and Lubricants Supply
Appendix 2. Mortuary Affairs
Appendix 3. Sustainability Analysis
Appendix 4. Mobility and Transportation
Tab A. En Route Support Requirements
Tab B. Reception and Onward Movement
Appendix 5. Civil Engineering Support Plan
Appendix 6. Nonnuclear Ammunition
Tab A. Munitions Matrix
Appendix 7. Supply
Appendix 8. Services
Appendix 9. Health Services
Appendix 10. Aviation Logistic Support (normally in the aviation
combat element plan or order)
Appendix 11. External Support
Appendix 12. Maintenance
Appendix 13. General Engineering
Annex E. Personnel
Appendix 1. Enemy Prisoners of War, Civilian Internees, and
Other Detained Persons
Appendix 2. Processing of Formerly Captured, Missing, or
Detained U.S. Personnel
Appendix 3. Finance and Disbursing
Appendix 4. Legal
Appendix 5. Military Postal Service
Tab A. Aerial Mail Terminals
Tab B. Military Post Offices
Appendix 6. Chaplain Activities
Tab A. Inter-Service Chaplain Support
Tab B. Host Nation Religious Support
Tab C. Commander-Staff Chaplain Relationships
Annex F. Public Affairs
Page
Appendix 1. Personnel Requirements for Joint Information
Bureaus and Sub-Joint Information Bureaus
Appendix 2. Equipment and Support Requirements for
Joint InformationBureaus and Sub-Joint
Information Bureaus
Appendix 3. General Ground Rules for the Media
Appendix 4. DOD National Media Pool
Annex G. Civil Affairs
Annex H. Meteorological and Oceanographic Operations
Annex J. Command Relationships G-69
Appendix 1. Command Relationships Diagram G-73
Annex K. Combat Information Systems
Appendix 1. Information Systems Security
Appendix 2. Defensive Information Warfare
Appendix 3. Communications Planning
Appendix 4. Satellite Communications Planning
Tab A. UHF SATCOM Network List
Tab B. SHF SATCOM Network List
Tab C. EHF SATCOM Network List
Annex L. Environmental Considerations
Annex M. Geospatial Information and Services
Appendix 1. Geospatial Information and Services List
Annex N. Space Operations
Annex P. Host Nation Support
Appendix 1. List of Host Nation Support Agreements
Annex Q. Medical Services
Appendix 1. Joint Medical Regulating System
Appendix 2. Joint Blood Program
Appendix 3. Hospitalization
Appendix 4. Patient Evacuation
Appendix 5. Returns to Duty
Appendix 6. Medical Logistics (Class 8A) System
Appendix 7. Preventive Medicine
Appendix 8. Medical Communications and Information Systems
Appendix 9. Host-Nation Medical Support
Appendix 10. Medical Sustainability Assessment
Appendix 11. Medical Intelligence Support to Military Operations
Appendix 12. Veterinary Medicine
Appendix 13. Medical Planning Responsibilities and Task
Identifications
Annex S. Special Technical Operations
Annex U. Information Management
Annex W. Aviation Operations
Appendix 1. Air Defense/Antiair Warfare
Appendix 2. Offensive Air Support
Appendix 3. Assault Support
Appendix 5. Supplementary Air Operations
Appendix 6. Aircraft Armament
Page
Appendix 7. Air Control
Appendix 8. Air Communications
Appendix 9. Air Movement Plan/Flight Ferry
Appendix 10. Aircraft Schedules
Appendix 11. Air Tasking
Annex X. Execution Checklist G-75
Annex Z. Distribution
G-18 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format of a Plan Summary

A plan summary allows commanders, staffs, and other individuals and agencies
to quickly review the envisioned activities of a command. They are particularly
useful in creating situational awareness in newly assigned personnel and in
higher, supporting, and adjacent commands. A plan summary is normally only
prepared at higher levels of command, such as the component (Marine Corps
Forces) and Marine expeditionary force, in support of a unified command plan.
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
OPLAN (Number) (Operation CODEWORD) (U)

PLAN SUMMARY (U)
1. (U) Purpose
a. (U) Describe the purpose to be achieved by executing the plan and the desired
endstate. If this is a supporting plan, indicate what plan it supports.
b. (U) Include a statement similar to the following: “This summary provides mil-
itary decisionmakers with the major aspects of this plan. It is based on planning
factors and estimates available at the time of preparation and is subject to modifica-
tion in the context of a specific contingency. The information contained herein
must be updated before use in adopting courses of action in a particular situation.”
2. (U) Conditions for Implementation/Execution
a. (U) Politico-Military Situation. Summarize the politico-military situation in

which execution of the plan should be considered.
b. (U) Legal Considerations. Summarize any legal considerations that may affect
plan implementation (status of forces, rules of engagement, international agree-
ments, Law of Armed Conflict, etc.).
3. (U) Operations to be Conducted
a. (U) Forces Assigned. Summarize the major forces (assigned, attached, or sup-
porting) and augmentation required from other sources.
b. (U) Deployment. Summarize the movements of forces necessary to place com-

bat forces in the operational area. When applicable, include operational security
measures to be carried out before full execution of the plan.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-20 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
c. (U) Employment. State the general nature of combat operations to be conduct-

ed, including amphibious operations, information operations, command and control
warfare, etc., when applicable. These operations may be discussed in the phases of
the operations. A mission statement, commander’s intent, and concept of opera-
tions may be written for each phase. This discussion may contain a concise state-
ment of the operation’s endstate and endstate for each phase. It may include how
unit dispositions at the end of each phase facilitate transition to the next phase. A
discussion of the commander’s estimate of the enemy’s intent may also be includ-
ed.
d. (U) Supporting Plans. List any requirements for supporting plans to be pre-
pared by subordinate and supporting commands or agencies.
e. (U) Collateral Plans. List operation plans (OPLANs) that could be implement-
ed before, during, or after the subject plan.
4. (U) Key Assumptions. List assumptions deemed essential to the success of the
plan, including the degree of mobilization and mobility (sea and airlift) assumed.
5. (U) Operational Constraints. List major factors that may impede accomplishment
of the mission.
6. (U) Time to Commence Effective Operations. If appropriate, include a table

showing the required time-phased buildup of combat forces in the objective area. Indi-
cate which forces must be available in the operational area before effective operations
can begin. Show the elapsed time, following an order to implement the plan, when each
significant level of combat force required by the plan could begin effective operations
in the objective area. Note that the lowest level of force reported will be the smallest
force increment that could initiate effective operations. List successively higher force
levels up to the maximum level called for in the basic plan. List any assumptions
applied in preparing the table that are not specified in the plan. In determining the time
to commence effective operations, consider forces to be deployed or employed to be at
normal conditions of readiness; that is, no preparations except those required for force
protection. Also consider the following additional factors, as appropriate.
a. (U) Time required to carry out command and control warfare as specified in
the relevant plans.
b. (U) Time for preparation and transmission of necessary orders.
c. (U) Reaction time, including all necessary preparations for movement and, if
necessary, staging.
d. (U) Availability and capability of strategic transportation resources and facili-

ties.
e. (U) Time en route to the operation area, using available lift and considering
possible restrictions on the use of deployment routes.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
f. (U) Possible enemy action against forces in transit.
g. (U) Reception and throughput capabilities of overseas terminals, where appro-

priate.
h. (U) Time for marry up of forces and equipment deployed by separate move-
ment modes, including marry up with prepositioned equipment, when appropriate.
i. (U) Availability and capability of transport systems within the area of opera-
tions, where required.
j. (U) Time required in the operation area for final preparation of forces, includ-
ing movement to the objective area before employment.
7. (U) Command Relationships. Summarize the command arrangements to be

employed on execution.
8. (U) Logistic Appraisal. Provide an estimate of logistic feasibility for the plan.
9. (U) Personnel Appraisal. Provide an estimate of personnel feasibility for this plan.
10. (U) Consolidated Listing and Impact Assessment of Shortfalls and Limiting Fac-
tors. Provide a consolidated listing and impact assessment of force, movement, and sup-
port shortfalls and limiting factors that impact significantly on the conduct of
operations. Identify shortfalls in joint and Service doctrine, interoperability, and train-
ing. Specify the tasks that cannot be accomplished in view of the shortfalls. Include
specific documentation of each significant shortfall and limiting factor and the efforts
to resolve it in the appropriate annex to the plan. Address additional forces, including
combat support and combat service support, recommended by the supported com-
mander to reduce risk but not allocated in the Plan Summary. Do not include such
forces in Appendix 2 to Annex A (Task Organization) of the plan.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-22 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format of a Basic Order or Plan
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number) (Operation CODEWORD) (U)

TITLE (U)
REFERENCES: List any maps, charts, standing operating procedures or other doc-
ments essential to understanding the order or plan.
(U) TIME ZONE: Enter if area of operations is different than place of issue.
(U) TASK ORGANIZATION: Annex A.
1. (U) Situation
a. (U) General. (May be omitted.) Describe the general politico-military environ-

ment that would establish the probable preconditions for execution of the plan. If
applicable, state U.S. policy goals and the estimated goals of other parties and out-
line political decisions needed from other countries to achieve U.S. policy goals
and conduct effective U.S. military operations to attain U.S. military missions. Spe-
cific details are found in Annex B (Intelligence).
b. (U) Battlespace
(1) (U) Joint Operations Area/Higher Commander’s Area of Operations. De-

scribe the higher commander’s area of operations. A map may also be included
as an attachment.
(2) (U) Area of Interest. Describe the commander’s area of interest covered by
the basic operation order or plan. This description should address all air, ground,
and sea areas that directly affect the operation. A map may also be included as
an attachment.
(3) (U) Area of Operations. Describe the specific area covered by the opera-
tion. A map may also be included as an attachment.
c. (U) Enemy Forces. Identify the opposing forces expected on execution (loca-
tion, disposition) and appraise their general capabilities (defend, reinforce, attack,
withdraw, delay). Limit this information to what is vital for the entire command or
what is likely to affect mission accomplishment. See Annex B (Intelligence) for de-
tails. Address known or potential terrorist threats. When applicable, identify the en-
emy’s operational and tactical center(s) of gravity.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-24 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
d. (U) Friendly Forces
(1) (U) This paragraph provides information on nonorganic forces having a

bearing on the operation. The information is presented in the following order:
(a) (U) Higher. State the mission statement and commander’s intent of
the higher commander.
(b) (U) Adjacent. State the mission statement or relevant tasks of adja-
cent commanders.
(c) (U) Supporting. State the command relationship with the supporting
commanders (operational control, tactical control, tactical missions, general
support, direct support, etc.), or relevant tasks of supporting commanders.
(2) (U) Identify applicable friendly centers of gravity that require support and
protection for successful mission accomplishment.
(3) (U) If applicable, list the tasks of government and nongovernmental depart-
ments, agencies, and organizations associated with the operation (e.g., Depart-
ment of State, Doctors Without Borders, Red Cross).
e. (U) Attachments and Detachments. List nonorganic units attached to or units

detached from the issuing headquarters. If no units are attached or detached, state
“None.”
f. (U) Assumptions. (Omitted in orders.) List all assumptions on which the plan
is based.
g. (U) Legal Considerations. List those significant legal considerations on which

the plan is based (e.g., status of forces agreements, Law of Land Warfare).
2. (U) Mission. A concise statement of the tasks and purpose of the operation. State
the who, what, when, where, why, and as much of the how as necessary to ensure
command, control, and coordination. The who, what, when, and where are derived from
the essential tasks. The why is derived from the purpose of the operation.
3. (U) Execution
a. (U) Commander’s Intent. Commander’s intent is the commander’s personal

expression of the purpose of the operation. It must be clear, concise, and easily un-
derstood. It may also include how the commander envisions achieving a decision as
well as the endstate or conditions, that when satisfied, accomplish the purpose.
b. (U) Concept of Operations. A description of how the operation will be con-

ducted to accomplish the mission. It includes a narrative of the actions to be taken
and a generic organization for combat (main and supporting effort, reserve, etc.).
The concept of operations is the course of action approved by the commander dur-
ing planning. It may be summarized here if a detailed concept of operations is
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
contained in Annex C (Operations). The concept of operations provides a basis for

supporting concepts such as—
(1) (U) Concept of Maneuver. See Annex C (Operations) and Annex W (Avia-
tion Operations) (if applicable) for detailed description.
(2) (U) Concept of Fires. See Annex C (Operations) and Annex W (Aviation
Operations) (if applicable) for detailed description.
(3) (U) Concept of Support. See Annex D (Logistics/Combat Service Support)

for detailed description.
(4) (U) Other Concepts as Required. See appropriate annex for detailed de-
scription.
c. (U) Tasks
(1) (U) List the tasks assigned to each subordinate commander in separate,
numbered subparagraphs. Tasks are listed in order of priority or accomplish-
ment. Tasks may be listed by phase. Designation of main effort or supporting
effort is noted in tasking.
(2) (U) Some actions are so critical that the commander may assign them as
missions. These should be assigned as task and purpose (in order to . . .). Other
actions are assigned simply as tasks because the purpose is understood. The
commander assigns subordinate commanders tasks he deems necessary to fulfill
his concept of operations.
(3) (U) Unit or element task assignments are listed in the following order:
(a) (U) Offensive operations: ground combat units or elements (infantry

first followed by artillery and combat support units numerically or alphabet-
ically), aviation combat units or elements (aircraft units, combat support,
combat service support), combat service support units or elements.
(b) (U) Defensive operations: units or elements closest to the enemy are
listed first, ground and aviation combat units in the forward defense area are
then listed in numerical order, other units are then listed alphabetically.
(4) (U) Each task assignment may begin with the assets (attached or in sup-
port) available to the unit or element.
d. (U) Reserve. List the tasks assigned to the reserve force. List all units or ele-
ments to be in reserve when the order is in effect. If the unit or element will be the
reserve in the future, its current assigned tasks will be listed in paragraph 3c. If a
unit or element in reserve is given a future mission or ordered to prepare plans for
possible reserve missions, it is included in this subparagraph.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-26 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
e. (U) Commander’s Critical Information Requirements. Commander’ critical in-

formation requirements identify information on friendly and enemy activities and
the battlespace that the commander deems as critical to maintaining situational
awareness, planning future activities, and assisting in timely and informed deci-
sionmaking. They help the commander tailor the command and control organiza-
tion and are central to effective information management, which directs the
processing, flow, and use of information throughout the force.
f. (U) Coordinating Instructions. List the instructions applicable to the entire

command or two or more elements of the command that are necessary for proper
coordination of the operation but are not appropriate for inclusion in a particular an-
nex. They should establish the conditions for execution and provide information
about the timing of execution and deployments.
4. (U) Administration and Logistics
a. (U) Personnel. In preparing this paragraph, refer to Annex E (Personnel). Iden-

tify detailed planning requirements and subordinate taskings. Assign tasks for es-
tablishing and operating personnel facilities, managing accurate and timely
personnel accountability and strength reporting, and making provisions for staffing.
Discuss the administrative management of participating personnel, the reconstitu-
tion of forces, command replacement and rotation policies, and required individual
augmentation to command headquarters and other operational requirements.
b. (U) Logistics. In preparing a basic operation order or plan, refer to Annex D

(Logistics/Combat Service Support). Logistic phases are normally concurrent with
operational phases. This subparagraph should address sustainment priorities and re-
sources, base development and other civil engineering requirements, host nation
support, and inter-Service responsibilities. Identify the priority and movement of
major logistic items for each option and phase of the concept. Identify strategic and
theater ports for resupply. Outline transportation policies, guidance, and procedures
for all options. Identify logistic and transportation assumptions and include them
with other plan assumptions in subparagraph 1.f (Assumptions). Identify detailed
planning requirements and subordinate taskings.
c. (U) Public Affairs. Include appropriate information in this subparagraph or re-

fer to Annex F (Public Affairs).
d. (U) Civil Affairs. Include appropriate information in this subparagraph or refer

to Annex G (Civil Affairs).
e. (U) Meteorological and Oceanographic Services. Include appropriate informa-

tion in this subparagraph or refer to Annex H (Meteorological and Oceanographic
Operations).
f. (U) Geospatial Information and Services. Include appropriate information in

this subparagraph or refer to Annex M (Geospatial Information and Services).
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
g. (U) Medical Services. In preparing the basic operation order or plan, refer to
Annex Q (Medical Services). Identify planning requirements and subordinate task-
ings for hospitalization and evacuation. Address critical medical supplies and re-
sources. Refer to wartime host nation support agreements or provisions to support
in Annex P (Host Nation Support).
5. (U) Command and Signal
a. (U) Command Relationships. Include appropriate information in this subpara-

graph or refer to Annex J (Command Relationships). Indicate any changes to major
commands and the time of the expected shift. Identify all existing memorandums
of understanding and those that require development.
b. (U) Command Posts and Headquarters. The command post is the headquarters
echelon (forward, main, rear) where the commander is located. List the designa-
tions and locations of the issuing commander’s headquarters echelons and appro-
priate senior, adjacent, and subordinate commanders’ headquarters echelons. When
headquarters are to be displaced, indicate the location and time of opening of the
new headquarters and closing of the old headquarters.
c. (U) Succession to Command. Designate the succession of command for the

operation.
d. (U) Signal. Include appropriate information in this subparagraph or refer to

Annex K (Combat Information Systems). Provide instructions or restrictions about
communications-electronics (radio restrictions), pyrotechnic signals, lasers, etc. In-
clude a general statement concerning the scope of communications and information
systems and procedures required to support the operation. Highlight any communi-
cations and information systems or procedures requiring special emphasis.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
ANNEXES:
A – Task Organization
B – Intelligence
C – Operations
D – Logistics/Combat Service Support
E – Personnel
F – Public Affairs
G – Civil Affairs
H – Meteorological and Oceanographic Operations
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-28 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
J – Command Relationships
K – Combat Information Systems
L – Environmental Considerations
M – Geospatial Information and Services
N – Space Operations
P – Host Nation Support
Q – Medical Services
S – Special Technical Operations
U – Information Management
W – Aviation Operations
X – Execution Checklist
Z – Distribution
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
Sample Format of Annex A (Task Organization)

Organization for combat is a commander’s visualization of how he will group
Annex A
organic and attached combat, combat support, and combat service support ele-
ments for employment with other supporting forces to support his scheme of
maneuver, and he will group the command relationships to most effectively con-
trol his organization. It is determined after consideration of the unit’s mission,
missions assigned in subordinate units, terrain and enemy strength in each sub-
ordinate unit area, and the amount of combat power, including maneuver and
fire support units, available to the unit commander. The organization for combat
and the scheme of maneuver are developed concurrently. The purpose of Annex
A (Task Organization) is to identify the command’s organization for combat.
The command’s task organization graphically provides the command relation-
ships and the assignment of means for the accomplishment of the mission. The
G-3/S-3 prepares the task organization after considering the recommendations
of appropriate unit commanders. Its purpose is to establish groupings into which
the command will be divided to accomplish its mission and to establish com-
mand relationships. These groupings may be shown, if simple, in paragraph 3 of
the basic operation order or plan. If these groupings are complex, the task orga-
nization will be shown in a separate annex or just before paragraph 1 of the ba-
sic operation order or plan.
At a minimum, the task organization lists all major commands or task groupings
directly subordinate to the commander issuing the basic operation order or plan.
In addition, all organizations that directly support the operation are listed and
designated as “support,” although they are not under the command of the sup-
ported commander. Organizations to be established specifically to implement
the basic operation order or plan should appear in the task organization. The lev-
el of detail in the task organization should only be that necessary to convey a
clear understanding of the significant forces committed to the operation.
Underlining indicates that the unit or task grouping has an assigned mission.
Successive subordinate echelons of units or task groupings are shown by inden-
tations beneath the underlined unit or task grouping. Units or task groupings
with no assigned mission, and not included in another unit or task grouping, are
indented and listed immediately after the issuing headquarters.
Subordinate units or task groupings that are assigned missions are underlined
and listed in appropriate sequence. This sequence depends on two factors: the
type of units or task groupings being assigned missions and the type of mission
(offensive or defensive). This sequence should parallel the sequence of mission
assignments in paragraph 3 of the basic operation order or plan. The sequence of
listing major subordinate units or task groupings is—
l Offensive Operations. Ground combat units or elements (infantry units are
listed first followed by artillery and combat support units numerically or
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-30 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
alphabetically), aviation combat units or elements (aircraft units, combat

support, combat service support), combat service support units or ele-
ments.
l Defensive Operations. Units or elements closest to the enemy are listed
first. Ground and aviation combat units in the forward defense area are
then listed in numerical order followed by other units alphabetically.
When the commander, Marine Corps Forces prepares a supporting plan, he must
include Appendix 1 (Time-Phased Force and Deployment List).
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
ANNEX A TO OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number) (Operation CODE-

WORD) (U)
TASK ORGANIZATION (U)
(U) REFERENCES:List maps, charts, standing operating procedures or other docu-
ments essential to understanding the order or plan.
ORGANIZATION
COMMANDER
Issuing Headquarters
Indicate names of com-
The first entry is the organization of the issuing
manders of the parent or-
headquarters.
ganization and principal
Subordinate Unit or Task Grouping units
Units or task groupings with no assigned mission, and
which are not assigned to any other grouping, are in-
dented under issuing headquarters.
Subordinate Unit or Task Grouping
Subordinate units or task groupings with assigned mis-
sions, and which are not assigned to any other grouping,
are indented under issuing headquarters.
Subordinate Unit or Task Grouping
Organic and attached units or task groupings are in-
dented under the subordinate unit or task grouping.
Units or task groupings that are not attached but will
provide support are listed under the supported unit or
task grouping. The type of support (i.e., general sup-
port, direct support) is shown in parentheses.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
Annex A
Reserve Unit or Task Grouping
Units or task groupings in reserve are listed last. If a unit
or task grouping will be in reserve in the future it is listed
under Reserve, as well as in its normal sequence.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
APPENDIXES:
1 –
Time-Phased Force and Deployment List
2 –
Shortfall Identification
3 –
Force Module Identification (Normally at the component or MAGTF level.)
4 –
Deterrent Options (Not used in Marine Corps plans or orders. Included to con-
form with CJCSM 3122.03.)
5 – Reserve Component Requirements Summary
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-32 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format of Annex B (Intelligence)

The purpose of Annex B (Intelligence) is to provide detailed information and/or
intelligence on the enemy and the battlespace and to provide guidance on intelli-
gence and counterintelligence functions.
The G-2/S-2 prepares the intelligence annex, based on the previously completed
intelligence estimate. This annex provides both encyclopedic data and current
information on the enemy, including order of battle, location, biographical in-
formation on enemy commanders, capabilities, and intentions. One of the most
important aspects covered in the enemy’s intentions is the identification and dis-
Annex B
cussion of his most likely and most dangerous course of action.
The battlespace also includes information such as climate, topography, geogra-
phy, terrain analysis, physical infrastructure (roads, power grids, information
grids), cultural considerations that affect the operation, political structure, and
leadership. Much of this information may have been previously provided in in-
telligence estimates and in intelligence reports and summaries provided by na-
tional sources or higher headquarters. This information may be referenced in the
intelligence annex to reduce the size of the basic operation order or plan.
The intelligence annex normally provides intelligence preparation of the bat-
tlespace products to help further planning and execution. They include such
products as the situation template, modified combined obstacle overlay. These
products are normally found in Appendix 11 (Intelligence Estimate) or in Ap-
pendix 12 (Intelligence Products).
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-34 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
ANNEX B TO OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number) (Operation CODE-

WORD) (U)
INTELLIGENCE (U)
(U) REFERENCES:
(a) Maps and charts required for an understanding of this annex. Reference Annex
M (Geospatial Information and Services).
(b) Documents providing intelligence required for planning. Including related an-
nexes such as Annex H (Meteorological and Oceanographic Operations).
(c) Appropriate publications on Marine Corps and joint intelligence doctrine.
(d) Appropriate standing operating procedures and other documents providing
guidance on intelligence operations.
(e) The originator of the annex should ensure that the units receiving or executing
the plan or order have the cited references.
1. (U) Situation
a. (U) Characteristics of the Area. Summarize the conditions of the battlespace as

they may influence the operation. Describe as appropriate the physical, economic,
political, medical, social, religious, and psychological aspects and conditions of the
people and infrastructure in the battlespace. Do not repeat information included in
the general situation paragraph of the basic operation order or plan or detailed in-
formation contained in the appendices. Include sufficient analysis of the battlespace
to permit development of appropriate supporting plans. Include complete informa-
tion or reference documents and reports containing required intelligence.
b. (U) Hydrographic, Amphibious, Topographic, and Weather
(1) (U) Summarize the hydrographic data and amphibious considerations

needed to support amphibious and logistic over-the-shore operations. Refer to
Annex H (Meteorological and Oceanographic Operations) and Annex M
(Geospatial Information and Services).
(2) (U) Address topographic aspects, including trafficability, key terrain, ob-
stacles, cover, concealment, and avenues of approach. Reference Annex M
(Geospatial Information and Services).
(3) (U) Include, as appropriate, climate and weather aspects of the battlespace.
Coordinate with the staff weather officer or oceanographer and refer to refer-
ence Annex H (Meteorological and Oceanographic Operations).
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
c. (U) Estimate of Enemy Capabilities. Summarize the enemy’s situation, capa-

bilities, and possible courses of action (COAs). Provide the enemy order of battle,
estimates of the enemy strengths and weaknesses, and, at a minimum, the enemy’s
most likely and most dangerous COAs. When summarizing the enemy situation, re-
fer to the general situation paragraph of the basic operation order or plan or refer to
documents containing the required intelligence. Outline the enemy’s capability to
collect, communicate to intelligence centers, process, and disseminate intelligence.
Include specific intelligence cutoff dates and, when possible, identify finished intel-
Annex B
ligence products supporting these findings.
2. (U) Mission and Concept of Intelligence Operations
a. (U) Mission. State the intelligence mission based on the command’s mission
statement in the basic operation order or plan.
b. (U) Concept of Intelligence Operations. Outline the purpose of intelligence

operations and summarize the means and agencies used in planning, directing, col-
lecting, processing, exploiting, producing, disseminating, and evaluating the neces-
sary intelligence. When available and appropriate, integrate the resources of other
Services and allied nations.
3. (U) Intelligence Activities. Identify intelligence resources and the intelligence

planning, direction, collection, processing, production, dissemination, and evaluating
efforts required to support the basic operation order or plan. Identify the required intel-
ligence by proceeding from the PIRs, through intelligence operations and capabilities or
resources planning, to tasking of intelligence elements, including the following specific
areas:
a. (U) Planning and Direction. Provide guidance for determining intelligence re-
quirements (including those of subordinate commanders), preparing a collection
plan, issuing orders and requests to information collection agencies, and monitoring
the performance of collection agencies. Specify all exceptions to standard proce-
dures.
(1) (U) Priority Intelligence Requirements. List PIRs. If Annex B (Intelli-

gence) is not published, list the PIRs and other requirements for intelligence in
the coordinating instructions of the basic operation order or plan. When the
PIRs and other requirements for intelligence are lengthy and detailed, place
them in Appendix 1 (Priority Intelligence Requirements) of this annex.
(2) (U) New Requirements. Provide specific guidance for new intelligence re-
quirements during peace, crisis, and war, both before and during execution.
b. (U) Processing and Exploitation. Provide appropriate guidance for converting

information into usable form, including required provisions for document transla-
tion; imagery, signals, and technical sensor processing and interpretation; and other
pertinent processing activity.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-36 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
c. (U) Production. Provide guidance on analyzing and reporting collected intelli-

gence information by all collection sources used in support of the plan. Include
guidance on multidiscipline reports that fuse information from multiple sources.
Reference appropriate regulations, directives, and standing operating procedures
specifying U.S.-only and multinational reporting procedures. Identify the produc-
tion effort, including any intelligence and counterintelligence products, required to
support the plan.
d. (U) Dissemination. Provide necessary guidance for conveying intelligence to

appropriate units. Establish procedures and criteria to satisfy expanded require-
ments for vertical and lateral dissemination of finished intelligence and SPOT re-
ports. Establish alternate means to ensure that the required intelligence will be
provided to combat units as well as headquarters during crises and combat opera-
tions. Cover any of the following in this subparagraph:
(1) (U) Intelligence reports required from units (periods covered, distribution,
and time of distribution).
(2) (U) Formats for intelligence reports (appendixes, if required).
(3) (U) Distribution of intelligence studies.
(4) (U) Requirements for releasability to allied nations.
(5) (U) Requirements for secondary imagery dissemination.
4. (U) Assignment of Intelligence Tasks
a. (U) Orders to Subordinate and Attached Units. Use separate, numbered sub-
paragraphs to list detailed instructions for each unit performing intelligence func-
tions, including the originating headquarters, separate intelligence support units,
and allied or coalition forces.
b. (U) Requests to Higher, Adjacent, and Cooperating Units. Provide separate,

numbered subparagraphs applicable to each unit not organic or attached and from
which intelligence support is requested, including allied or coalition forces.
c. (U) Coordinating Instructions. Provide any instructions necessary for coordi-

nating collection and processing and exploitation, producing, and disseminating ac-
tivities. Include—
(1) (U) Periodic or special conferences for intelligence officers.
(2) (U) Intelligence liaison, when indicated, with adjacent commanders, for-
eign government agencies or military forces, and host countries.
5. (U) Communications and Information Systems. Summarize the U.S. and non-U.S.
communications and information systems and procedures to be used to carry out the
intelligence function or reference the appropriate paragraphs of Annex K (Combat
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
Information System). Include comments on interoperability of these communications

and information systems.
6. (U) Miscellaneous Instructions. List under separate subparagraphs required items

or information not covered above or in standing operating procedures, or items that
require action different from that provided in standing operating procedures. Include, as
appropriate, items such as operations security, deception, disclosure of intelligence,
releasability to coalition forces and public affairs, use of specialized intelligence per-
sonnel and personnel augmentation requirements, psychological operations, and exploi-
Annex B
tation of captured foreign materiel and documents.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
APPENDIXES:
1 – Priority Intelligence Requirements
2 – Signals Intelligence
3 – Counterintelligence
4 – Targeting Intelligence
5 – Human-Resource Intelligence
6 – Intelligence Support to Command and Control Warfare
7 – Imagery Intelligence
8 – Measurement and Signature Intelligence
9 – Captured Enemy Equipment
10 – National Intelligence Support Team
11 – Intelligence Estimate
12 – Intelligence Products
13 – Intelligence Collection Plan
14 – Reconnaissance and Surveillance Plan
15 – Geographic Intelligence
16 – Intelligence Operations
17 – Support to Survival, Evasion, Resistance, and Escape
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-38 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format of Annex C (Operations)

Annex C (Operations) provides substantive guidance for planning the conduct
of operations. Plans for the employment of non-U.S. forces should include pro-
posed command arrangements and, as necessary, consideration of requirements
for furnishing essential combat and logistic support.
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
ANNEX C TO OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number) (Operation CODE-

WORD) (U)
OPERATIONS (U)
(U) REFERENCES: List other plans, standing operating procedures, and doctrinal
Annex C
guidance to be followed in the conduct of operations.
1. (U) General
a. (U) Purpose. This annex provides guidance for the conduct of operations.
b. (U) Mission. State the mission as described in the basic operation order or
plan.
c. (U) Area of Operations. Define the area of operations encompassed by the ba-
sic order or plan to include land, sea, and air space. The annex should also define
any areas where reconnaissance and surveillance operations are authorized.
d. (U) Situation. Refer to the basic operation order or plan.
2. (U) Concept of Operations. Normally, the concept of operations is included in the

basic operation order or plan; however, when lengthy and detailed, place it here. The
format and content are similar to the concept of operations in the basic operation order
or plan. Refer to Appendix 18 (Operations Overlay).
3. (U) Conduct of Operations. Provide any guidance required for the conduct of spe-
cific operations.
a. (U) Aviation Operations. Refer to Annex W (Aviation Operations) or Appen-

dix 17 (Aviation Operations) if applicable.
b. (U) Maritime Prepositioning Force Operations. Provide the concept of mari-

time prepositioning force operations in the plan.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-40 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
c. (U) Information Operations/Command and Control Warfare. Refer to Appen-

dix 3 (Information Operations/Command and Control Warfare).
d. (U) Counterinsurgency. If applicable, refer to pertinent country internal de-

fense plans.
e. (U) Nuclear Operations. Not applicable.
f. (U) NBC Defense Operations. If applicable, refer to Appendix 2 (Nuclear, Bi-

ological, and Chemical Defense Operations).
g. (U) Special Operations. If applicable, refer to Appendix 4 (Special Opera-

tions).
h. (U) Tactical Recovery of Aircraft and Personnel. Refer to Appendix 5 (Eva-

sion and Recovery Operations).
i. (U) Rules of Engagement. Refer to Appendix 6 (Rules of Engagement).
j. (U) Reconnaissance. Refer to Appendix 7 (Reconnaissance).
k. (U) Air Base Operability. If applicable, refer to Appendix 8 (Air Base Opera-
bility).
l. (U) Combat Camera. If applicable, refer to Appendix 9 (Combat Camera).
m. (U) Noncombatant Evacuation Operations. If applicable, refer to Appendix 10

(Noncombatant Evacuation Operations).
n. (U) Escape and Evasion Operations. Refer to Appendix 11 (Escape and Eva-
sion Operations).
o. (U) Counterattack. If applicable, refer to Appendix 12 (Counterattack).
p. (U) Explosive Ordnance Disposal. Refer to Appendix 13 (Explosive Ordnance

Disposal).
q. (U) Amphibious Operations. If applicable, refer to Appendix 14 (Amphibious

Operations).
r. (U) Force Protection. Refer to Appendix 15 (Force Protection).
s. (U) Rear Area Operations. Refer to Appendix 16 (Rear Area Operations).
t. (U) Fire Support. Refer to Appendix 19 (Fire Support).
u. (U) Countermechanized Plan. If applicable, refer to Appendix 20 (Counter-

mechanized Plan).
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
v. (U) Breaching Plan. If applicable, refer to Appendix 21 (Breaching Plan).
w. (U) Obstacle Plan. If applicable, refer to Appendix 22 (Obstacle Plan).
4. (U) Operational Constraints. List any constraints to the conduct of combat opera-
tions not enumerated elsewhere; e.g., impact of deployment or employment of forces
and materiel on airfield ramp space (including possible host nation support). Estimate
the impact of these operational constraints and indicate how the concept of operations
and tasks to subordinate commanders would be modified if these constraints were
removed. State the effect of incremental removal of constraints.
a. (U) Command. Refer to the basic operation order or plan.
b. (U) Signal. Refer to the basic operation order or plan or to Annex K (Combat
Information Systems).
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Annex C
Name
Rank and Service
Title
APPENDIXES:
1 – Nuclear Operations (Not used in Marine Corps plans or orders. Included to con-
form with CJCSM 3122.03.)
2 – Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Defense Operations
3 – Information Operations/Command and Control Warfare
4 – Special Operations
5 – Evasion and Recovery Operations
6 – Rules of Engagement
7 – Reconnaissance
8 – Air Base Operability
9 – Combat Camera
10 – Noncombatant Evacuation Operations
11 – Escape and Evasion Operations
12 – Counterattack
13 – Explosive Ordnance Disposal
14 – Amphibious Operations
15 – Force Protection
16 – Rear Area Operations
17 – Aviation Operations
18 – Operations Overlay
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-42 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
19 – Fire Support
20 – Countermechanized Plan
21 – Breaching Plan
22 – Obstacle Plan
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
Sample Format of Appendix 3 (Information Operations/Command and

Control Warfare) to Annex C
Appendix 3 (Information Operations/Command and Control Warfare) should
help integrate the use of operations security, military deception, psychological
operations, electronic warfare, physical destruction, and other capabilities. In-
formation operations (IO) and command and control warfare (C2W) can be
waged in wartime both inside and outside the traditional military battlefield. It
can also be waged in military operations other than war. Command and control
warfare is an application of IO that specifically attacks and protects the com-
mand and control target set. The same disciplines and other capabilities em-
ployed to achieve IO objectives can be used inside the command and control
target set and should be included in this appendix.
Information operations and command and control warfare planning requires ex-
tensive coordination between commands to avoid conflicts and to ensure mutu-
al support. Additionally, IO/C2W planning must be coordinated with other
operational capabilities, such as air operations and intelligence. Intelligence
support is critical to successful IO/C2W. Information operations and command
Annex C
and control warfare planning requires information such as—
l Identification of critical information systems or processes.
l Identification of key decisionmakers and the decisionmaking process used
to arrive at and disseminate a decision.
l Detailed descriptions of specific communications systems and information
networks.
l Location of information and infrastructure nodes.
l Determination of the potential values of possible targets.
l Enemy threat to friendly information systems and processes.
The basic IO/C2W appendix should be a short document that clearly states the
primary mission of each of the elements of IO/C2W. It should provide enough
guidance to ensure that the elements are all working toward the accomplishment
of the IO/C2W mission. Provide detailed execution instructions for each of the
elements in the tabs to the IO/C2W appendix.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-44 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
APPENDIX 3 TO ANNEX C TO OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number) (Opera-

tion CODEWORD) (U)
INFORMATION OPERATIONS/COMMAND AND CONTROL WARFARE (U)
(U) REFERENCES:
(a) Any relevant plans or orders.
(b) Required maps and charts.
(c) Other relevant documents.
1. (U) Situation. Summarize the overall operational situation as it relates to IO/C2W.
a. (U) Enemy. Summarize the enemy situation, force disposition, intelligence ca-
pabilities, and possible courses of action. If applicable, reference intelligence esti-
mates or summaries. Address any specific information that bears directly on the
planned IO/C2W operation.
b. (U) Friendly. Summarize the situation of those friendly forces that may direct-
ly affect attainment of IO/C2W objectives. Address any critical limitations and
any other planned IO/C2W operations.
c. (U) Assumptions. List any assumptions made of friendly, enemy, or third-

party capabilities, limitations, or courses of action. Describe the conditions that the
commander believes will exist at the time the plan becomes an order. Omit in or-
ders.
2. (U) Mission. State the IO/C2W mission in a clear, concise statement that answers
the questions who, what, when, where, and why.
3. (U) Execution
a. (U) Concept of Operations. Summarize how the commander visualizes the ex-
ecution of IO/C2W from its beginning to its termination. Describe how the
IO/C2W operation will support the command’s operational mission. Summarize
the concepts for supervision and termination of IO/C2W operations.
(1) (U) The concept of operations may be a single paragraph or divided into
two or more paragraphs depending upon the complexity of the operation.
(2) (U) When an operation involves various phases (e.g., peace or pre-hostili-
ties, crisis, war, post-hostilities), the concept of operations should be prepared in
subparagraphs describing the role of IO/C2W in each phase.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
(3) (U) The concepts for offensive and defensive IO/C2W may be addressed in
separate subparagraphs.
b. (U) IO/C2W Tasks. Identify the major tasks for each of the five elements of
IO/C2W. Note: The five elements of IO/C2W listed below are covered in tabs A
through E.
(1) (U) Military deception.
(2) (U) Electronic warfare.
(3) (U) Operations security.
(4) (U) Psychological operations.
(5) (U) Physical destruction.
c. (U) Coordinating Instructions. Address any mutual support issues relating to

the elements of IO/C2W.
Annex C
4. (U) Administration and Logistics. Address any IO/C2W administrative or logistic
requirements.
5. (U) Command and Control. List any IO/C2W command and control instructions.
State the command structure for IO/C2W operations. Identify any special IO/C2W
communications and reporting requirements.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
TABS:
A – Military Deception
B – Electronic Warfare
C – Operations Security
D – Psychological Operations
E – Physical Destruction
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-46 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format for Tab A (Military Deception) to Appendix 3 to Annex C

Tab A (Military Deception) provides background and guidance for the prepara-
tion of the military deception tab of joint plans and orders. Chapter IV of Joint
Pub 3-58, Joint Doctrine for Military Deception, establishes the process for mil-
itary deception planning conducted in support of joint operations. Chapter V de-
scribes how the deception planning process relates to the Joint Operation
Planning and Execution System’s (JOPES’s) deliberate, crisis, and campaign
planning processes. As a general policy, any material related to planned, ongo-
ing, or completed military deception is accorded controlled access. Production
guidelines are as follows:
l “Need-to-know,” for the purposes of military deception, means limiting
access to those individuals who are involved in planning, approving, or ex-
ecuting deceptions and they must have knowledge of the deception to per-
form their duties.
l The deception tab will normally be developed, published, distributed, and
maintained separately from the rest of the operation plan.
l Standard administrative procedures are not used to distribute or staff the
Annex C
deception tab. Only positive control means, such as hand-to-hand delivery
or STU-III fax, will be used to distribute deception-related material.
l Specific deception events such as unit movements may be included in the
basic operation plan and its annexes if not identified as deception related.
l Deception-related documents will have cover sheets with the appropriate
classification markings. They will be annotated in accordance with Chair-
man of the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Instruction 3211.01B,
Joint Military Deception.
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Instruction 3211.01B establishes the re-
view criteria for deception concepts and plans. Deception planners must follow
the specific administrative and security procedures established by that document
to ensure that their plans are approved by the appropriate authority.
Page number
UNCLASSIFIED
G-48 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
TAB A TO APPENDIX 3 TO ANNEX C TO OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN

(Number) (Operation CODEWORD) (U)
MILITARY DECEPTION (U)
(U) REFERENCES: Identify plans, documents, maps, and charts that are essential to
the effective execution of military deception.
1. (U) Situation
a. (U) General. See basic operation order or plan.
b. (U) Enemy
(1) (U) General Capabilities. Identify enemy military capabilities directly re-
lating to the planned deception.
(2) (U) Deception Targets. Describe the political, military, or economic deci-
sionmakers (or organizations) targeted by the deception plan. Include personali-
ties, strengths, weaknesses, vulnerabilities, and people or factors known to
influence decisions.
(3) (U) Target Biases and Predispositions. Provide information on known bi-
ases and predispositions of political, military, or economic decisionmakers (or
organizations).
(4) (U) Probable Enemy Course of Action. Refer to Annex B (Intelligence).
c. (U) Friendly. Summarize the friendly situation, critical limitation, and concept
of operations.
d. (U) Assumptions. List all assumptions on which the deception is based.
2. (U) Mission
a. (U) Operational Mission. Extract from paragraph 2 of the basic operation or-
der or plan.
b. (U) Deception Mission
(1) (U) Deception Goal. Describe the desired effect or the endstate a com-
mander wishes to achieve (commander’s concept for the deception operation).
For example, “To cause the enemy to weight his defense in the eastern corridor,
to mislead the enemy as to the time and place of forcible entry operations, to
cause dissension within the enemy coalition such that . . . .”
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
(2) (U) Deception Objective(s). List the desired action or inaction by the ad-
versary at the critical time and location.
(3) (U) Desired Enemy Perceptions. Describe what the deception target must
believe for it to make the decision that will achieve the deception objective.
(4) (U) Deception Story. Outline a scenario of friendly actions or capabilities

that will be portrayed to cause the deception target to adopt the desired per-
ception. This could be an alternate course of action to the one chosen for the
basic operation order or plan itself.
3. (U) Execution
a. (U) Concept of the Operation
(1) (U) General. Describe the framework for the operation. Include a brief de-
scription of the phases of the deception operation.
(2) (U) Other Information Operations (IO)/Command and Control Warfare
Annex C
(C2W) Elements. Discuss the use of other IO/C2W elements in support of the
deception operation. Discuss all other IO/C2W element plans and operations
pertinent to the deception. Include coordination required to deconflict if neces-
sary.
(3) (U) Feedback and Monitoring. Provide a general statement of the type of
feedback expected, if any, and how it will be collected (monitored). Include a
brief statement on the impact of the absence of feedback on the plan.
(4) (U) Means. Describe available deception assets.
(5) (U) Tasks. Specify execution and feedback taskings to organizations par-
ticipating in the execution and monitoring of the deception operation.
(6) (U) Risks. Give a brief risk analysis in the categories given below. Rate
risk as low, moderate, or high in each category. Refer to Exhibit 3 (Operations)
to this tab for detailed risk analyses.
(a) (U) Deception is successful. Include likely adversary response. De-

scribe impact on friendly forces from adversary intelligence sharing.
(b) (U) Deception fails. Describe the impact if the target ignores the de-
ception or fails in some way to take the actions intended.
(c) (U) Deception is compromised to allies or adversaries.
b. (U) Coordinating Instructions. Identify any tasks or instructions pertaining to

two or more of the units listed in the preceding subparagraphs. List the tentative
D-day and H-hour, if applicable, and any other information required to ensure coor-
dinated action between two or more elements of the command.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-50 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
4. (U) Administration and Logistics. State instructions regarding administrative and
logistic support procedures to be used in developing, coordinating, and implementing
the deception plan. Do not include those administrative, logistic, and medical actions or
ploys that are an actual part of the deception operation. Place detailed instructions in
Exhibit 4 (Administration and Logistics).
a. (U) Administration
(1) (U) General. Outline general procedures to be employed during planning,

coordination, and implementation of deception activities.
(2) (U) Specific. Detail any special administrative measures needed to execute
the deception operation.
b. (U) Logistics. Detail logistic requirements for the execution of the deception
operation, such as the transportation of special material, or provision of printing
equipment and materials. Do not include executions conducted by logistic elements
as part of the portrayal of observables. Place detailed instructions in Exhibit 4 (Ad-
ministration and Logistics).
c. (U) Costs. As applicable.
5. (U) Communications and Information Systems
a. (U) Command Relationships. Use Exhibit 5 (Command Relationships) to il-

lustrate command relationships by phase if required.
(1) (U) Approval. State approval authority for execution and termination.
(2) (U) Authority. Designate supported and supporting commanders, support-

ing agencies as applicable, and any caveats to Exhibit 1 (Task Organization) or
Exhibit 5 (Command Relationships).
(3) (U) Oversight. Detail oversight responsibilities particularly for executions

by nonorganic units or organizations outside the chain of command.
(4) (U) Coordination. Identify coordination responsibilities and requirements

related to deception executions and execution feedback. Address in-theater and
out-of-theater requirements.
b. (U) Communications. Detail communications means and procedures to be

used by control personnel and participants in the deception operation. Include all
reporting requirements.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
6. (U) Security
a. (U) General. Outline general procedures to be employed during planning, co-

ordination, and implementation of deception activities.
b. (U) Specific. State access restrictions, handling instructions, and who has au-
thority to grant access to the deception appendix or plan. Describe use of cover sto-
ries if applicable, codewords, nicknames, and procedures for planning and
execution documents. If required, place access rosters and other detailed security
considerations in a separate document.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Annex C
EXHIBITS:
1 – Task Organization
2 – Intelligence
3 – Operations
4 – Administration and Logistics
5 – Command Relationships
6 – Execution Schedule
7 – Distribution
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-52 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format of Exhibit 2 (Intelligence) to Tab A

to Appendix 3 to Annex C
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
EXHIBIT 2 TO TAB A TO APPENDIX 3 TO ANNEX C TO OPERATION ORDER

OR PLAN (Number) (Operation CODEWORD) (U)
INTELLIGENCE (U)
(U) REFERENCES: Identify plans, documents, maps, and charts that are essential to
the execution of the deception.
Note: Information and intelligence provided here must be focused and specific to the
deception. Do not repeat information found in Annex B (Intelligence).
Annex C
1. (U) Mission. Provide a concise statement of the deception mission. Identify the
command executing the deception, the deception target, the deception objective(s), and
the duration of the operation.
2. (U) Situation
a. (U) Enemy
(1) (U) Target Description. Describe the political, military, or economic deci-
sionmakers (or organizations) targeted by the deception plan. Include personali-
ties, strengths, weaknesses, vulnerabilities, and people or factors known to
influence decisions.
(2) (U) Target Biases and Predispositions
(3) (U) Adversary Intelligence Organizations. Identify the targeted country’s

intelligence organizations, their missions, and their methods and capabilities for
covert and clandestine operations. Include collection, processing, analysis, and
dissemination. Specifically note those organizations most likely to provide in-
telligence to the targeted decisionmaker and those tasked with exposing decep-
tion.
(4) (U) Adversary Counterintelligence Organizations. Describe missions, ca-

pabilities, and operations.
(5) (U) Adversary Intelligence Sharing with Other Countries. Identify other in-
telligence organizations available to the targeted country, the nature of intelli-
gence exchange, and the potential for using that relationship for the deception.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-54 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
(6) (U) Other Sources and Related Matters. Identify scientific, technical, diplo-
matic, or academic contacts that might act as information conduits.
(7) (U) Deception and Denial Activities. Provide an analysis of the targeted
country’s use of deception and denial in support of its political and military
goals. Identify the target’s deception and denial methods and current deception
and denial activities.
(8) (U) Target Reaction. Provide an estimate of the target’s reaction if the de-
ception is successful. Also provide likely target reactions if the deception is not
successful. Identify whether the adversary would use deception in response.
This subparagraph provides in-depth information to document the risk assess-
ments presented in Tab C-3-A (Military Deception) and Exhibit C-3-A-3 (Oper-
ations).
(9) (U) Third-Party Reaction. Provide an analysis of the impact of the decep-
tion on allies, neutrals, and potential adversaries and their responses. This sub-
paragraph provides in depth information to document the risk assessments
presented in Tab C-3-A (Military Deception) and Exhibit C-3-A-3 (Operations).
b. (U) Friendly. Provide information on activities by unknowing U.S. forces hav-

ing an impact on the deception. Compare the time necessary to collect, process, re-
port, and analyze intelligence (in support of deception) with the plan’s operational
timeline. Assess the impact here.
3. (U) Intelligence Requirements
a. (U) Priority Information Requirements. Priority information requirements as-

sociated with deception are listed in Attachment 1 (Priority Information Require-
ments).
b. (U) Feedback. Assess the intelligence community’s ability to identify and col-
lect plan-specific feedback information.
c. (U) Assignment of Intelligence Tasks. Identify organizations to produce plan-

specific collection requirements.
(1) (U) Service intelligence agencies and organizations.
(2) (U) Commander’s intelligence organizations and assets.
(3) (U) Others.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
ATTACHMENTS:
A – Priority Intelligence Requirements
B – Others as needed
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Annex C
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-56 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format of Attachment A (Priority Intelligence Requirements) to

Exhibit 2 to Tab A to Appendix 3 to Annex C
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
ATTACHMENT A TO EXHIBIT 2 TO TAB A TO APPENDIX 3 TO ANNEX C TO

OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number) (Operation CODEWORD) (U)
PRIORITY INTELLIGENCE REQUIREMENTS (U)
1. (U) General. Identify requirements, including those of subordinate commanders,
for priority intelligence requirements for pre-execution and execution phases of the
planned deception operation.
2. (U) Before Implementation of the Order or Plan. List questions for which answers
Annex C
are needed for further planning and as a basis for decision on plan implementation.
3. (U) Upon Implementation of the Order or Plan. List the additional PIRs and other
intelligence requirements that become relevant upon decision to implement the opera-
tion plan. (Use additional paragraphs if necessary to reflect differing requirements dur-
ing planned phases of the operation.)
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-58 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
Sample Format of Appendix 18 (Operations Overlay) to Annex C
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
APPENDIX 18 TO ANNEX C TO OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number) (Oper-

ation CODEWORD) (U)
OPERATIONS OVERLAY (U)
Utilize appropriate register marks and graphics from MCRP 5-2A, Operational Terms
and Graphics, to visually depict desired aspects of the operation. The basis of the oper-
ations overlay is the approved course of action graphics sketch. It may depict—
l Main effort.
l Supporting effort.
l Reserve.
Annex C
l Boundaries.
l Fire support coordinating measures.
l Assembly areas.
l Lines of departure.
l Other information as dictated by mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and
support available, time available (METT-T).
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-60 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format of Annex D (Logistics/Combat Service Support)

Logistics is the science of planning and carrying out the movement and mainte-
nance of forces. It includes the provision of combat service support to forces at
the tactical level of war as well as the movement and sustainment of Marine
forces at the operational level of war. Logistics provides the commander with
the wherewithal to conduct and win battles, campaigns, and ultimately, the
war. Annex D (Logistics/Combat Service Support) provides direction and
guidance to the subordinate commanders and staffs on the provision of logis-
tics and combat service support in support of operations described in the opera-
tion order (OPORD) or operation plan (OPLAN). MCDP 4, Logistics, provides
the theory and philosophy of logistics as practiced by the Marine Corps.
Appendix Q of Joint Pub 5-03.1, Joint Operation Planning and Execution Sys-
tem, Volume I, Planning Policy and Procedures, lists pertinent logistic referenc-
es. MCWP 4-11, Tactical-Level Logistics, provides detailed information on
combat service support as well as amplifying instructions on the preparation of
logistic planning documents.
The command and control of logistic and combat service support organizations,
to include command relationships and command and control support require-
ments, should be addressed in Annex D. It provides a general discussion of how
the operation will be supported and is fully integrated with other critical con-
cepts such as the concept of maneuver, fires, and force protection. It should be
in only as much depth as is necessary to ensure understanding of envisioned lo-
gistic combat service support operations by subordinate commanders and staffs.
The G-4/S-4 is normally responsible for the preparation of Annex D. However,
Annex D
the combat service support element should be involved in the planning process.
Phasing and significant anticipated changes in mission or tasks should be re-
flected in the concept of support. Detailed or specialized information should be
provided in other subparagraphs or in appendices of Annex D. Discuss or refer
to aviation-specific logistic functions such as supply and maintenance in Appen-
dix 1 (Supply) or in the aviation combat element OPORD or OPLAN.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-62 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
ANNEX D TO OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number) (Operation CODE-

WORD) (U)
LOGISTICS/COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT (U)
(U) REFERENCES: Cite references necessary for a complete understanding of this an-
nex.
1. (U) Situation
a. (U) Enemy. Refer to Annex B (Intelligence). Provide available information on

enemy actions or intent to conduct actions to disrupt or degrade envisioned friendly
logistic and combat service support operations. Include information on enemy ca-
pabilities or assets that can augment friendly logistic and combat service support
operations.
b. (U) Friendly. List supporting logistic or combat service support organizations

not subordinate to the force and the specific missions and tasks assigned to each.
c. (U) Infrastructure. Refer to Annex B (Intelligence). Provide information on

existing infrastructure, such as ports, factories, fuel and water sources, and lines of
communications (LOCs) that can be used to support friendly logistic and combat
service support operations.
d. (U) Attachments and Detachments. Refer to Annex A (Task Organization).

List other Service and nation logistic and combat service support units attached to
the force. List all Marine Corps logistic and combat service support units detached
to support other friendly forces.
e. (U) Assumptions. State realistic assumptions and consider the effect of current
operations on logistic capabilities. Omitted in orders.
f. (U) Resource Availability. Identify significant competing demands for logistic

resources where expected requirements may exceed resources. Include recom-
mended solutions within resource levels available for planning, if any, and reason-
ably assured host nation support.
g. (U) Planning Factors. Refer to and use approved planning factors and formu-
las, except when experience or local conditions dictate otherwise. When deviating
from planning factors, identify the factors and the reason.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
2. (U) Mission. State in a clear and concise manner the mission of the logistic and
combat service support forces and the logistic objectives that support accomplishment
of the command’s purpose and tasks.
3. (U) Execution
a. (U) Concept of Logistics and Combat Service Support. State the concept for
logistic and combat service support operations necessary to implement the order or
plan. Describe how the logistic and combat service support assets will be organized
and positioned to execute the mission. The concept may include planned employ-
ment of other Service and nation logistic and combat service support forces, host
nation support logistic capabilities, or operation of the LOCs.
b. (U) Tasks
(1) (U) Assign logistic and combat service support responsibilities to subordi-
nate logistic organizations.
(2) (U) Identify and assign responsibility for logistics and combat service sup-
port required from other commands, Services, or nations.
(3) (U) Identify and assign responsibility for logistics and combat service sup-
port required for forces assigned or attached from other commands, Services, or
nations.
(4) (U) Identify and assign responsibility for logistics and combat service
support required for Marine Corps forces assigned or attached to other com-
Annex D
mands, Services, or nations.
(5) (U) Assign responsibilities to support joint boards and committees, such as
transportation and procurement, and other Services or nations providing ser-
vices.
a. (U) Logistics and Combat Service Support
(1) (U) Supply. Refer to Appendix 7 (Supply). Summarize the following, in

coordination with supporting commanders and Service component command-
ers, if different from standard planning factors. Place detailed discussions in the
appendices and listings of supply depots, terminals, and LOCs in tabs or the ap-
propriate appendixes.
(a) (U) Distribution and Allocation
1 (U) Purpose, location, and projected displacement of main and

alternate supply depots or points and supporting terminals and ports
to be used or considered.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-64 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
2 (U) Prepositioned logistic resource allocation.

3 (U) Existing terminals and LOCs and the known or estimated
throughput capability. Indicate the time-phased expansion necessary
to support the plan.
(b) (U) Level of Supply
1 (U) Indicate the time-phased operating and safety levels required

to support the plan.
2 (U) Indicate the prepositioned war reserve materiel requirements
to support the time-phased deployments pending resupply.
3 (U) Specify significant special arrangements required for mate-
riel support beyond normal supply procedures.
4 (U) Indicate anticipated shortfalls.
5 (U) Indicate common user logistic supply support responsibilities
and arrangements.
(c) (U) Salvage. Provide instructions for, and identify the logistic impact
of, the collection, classification, and disposition of salvage.
(d) (U) Captured Enemy Materiel. Provide instructions for the collec-
tion, classification, and disposition of enemy materiel. See Annex B (Intel-
ligence) for further guidance. See Appendix 10 to Annex B (Intelligence)
for specific instructions for the disposition of captured enemy cryptograph-
ic equipment.
(e) (U) Local Acquisition of Supplies and Services. See Joint Pub 4-01
and the current version of DOD Instruction 3020.37.
1 (U) Identify acquisition of goods and services in the following

categories:
a (U) The general categories of materiel and services that are
available and contemplated as a supplement to regular sources.
b (U) Those that may be used as emergency acquisition sourc-
es.
2 (U) Make a statement concerning the dependability of the local
acquisition or labor source in each of the above categories and the
joint or Service element that will obtain or manage these resources.
3 (U) State that all essential contractor services, to include new and
existing contracts, have been reviewed to determine which services
will be essential to OPLAN execution. Make a statement concerning
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
the existence of contingency plans to ensure the continuation of these

essential services.
(f) (U) Petroleum, Oils, and Lubricants. Refer to Appendix 1 (Petroleum,
Oils, and Lubricants Supply).
(2) (U) External Support. Refer to Appendix 11 (External Support). Provide

the required planning information including type and quantity of support and
instructions where inter-Service and cross-Service arrangements for common
supply and service support are appropriate.
(a) (U) Summarize major support arrangements that are presently in ef-
fect or that will be executed in support of the plan.
(b) (U) Include significant inter-Service and cross-Service support ar-

rangements. Refer to appropriate annexes or appendixes.
(c) (U) Include foreign and host nation support.
(3) (U) Maintenance
(a) (U) General. Refer to Appendix 12 (Maintenance).
(b) (U) Specific Guidance
1 (U) Include sufficient detail to determine the requirements for

maintenance facilities needed to support the plan.
Annex D
2 (U) Indicate the level of maintenance to be performed and where
it is to occur, including host nation or contractor facilities, if applica-
ble.
(a) (U) General. Refer to Appendix 4 (Mobility and Transportation). Pro-

vide general planning or execution guidance to subordinate and supporting
organizations to facilitate transportation of the force and its sustainment.
This can include movement and use priorities.
(b) (U) Mobility Support Force and Movement Feasibility Analysis. Pro-
vide an estimate of the mobility support and movement feasibility of the
plan. Include in the analysis any appropriate remarks affecting mobility
and transportation tasks. Consider the availability of adequate lift resources
for movements of personnel and equipment, airfield reception capabilities,
seaport and aerial port terminal capabilities, and port throughput capabili-
ties. Also, consider any features that will adversely affect movement opera-
tions, such as the effect of deployment or employment of forces and
materiel on airfield ramp space (to include possible host nation support).
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-66 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
(5) (U) General Engineering Support Plan. Refer to Appendix 13 (General En-
gineering). State the rationale if Appendix 5 (Civil Engineering Support Plan is
not prepared. Indicate the general engineering support activities applicable to
the basic operation order or plan and the policies for providing these services.
(6) (U) Health Services. Refer to Appendix 9 (Health Services).
(7) (U) Services. Refer to Appendix 8 (Services).
(8) (U) Mortuary Affairs. Refer to Appendix 2 (Mortuary Affairs) or, if not
used, indicate the mortuary affairs activities applicable to the OPORD or
OPLAN and policy for providing these affairs.
(9) (U) Ammunition. Refer to Appendix 6 (Nonnuclear Ammunition) or if not

used, discuss any critical ammunition issues that may affect the ability of the
force to accomplish the mission.
(10) (U) Aviation Logistic Support. Refer to Appendix 10 (Aviation Logistic

Support) or Annex D (Logistics/Combat Service Support) of the aviation com-
bat element OPORD or OPLAN. Critical aviation logistic and combat service
support issues may be discussed if they affect the ability of the force to accom-
plish the mission.
(11) (U) OPSEC Planning Guidance for Logistics. Refer to Tab C (Operations
Security) to Appendix 3 (Information Operations/Command and Control War-
fare) to Annex C (Operations). Provide comprehensive operations security plan-
ning guidance for planning, preparing, and executing logistic and combat
service support activities. At a minimum, address base, facility, installation, lo-
gistic stocks, physical, and LOC security. Provide guidance to ensure that logis-
tic and combat service support activities promote essential secrecy for
operational intentions, capabilities that will be committed to specific missions,
and current preparatory operational activities.
b. (U) Administration. Include general administrative guidance to support logis-

tic and combat service support operations for the basic operation order or plan. If
reports are required, specify formats for preparation, time, methods, and classifica-
tion of submission.
a. (U) Command Relationships. Refer to Annex J (Command Relationships) for

command relationships external to logistic units. Provide support relationships.
b. (U) Communications and Information Systems. Refer to Annex K (Combat

Information System) for detailed communications and information systems require-
ments. Provide a general statement of the scope and type of communications re-
quired.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
APPENDIXES:
1 –
Petroleum, Oils, and Lubricants Supply
2 –
Mortuary Affairs
3 –
Sustainability Analysis
4 –
Mobility and Transportation
5 –
Civil Engineering Support Plan
6 –
Nonnuclear Ammunition
7 –
Supply
8 –
Services
9 –
Health Services
10 –
Aviation Logistic Support (Normally provided in the aviation combat element
plan or order.)
11 – External Support
12 – Maintenance
13 – General Engineering
OFFICIAL:
s/
Annex D
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-68 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format of Annex J (Command Relationships)

Command relationships are the interrelated responsibilities between command-
ers, as well as the authority of commanders in the chain of command. Unity of
effort is, in large part, achieved through the application of flexible range of com-
mand relationships. The joint force commander exercises command during joint
operations according to the provisions of Joint Pub 0-2, Unified Action Armed
Forces. Joint Pub 3-0, Doctrine for Joint Operations; MCWP 0-1, Marine
Corps Operations; and MCWP 0-1.1, Componency, describe possible command
relationships between the joint force commander, the Marine Corps component
commander, the MAGTF commander, and subordinate commanders of assigned
or attached Marine forces. This annex will discuss—
l Requirements to coordinate support between forces in the same or adja-
cent areas according to Joint Pub 0-2 and the common higher headquarters
operation order (OPORD) or operation plan (OPLAN).
l Planning for succession of command and change of command location
(i.e., alternate command and control procedures). Refer to paragraph 5,
Command and Signal, of the OPORD or OPLAN or Annex K.
l DOD Directive 3025.14, Protection and Evacuation of U.S. Citizens and
Designated Aliens in Danger Areas Abroad, as amended by changes 1 and
2, which delineates the responsibilities for protection of U.S. citizens
abroad. In support of this directive, give special attention to cooperation
and coordination between U.S. diplomatic and military activities during
periods of tension and hostilities.
l Command relationships between the United States Information Agency
and the U.S. Armed Forces in the conduct of psychological operations.
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
Annex J
ANNEX J TO OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number)

(Operation CODEWORD) (U)
COMMAND RELATIONSHIPS (U)
(U) REFERENCES: List documents that provide necessary guidance on the command
relationships of forces concerned.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-70 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CLASSIFICATION
1. (U) General
e. (U) Purpose. To establish the relationships between—
(1) (U) Combatant commands.
(2) (U) International commands and organizations.
(3) (U) Commander, U.S. Forces country.
(4) (U) Service and functional component commanders.
(5) (U) Major subordinate commanders.
(6) (U) Coordinating authorities.
(7) (U) Other subordinate military activities.
(8) (U) U.S. diplomatic missions.
(9) (U) Government departments or agencies that support the operations.
(10) (U) Forces and agencies of other nations.
a. (U) Scope. Specify the scope and applicability of the command relationships
established in this annex for specific military operations or functions within an as-
signed geographic area; or for specific military operations or functions not limited
to a geographic area, and the times or circumstances when the relationships become
effective.
2. (U) Command Lines
a. (U) Service and Functional Components. Indicate the command lines to Ser-
vice and functional components of the force and to subordinate elements, as appro-
priate.
b. (U) Other Subordinate Commands. Indicate the established command lines to

subordinate commanders for conducting this operation and the conditions under
which forces will be transferred to their operational control.
c. (U) Augmentation Forces. Indicate the purpose, time, and approximate dura-
tion of the attachment and the degree of authority over and responsibility for the
augmentation forces.
d. (U) Alternate Procedures. Discuss procedures for succession of command and

change of command location (alternate command and control procedures).
3. (U) Support and Coordination Relationships
a. (U) Supporting Military Forces. Indicate established relationships with mili-

tary organizations operating in support of the originating command.
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
CLASSIFICATION
b. (U) Coordinating Authorities. As necessary, assign a commander or another

person the responsibility for coordinating specific functions or activities.
c. (U) Supporting Agencies. Indicate the relationships between the elements of

the force and any supporting agencies, such as United States Information Agency.
(Refer to other annexes or appendixes, as appropriate.)
d. (U) Inter-Service Support Arrangements. Refer to Annex D (Logistics/Combat

Service Support), subparagraph 2b(7), Inter-Service Logistic Support.
e. (U) Coordination with Diplomatic Agencies. Indicate any requirement for co-
ordination with chiefs of U.S. diplomatic missions that is not included elsewhere in
the plan and who are responsible for such coordination.
4. (U) Relationships With International and Foreign Commands and Organizations.

Indicate established command arrangements or relations with international commands
and organizations, foreign military commands, or guerrilla organizations. Also indicate
the conditions under which such relations would become effective.
5. (U) Planning Relationships. Specify established relationships between military

commands for developing supporting plans. Include any requirements for coordination
with other-nation commands and nonmilitary agencies.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
APPENDIX:
1 – Command Relationships Diagram
OFFICIAL:
s/
Annex J
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-72 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format of Appendix 1 (Command Relationships

Diagram) to Annex J
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
APPENDIX 1 TO ANNEX J TO OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number) (Opera-

tion CODEWORD) (U)
COMMAND RELATIONSHIPS DIAGRAM (U)
This appendix graphically portrays the command relationships. Show all specific rela-
tionships, i.e., operational control, tactical control, administrative control.
Graphic
Graphic
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Annex J
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Page number
CLASSIFICATION
G-74 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Sample Format of Annex X (Execution Checklist)

Annex X (Execution Checklist) provides a convenient and useful listing of key
events and tasks that must be conducted by the force to accomplish the mission.
The execution checklist allows subordinate commands and supporting and adja-
cent forces to coordinate their actions and maintain situational awareness. Only
critical events and tasks requiring participation by multiple organizations should
be included in the execution checklist. Events and tasks should be listed in order
of envisioned execution.
CLASSIFICATION

PLACE OF ISSUE
Date/time group
ANNEX X TO OPERATION ORDER OR PLAN (Number)

(Operation CODEWORD) (U)
EXECUTION CHECKLIST (U)
(U) Emphasize, primarily for headquarters and agencies external to the originating
command, the actions that each must take to ensure the coordinated initiation of the op-
eration. Additional information could include communication nets, brevity codes, re-
porting requirements, maneuver control measures, decision points, named areas of
interest, tactical areas of interest, and any fragmentary orders in support of a branch
plan.
HEADQUARTERS
ACTION AND AGENCY TIMING CONDITIONS
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
Name
Rank and Service
Title
Annex X
OFFICIAL:
s/
Name
Rank and Service
Title
G-76 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1

Section III. Examples
Section III provides examples of a plan summary, basic operation plan or order,
and some appendices and tabs. Examples are notional and provide a written rep-
resentation of an actual operation order, appendix, etc. The following table of
contents lists standing formats. Bold text indicates that the format is provided in
this section and its page location. Bold, italic text indicates that a particular for-
mat is not used in Marine Corps plans or orders, but it is included in the list to
conform to CJCSM 3122.03.
Page
Plan Summary G-81
Basic Order or Plan G-89
Annex A. Task Organization G-111
Appendix 1. Time-Phased Force and Deployment
Appendix 2. Shortfall Identification
Appendix 3. Force Module Identification
Appendix 4. Deterrent Options
Appendix 5. Reserve Component Requirements Summary
Annex B. Intelligence G-115
Appendix 1. Priority Intelligence Requirements
Appendix 2. Signals Intelligence 37
Tab A. Communications Intelligence Collection Requirements
Tab B. Operational Electronic Intelligence Collection
Requirements
Appendix 3. Counterintelligence
Tab A. Counterintelligence Target List
Tab B. Multidiscipline Counterintelligence Threat Report
Tab C. Designation of Theater CI Executive Agency
Appendix 4. Targeting Intelligence
Tab A. Target List (Conventional)
Appendix 5. Human-Resource Intelligence
Tab A. HUMINT Operations Cell Operations
Tab B. EPW/Civilian Detainees
Appendix 6. Intelligence Support to Command and Control Warfare
Appendix 7. Imagery Intelligence
Appendix 8. Measurement and Signature Intelligence
Appendix 9. Captured Enemy Equipment
Tab A. Specific Prioritized Intelligence Collection Requirements
Tab B. Equipment Releasable for Operational Purposes
Appendix 10. National Intelligence Support Team
Appendix 11. Intelligence Estimate
Appendix 12. Intelligence Products
Appendix 13. Intelligence Collection Plan
G-78 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Page
Appendix 15. Geographic Intelligence
Appendix 16. Intelligence Operations
Appendix 17. Support to Survival, Evasion, Resistance, and
Escape
Annex C. Operations G-129
Appendix 1. Nuclear Operations
Appendix 2. Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Defense Operations
Appendix 3. Information Operations/Command and G-137
Control Warfare
Tab A. Military Deception G-141
Exhibit 2. Intelligence G-149
Attachment A. Priority Intelligence G-155
Requirements
Tab B. Electronic Warfare
Tab C. Operations Security
Tab D. Psychological Operations
Tab E. Physical Destruction
Appendix 4. Special Operations
Appendix 5. Evasion and Recovery Operations
Appendix 6. Rules of Engagement
Appendix 7. Reconnaissance
Appendix 8. Air Base Operability
Appendix 9. Combat Camera
Tab A. COMCAM Customer Support Requirements
Appendix 10. Noncombatant Evacuation Operations
Appendix 11. Escape and Evasion Operations
Appendix 12. Counterattack
Appendix 13. Explosive Ordnance Disposal
Appendix 14. Amphibious Operations
Tab A. Advance Force Operations
Tab B. Embarkation Plan
Tab C. Landing Plan
Tab D. Rehearsal Plan
Tab E. CSS Control Agencies Plan
Appendix 15. Force Protection
Tab A. Combating Terrorism
Tab B. Physical Security
Tab C. Base Defense
Appendix 16. Rear Area Operations
Appendix 17. Aviation Operations (omitted when Annex W is used)
Appendix 18. Operations Overlay G-157
Appendix 19. Fire Support
Tab A. Air Fire Plan
Tab B. Artillery Fire Plan
Tab C. Naval Surface Fire Support Plan
Tab D. Chemical Fire Plan
Page
Tab E. Targeting
Tab F. Fire Support Coordination Plan
Appendix 20. Countermechanized Plan
Appendix 21. Breaching Plan
Appendix 22. Obstacle Plan
Annex D. Logistics/Combat Service Support G-159
Appendix 1. Petroleum, Oils, and Lubricants Supply
Appendix 2. Mortuary Affairs
Appendix 3. Sustainability Analysis
Appendix 4. Mobility and Transportation
Tab A. En Route Support Requirements
Tab B. Reception and Onward Movement
Appendix 5. Civil Engineering Support Plan
Appendix 6. Nonnuclear Ammunition
Tab A. Munitions Matrix
Appendix 7. Supply
Appendix 8. Services
Appendix 9. Health Services
Appendix 10. Aviation Logistic Support (normally in the aviation
combat element plan or order)
Appendix 11. External Support
Appendix 12. Maintenance
Appendix 13. General Engineering
Annex E. Personnel
Appendix 1. Enemy Prisoners of War, Civilian Internees, and Other
Detained Persons
Appendix 2. Processing of Formerly Captured, Missing, or Detained
U.S. Personnel
Appendix 3. Finance and Disbursing
Appendix 4. Legal
Appendix 5. Military Postal Service
Tab A. Aerial Mail Terminals
Tab B. Military Post Offices
Appendix 6. Chaplain Activities
Tab A. Inter-Service Chaplain Support
Tab B. Host Nation Religious Support
Tab C. Commander-Staff Chaplain Relationships
Annex F. Public Affairs
Appendix 1. Personnel Requirements for Joint Information Bureaus
and Sub-Joint Information Bureaus
Appendix 2. Equipment and Support Requirements for Joint
Information Bureaus and Sub-Joint Information
Bureaus
Appendix 3. General Ground Rules for the Media
Appendix 4. DOD National Media Pool
Annex G. Civil Affairs
Annex H. Meteorological and Oceanographic Operations
G-80 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Page
Annex J. Command Relationships G-171
Appendix 1. Command Relationships Diagram G-175
Annex K. Combat Information System
Appendix 1. Information Systems Security
Appendix 2. Defensive Information Warfare
Appendix 3. Communications Planning
Appendix 4. Satellite Communications Planning
Tab A. UHF SATCOM Network List
Tab B. SHF SATCOM Network List
Tab C. EHF SATCOM Network List
Annex L. Environmental Considerations
Annex M. Geospatial Information and Services
Appendix 1. Geospatial Information and Services List
Annex N. Space Operations
Annex P. Host Nation Support
Appendix 1. List of Host Nation Support Agreements
Annex Q. Medical Services
Appendix 1. Joint Medical Regulating System
Appendix 2. Joint Blood Program
Appendix 3. Hospitalization
Appendix 4. Patient Evacuation
Appendix 5. Returns to Duty
Appendix 6. Medical Logistics (Class 8A) System
Appendix 7. Preventive Medicine
Appendix 8. Medical Communications and Information Systems
Appendix 9. Host-Nation Medical Support
Appendix 12. Veterinary Medicine
Appendix 13. Medical Planning Responsibilities and Task Identifications
Annex S. Special Technical Operations
Annex U. Information Management
Annex W. Aviation Operations
Appendix 1. Air Defense/Antiair Warfare
Appendix 2. Offensive Air Support
Appendix 3. Assault Support
Appendix 5. Supplementary Air Operations
Appendix 6. Aircraft Armament
Appendix 7. Air Control
Appendix 8. Air Communications
Appendix 9. Air Movement Plan/Flight Ferry
Appendix 10. Aircraft Schedules
Appendix 11. Air Tasking
Annex X. Execution Checklist G-177
Annex Z. Distribution
Example of a Plan Summary
UNCLASSIFIED
Copy no.___of___copies
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
1 February 2001
ABD-1
SUPPORTING PLAN 0002-01 (OPERATION SHARP SWORD) (U)

PLAN SUMMARY (U)
TIME ZONE: Zulu
1. (U) Purpose
a. (U) The purpose of Operation Sharp Sword is to re-

store the Orangeland/Blueland border by defeating the
Orangeland forces that have invaded Blueland and to po-
sition U.S. forces to continue combat operations within
Orangeland, if required.
b. (U) This plan summary provides major subordinate

commander (MSC) commanders with a brief recapitulation
of the major aspects of the I Marine Expeditionary
Force (MEF) supporting plan. It is based on planning
factors and estimates available at the time of prepara-
tion and is subject to modification in the context of a
specific situation. If the Marine Forces-B (MARFOR-B)
plan is executed, the I MEF Supporting Plan 0002-01
will serve as the basis for the I MEF Operation Order
for Operation Sharp Sword. The information contained
herein must be updated before use in adopting MSC
courses of action (COAs).
2. (U) Conditions for Implementation/Execution
a. (U) Politico-Military Situation
(1) (U) General. The nation of Orangeland has been

pressing territorial claims against the nation of
Blueland for over 5 years. During the past 6 months,
tensions have increased with border skirmishes. Dip-
lomatic and economic efforts failed when Orange-
land’s Northern Operational Group (NOG) crossed the
border and invaded Blueland. The NOG has been suc-
cessful in its initial operations against an uncoor-
dinated Blueland defense. The U.S. began a series of
military deployments in conjunction with renewed
i
UNCLASSIFIED
G-82 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
diplomatic and economic efforts to seek the with-
drawal of Orangeland forces from Blueland. In the
event these actions fail, Joint Task Force-Blueland
(JTF-B) will commence offensive operations to re-
store the sovereignty of Blueland. The other nations
of the region have universally condemned Orange-
land’s invasion of Blueland, and have offered sup-
port to Blueland and the U.S.
(2) (U) Higher Headquarters
(a) (U) JOINT TASK FORCE-BLUELAND (JTF-B)
1 (U) JTF-B Mission. When directed, con-

duct offensive operations within the joint
area of operations (JAO) and defeat Orange-
land forces in order to restore Blueland’s
international borders.
2 (U) JTF-B Commander’s Intent. We will
restore the original Orangeland/Blueland
border by defeating the Orangeland opera-
tional center of gravity (COG), the NOG.
Endstate is Orangeland forces defeated, the
border restored, and JTF-B forces prepared
to conduct offensive operations in Orange-
land to destroy remaining Orangeland offen-
sive military capabilities, if required.
(b) (U) MARINE FORCES-BLUELAND (MARFOR-B)
1 (U) MARFOR-B Mission. On order, as the

main effort, MARFOR-B conducts offensive
operations in zone and defeats Orangeland
forces in order to restore Blueland’s in-
ternational borders. Be prepared to conduct
offensive operations in Orangeland to de-
stroy remaining Orangeland offensive mili-
tary capabilities.
2 (U) MARFOR-B Commander’s Intent. The
purpose of the operation is to restore the
Orangeland/Blueland border. We will conduct
fast-paced offensive operations in order to
defeat the NOG, destroy the NOG’s tactical
COG (its armored brigades), and restore
the borders of Blueland. I will focus the
combat power of the MEF, supported by the
ii
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Marine Logistics Command (MLC), to attack
and defeat the NOG. The endstate is Orange-
land forces within Blueland defeated, the
restoration of the international border,
and MARFOR-B forces prepared to conduct of-
fensive operations in Orangeland to destroy
remaining Orangeland offensive military ca-
pabilities, if required.
b. (U) Legal Considerations. The U.S.-Blueland Status
of Forces Agreement will permit the free deployment of
U.S. forces into Blueland. Accordingly, there are no
legal obstructions to normal military operations with
the usual exception of promulgated rules of engagement
and the existing Law of Armed Conflict.
3. (U) Operations to be Conducted
a. (U) Forces Assigned
(1) (U) 1st Marine Division
(2) (U) 3d Marine Division
(3) (U) 3d Marine Aircraft Wing
(4) (U) 1st Force Service Support Group
(5) (U) 24th Marine Regiment
(6) (U) 3d Naval Construction Regiment (operational

control [OPCON])
b. (U) Deployment. Deployment of MEF forces is pro-

jected to be complete no later than C+35. See Appendix
1 (Time-Phased Force and Deployment List) to Annex A to
MARFOR-B Supporting Plan 0002-14.
c. (U) Employment
(1) (U) Mission. On order, I MEF, as the main ef-

fort, conducts offensive operations in zone and de-
feats enemy forces in order to restore the Blueland
border. Be prepared to continue offensive operations
in Orangeland to destroy remaining Orangeland offen-
sive military capabilities.
iii
UNCLASSIFIED
G-84 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
(2) (U) Commander’s Intent
(a) (U) Purpose. Restore the Blueland border.
(b) (U) Method. Maneuver through existing or

created gaps to bring our combined-arms combat
power to bear against the Orangeland armored
brigades and the artillery regiments.
(c) (U) Endstate. The NOG defeated. Our forces

positioned along the Orangeland/Blueland border
are prepared to continue offensive operations
in Orangeland, if ordered.
(3) (U) Combat Operations. Combat operations will

be conducted in three phases:
(a) (U) Phase I. The MEF forms a special pur-

pose MAGTF-Blueland (SPMAGTF-B) that CHOPs to
Navy Forces-Blueland (NAVFOR-B) to conduct am-
phibious operations in Phase II. The aircraft
wing, as the main effort, attacks NOG artillery
and armor command and control capabilities and
logistic facilities to shape the battlespace
for subsequent offensive operations. It pro-
vides an aviation combat element (ACE) to the
SPMAGTF. Air operations will continue for the
duration of the operation. Two divisions con-
duct security operations, move to attack posi-
tions, and prepare to attack in zone. A
division(-) (Rein) provides a command element
and a regimental landing team (RLT) to the
SPMAGTF, designates one regiment (-) (Rein) as
the MEF reserve, and one infantry battalion as
the MEF tactical combat force (TCF). The force
service support group (FSSG) continues to build
combat power by stockpiling and positioning
supplies and services to support subsequent of-
fensive operations. It provides a combat ser-
vice support element (CSSE) to the SPMAGTF.
Phase I concludes when Orangeland forces are un-
able to coordinate actions between brigades,
mass artillery fires above the battalion level,
and provide ammunition and fuel resupply at the
brigade level.
iv
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(b) (U) Phase II. This phase consists of two
stages:
1 (U) Stage A. A division (Rein), as the

main effort, attacks in zone to form the
western shoulder of the penetration and de-
feats enemy forces north of Gray City. A
division (-) (Rein) attacks in zone to form
the eastern shoulder of the penetration,
fixes enemy forces west of Tealton, and
conducts a link up with Blueland forces in
Tealton. The aircraft wing isolates the MEF
battlespace from enemy reinforcement from
the south, attacks to neutralize the artil-
lery brigades, and disrupts the armored
brigades. The FSSG continues general sup-
port to the MEF and prepares to establish
the seaport of debarkation (SPOD) and/or
airport of debarkation (APOD) in the vicin-
ity of Gray City and forward combat ser-
vice support areas (CSSAs). One infantry
regiment remains the MEF reserve. NAVFOR-B
conducts an amphibious assault in support
of I MEF south of Gray City to fix enemy
forces. The first stage concludes with the
penetration of the enemy defenses, the ar-
tillery brigades neutralized, the armored
brigades disrupted, the main effort located
south of phase line (PL) Black, and the
shift of the MEF forward boundary.
2 (U) Stage B. A division (Rein), as the
main effort, continues the attack to defeat
enemy forces. A division (-) (Rein) con-
ducts a link up with SPMAGTF-B (which then
CHOPs back to I MEF) and consolidates the
area around Gray City. The aircraft wing
continues to isolate the MEF area of opera-
tions from enemy reinforcement and inter-
dicts enemy forces. The FSSG continues
general support to the MEF, on order estab-
lishes a secondary SPOD and/or APOD at Gray
City, and on order establishes forward
CSSAs to support future operations. One in-
fantry regiment remains the MEF reserve. I
I MEF disestablishes SPMAGTF-B after CHOP.
v
UNCLASSIFIED
G-86 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
The second stage, and this phase, concludes
with the defeat of enemy forces in Blueland
and restoration of the Orangeland/Blueland
border.
(c) (U) Phase III. The FSSG, as the main ef-
fort, rearms, refits, and resupplies the MEF for
potential offensive operations in Orangeland.
The aircraft wing pursues enemy forces with-
drawing into Orangeland. A division (Rein), as
the supporting effort, conducts defensive and
security operations in zone and prepares for
possible offensive operations in Orangeland. A
division (-) (Rein) is designated MEF reserve.
The third phase ends with MEF forces prepared
for offensive operations in Orangeland.
(4) (U) Enemy Commander’s Intent. Current assess-

ment of NOG operations indicates that MajGen Dobhan
intends to delay the U.S. advance, inflict the maxi-
mum number of casualties, avoid decisive engagement
with U.S. forces, and stretch out the conflict to
weaken U.S. resolve and terminate the war on Orange-
land’s terms.
d. (U) Supporting Plans. MSCs will prepare supporting

plans.
e. (U) Collateral Plans
(1) (U) Deployment. I MEF Supporting Plan 0001-01

(Operation Sharp Sword).
(2) (U) Redeployment. I MEF Supporting Plan 0003-01

(Operation Sharp Sword).
4. (U) Key Assumptions
a. (U) I MEF forces will not become involved in refugee

operations.
b. (U) The deception plan will confuse the enemy as to

the true location of the MEF’s main effort.
c. (U) Terrorist threat to U.S.-controlled airbases

will not significantly interfere with air operations.
d. (U) Blueland will provide host nation support to

U.S. operations.
vi
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
e. (U) JTF-B will have sea and air superiority in the
joint operations area.
5. (U) Operational Constraints
a. (U) Precision-guided munitions (PGMs) will be used

in the vicinity of Blueland’s religious shrines.
b. (U) The SPOD at Gray City must be able to throughput

500 short tons per day no later than D+15.
c. (U) Provide MEF liaison team to Blueland Self-De-

fense Force in Tealton before link up.
6. (U) Time to Commence Effective Operations
a. (U) Deception Plan. Seven days are required to im-

plement the deception plan in order for Orangeland to
collect and analyze the indicators.
b. (U) Collection of Intelligence. Six days are re-

quired to plan, rehearse, and execute initial stages of
the ground reconnaissance and surveillance plan.
c. (U) Logistics. Five days are required to complete

forward movement of supplies and services.
d. (U) Shaping. Four days of air operations are re-

quired to shape the armored brigades and the artillery
regiments prior to initiation of ground operations.
7. (U) Command Relationships. A SPMAGTF will CHOP to

NAVFOR-B to conduct amphibious operations in support of I I
I MEF.
8. (U) Logistic Appraisal. The plan is logistically sup-

portable. There are certain ammunition constraints, and
the projected expansion of the area of operation to the
Orangeland/Blueland border will stretch the MEF movement
and line haul capabilities. However, these issues have been
addressed, plans have been developed to address them, and
they will be closely monitored. There should be no logisti-
cal culminating point before completion of the three phases
of this plan.
9. (U) Personnel Appraisal. Projected casualty estimates

are acceptable under this plan. An assault against prepared
positions (enemy most dangerous COA) is a matter of con-
cern. However, the concept of operations, deception plan,
vii
UNCLASSIFIED
G-88 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
and shaping actions should reduce the enemy’s flexibility
and force him to adopt his most likely COA.
10. (U) Consolidated Listing and Impact Assessment of

Shortfalls and Limiting Factors
a. (U) Blueland has a limited logistical infrastruc-

ture: lack of port facility stevedores, roads subject
to degradation under heavy usage, shortage of skilled
labor. MARFOR-B has requested additional engineering
personnel and assets to overcome these problems.
b. (U) The MEF does not have adequate psychological

operations or civil affairs assets to control large
numbers of Blueland civilians. The plan mitigates the
problem by avoiding Blueland cities and using Blueland
forces to retake and control large Blueland population
centers. Should Blueland forces be unable to complete
this mission, the MEF will require significant augmen-
tation before accepting the attendant responsibilities.
c. (U) Due to limited PGMs and family of scatterable

mines (FASCAM), Commander, Joint Task Force-Blueland
(CJTF-B) has placed limits on their expenditure. The
plan is designed to force the NOG to move out of its
prepared defensive positions and maneuver to avoid
destruction. This will leave it vulnerable to conven-
tional munitions and should mitigate the shortage of
PGMs.
d. (U) Line haul capability is a concern, but a judi-

cious use of truck and heavy equipment transport as-
sets, as well as amphibious shipping and host nation
support lighterage should overcome the deficiency.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Lieutenant General, USMC
Commanding
OFFICIAL:
s/
M. Jennings
Colonel, USMC
AC/S G-5
viii
UNCLASSIFIED
Example of a Basic Order or Plan
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION SHARP SWORD) (U)

BASIC ORDER (U)
(U) REFERENCES:
(a) Maps and Charts: Series ONC, sheets G-2 (ORANGE-
LAND, BLUELAND), edition 12; G-3 (ORANGELAND, BLUELAND,
1:1,000,000; Series 1501A, sheets NJ 32-10 (GREENTOWN,
BLUELAND), edition 2; NJ 32-11 (JADE CITY, BLUELAND),
edition 2; NJ 32-15 (SPRUCELAND, BLUELAND) 1:250,000.
(b) USCINCPAC Planning Directive, 27 March 2001
(c) USJTF Blueland OPORD 0002-01, 10 April 2001
(d) USJTF Blueland Amphibious Operations Initiating Di-
rective, 10 Apr 2001
(e) MARFOR Blueland OPORD 0004-03, 13 Apr 2001
(f) Joint Pub 0-2, Unified Action Armed Forces (UNAAF)
(g) Joint Pub 1-02, DOD Dictionary of Military and As-
sociated Terms
(h) Joint Pub 1-03, Joint Reporting Structure (JRS)
General Instructions
(i) Joint Pub 3-02, Joint Doctrine for Amphibious Oper-
ations
(j) Joint Pub 5-0, Doctrine for Planning Joint Opera-
tions
(k) MCWP 0-1.1, Componency
(l) MCWP 5-1, Marine Corps Planning Process
(m) I MEF TACSOP, 17 Jan 2000
(U) TIME ZONE: Zulu
(U) TASK ORGANIZATION. Annex A
1. (U) Situation
a. (U) General. With the failure of diplomatic efforts

and deterrence options, Orangeland forces continue to
occupy Blueland. Elements of the Orangeland NOG are lo-
cated north of Gray City. The NOG is in an operational
pause, resupplying and re-equipping its units. Contact
is being maintained with fleeing Blueland forces, but
1
UNCLASSIFIED
G-90 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
the NOG lacks the logistic capability to sustain an ag-
gressive pursuit.
b. (U) Battlespace
(1) (U) Joint Operations Area/Higher Commander’s

Area of Operations. The CJTF-B’s joint area of oper-
ations is a 480 by 325 nautical mile (nm) rectangle,
which includes the entire country of Blueland, the
portion of Orangeland within 125 nm of the Orange-
land/Blueland border, and the air and sea area 50 nm
off the coast of Blueland.
(2) (U) Area of Interest. Enemy forces of concern

include all Orangeland forces to the immediate
south. Of special note is the Orangeland SA-5s lo-
cated within Orangeland but capable of attacking the
MEF aircraft south of Tealton. The terrorist threat
inside Blueland borders as well as the threat to MEF
forces en route to Blueland must be monitored for
force protection. The MEF area of interest (AOI) in-
cludes the CJTF-B’s JAO, that area of Blueland under
the SA-5 umbrella, and the airbases in Europe and
the Pacific through which MEF forces will travel.
(3) (U) Area of Operations. The MEF area of opera-

tion (AO) is a 150 by 90 nm rectangle encompassing
the coastal area between Purpletown and Gray City.
The AO is projected to expand southward to accommo-
date the forward movement of MEF units. To keep the
AO a manageable size, the northern portion of the AO
will be turned over to CJTF-B at the same time.
c. (U) Enemy Forces
(1) (U) Composition, Location, Disposition and

Movements. Annex B (Intelligence) and CJTF-B intel-
ligence summaries (INTSUMs).
(2) (U) Orangeland
(a) (U) Strategic Concept. The nation of Or-

angeland intends to take possession of the Jesa-
ra oil fields through a combination of
diplomatic and military means. On the diplomat-
ic front, Orangeland will attempt to pursue ne-
gotiations in the United Nations and enlist the
aid of its neighbors to support its complaint
2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
against Blueland. Militarily, Orangeland will
secure the approaches to the Jesara oil fields
and attempt to establish an in depth defense of
captured territory. Orangeland believes U.S.
and coalition public support for Operation
Sharp Sword is weak. They also believe an Or-
angeland victory on the battlefield, or an en-
gagement that results in heavy U.S. casualties,
could coalesce antiwar sentiment in the U.S. and
perhaps force withdrawal of CJTF-B from Blue-
land or at least a political settlement.
(b) (U) Orangeland Objectives
1 (U) Consolidation of territorial gains

in Blueland.
2 (U) Capture of the Jesara oilfields and
offshore platforms.
3 (U) Enhancement of Orangeland’s leader-
ship position in the region.
4 (U) Defense of the homeland and preven-
tion of an U.S. invasion of Orangeland.
(c) (U) Operational and Sustainment Capabili-
ties. The Orangeland advance to the Orangeland/
Blueland border has stretched its sustainment
capabilities. However, the Orangeland forces
are continuing to resupply and refit as opera-
tions permit. They are currently capable of at-
tacking with multiple brigades with limited
fixed-wing aircraft and attack helicopters sup-
port.
(d) (U) Orangeland Vulnerabilities. Orange-

land logistic capabilities are severely taxed
by the distances from the present NOG positions
to the supply depots in Orangeland. Lines of
communication (LOCs) between the NOG and Or-
angeland are exposed and susceptible to inter-
diction. See Annex B (Intelligence).
(e) (U) Orangeland Strategic Center of Gravi-

ty. Orangeland’s de facto one-man rule and lack
of formal governmental structure has focused
power in the hands of Field Marshal Chilmand
3
UNCLASSIFIED
G-92 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
Sondo, the leader of Orangeland. There are no
legal political parties. Opposition groups are
for the most part in exile. The Army represents
a latent political bloc inside the country, as
does the Orangeland religious and tribal order
and other tribal groups. Sondo has encouraged
in-fighting among his potential political and
military successors to reduce internal threats
to his power.
(f) (U) Orangeland Operational Center of Grav-

ity. The NOG is the operational COG of Orange-
land forces. It is composed of eight separate
brigades and two artillery regiments. The NOG
has the personal sponsorship of Sondo and is al-
lowed to recruit personnel from the remainder of
Orangeland’s armed forces. As a result, the
quality of personnel and equipment within this
unit is without equal within Orangeland’s armed
forces.
(g) (U) Orangeland Tactical Center of Gravity.

The 102d and 103d Armored Brigades are the tac-
tical centers of gravity (COGs) for the NOG.
These are the best-equipped (only T-72 equipped
units), most effectively led units within the
NOG. In both exercises and in recent operations,
the NOG has used the armored striking force of
these brigades as its counterattack and exploi-
tation force.
(h) (U) Orangeland Courses of Action
1 (U) Most Likely COA. The NOG will attack

to secure the Jesara oil fields. The first
echelon, one armored and three mechanized
infantry brigades supported by an artillery
regiment, will move north and occupy the
Jesara oil fields and the suburban areas of
Tealton to the east, forcing the MEF to
conduct military operations on urban ter-
rain (MOUT). The first echelon will have
too much terrain to cover with too few
forces. The NOG will be challenged to con-
trol the north-south mobility corridors
leading into Tealton and Jesara. The second
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
echelon will establish a hasty line of de-
fense south of Gray City with one armored
and three mechanized infantry brigades,
supported by an artillery regiment. The
second echelon will exploit the coastal
salt marshes, rugged inland mountains, and
narrow coastal plains to funnel MEF forces
into selected chokepoints. Although this
COA exposes the NOG to the prospect of de-
feat in detail, it is attractive because it
seizes the Jesara oil fields and forces the
MEF into a MOUT environment with the poten-
tial of high casualties.
2 (U) Most Dangerous COA. Orangeland forc-
es will establish a deliberate defense
south of Tealton. The first echelon will
establish prepared defenses in depth in the
vicinity of Gray City. By not pressing
north to Jesara and Tealton, the first ech-
elon will be able to spend more time estab-
lishing defensive positions and building
disruptive minefields to block the
restrictive approaches to Gray City. The
NOG will be able to control the mobility
corridors leading to the Gray City choke-
point. The second echelon will consolidate
the coastal regions and secure the LOCs
southward toward the border. Supply lines
will be shorter, and defenses will be bet-
ter prepared. The NOG would have a greater
chance of holding onto its territorial
gains while inflicting high U.S. casual-
ties.
d. (U) Friendly Forces
(1) (U) Higher
(a) (U) JOINT TASK FORCE-BLUELAND (JTF-B)
1 (U) JTF-B Mission. When directed, con-

duct offensive operations within the JAO
and defeat Orangeland forces in order to
restore Blueland’s international borders.
5
UNCLASSIFIED
G-94 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
2 (U) JTF-B Commander’s Intent. We will
restore the original Orangeland/Blueland
border by defeating the Orangeland opera-
tional COG, the NOG. Endstate is Orangeland
forces defeated, the border restored, and
JTF-B forces prepared to conduct offensive
operations in Orangeland to destroy remain-
ing Orangeland offensive military capabili-
ties, if required.
(b) (U) MARINE FORCES-BLUELAND (MARFOR-B)
1 (U) MARFOR-B Mission. On order, as the

main effort, MARFOR-B conducts offensive
operations in zone and defeats Orangeland
forces in order to restore Blueland’s in-
ternational borders. Be prepared to conduct
offensive operations in Orangeland to de-
stroy remaining Orangeland offensive mili-
tary capabilities.
2 (U) MARFOR-B’s Commander’s Intent. The
purpose of the operation is to restore the
Orangeland/Blueland border. We will conduct
fast-paced offensive operations in order to
defeat the NOG, destroy the NOG’s tactical
COG (the 102d and 103 d Armored Brigades),
and restore the borders of Blueland. I will
focus the combat power of the MEF, support-
ed by the MLC, to attack and defeat the
NOG. The endstate is Orangeland forces
within Blueland defeated, the restoration
of the international border, and MARFOR-B
forces prepared to conduct offensive opera-
tions in Orangeland to destroy remaining
Orangeland offensive military capabilities,
if required.
(2) (U) Adjacent
(a) (U) ARMY FORCES-BLUELAND (ARFOR-B) (3 d

ARMY). On order, conduct operations to defeat
enemy forces in zone in order to restore the
Blueland border, guard the western avenues of
approach into Blueland, and be prepared to con-
tinue operations into Orangeland.
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(b) (U) NAVAL FORCES-BLUELAND (NAVFOR-B) (7 th
FLEET). Maintain sea superiority within the
JAO. On order, conduct amphibious operations in
support of the main effort to fix and isolate
Orangeland forces in eastern Blueland. Conduct
air operations as directed to include recon-
naissance and surveillance flights. Provide na-
val surface fire support (NSFS) as directed.
Continue to support Joint Special Operations
Task Force-Blueland (JSOTF-B) as directed. When
directed, CHOP SPMAGTF to MARFOR-B.
(c) (U) AIR FORCE FORCES (AFFOR-B) (7 th AIR

FORCE). Maintain air superiority within the
JAO. Continue the conduct of offensive air oper-
ations to disrupt, delay, and defeat Orangeland
forces in the JAO. Designated as joint force air
component commander (JFACC) to control execu-
tion of joint air operations as specified by
CJTF-B and coordinate JAO with operations of
other component commanders. Also designated ar-
ea air defense commander (AADC) and airspace
control authority (ACA).
(d) (U) JOINT SPECIAL OPERATIONS TASK FORCE-

BLUELAND (JSOTF-B). Conduct special reconnais-
sance and direct action missions in support of
JTF-B operations in the JAO.
(e) (U) BLUELAND SELF-DEFENSE FORCES (BSDF).

Conduct defensive operations and provide inter-
nal security for critical facilities and LOCs.
Provide host nation support for JTF-B. BSDF
311th Brigade defends Tealton and conducts a
linkup with 3 d Marine Division (MARDIV) (-)
(Rein).
(3) (U) Supporting. The MLC provides logistic sup-

port via prepositioned supplies, host nation sup-
port, and theater resupply. Priority of support is
the MEF.
(4) (U) Friendly COGs. The MEF’s COG is the 3d

Marine Aircraft Wing (MAW). Associated critical
vulnerabilities are its command and control, combat
service support capabilities (fuel, ammunition, and
long-haul assets), and airfields required for
7
UNCLASSIFIED
G-96 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
combined-arms operations. The defense of these crit-
ical vulnerabilities must drive the force protection
effort.
(5) (U) Attachments and Detachments. None.
(6) (U) Legal Considerations. U.S.-Blueland Status

of Forces Agreement of 1 April 2001.
2. (U) Mission. On order, I MEF, as the main effort, con-

ducts offensive operations in zone and defeats enemy forces
in order to restore the Blueland border. Be prepared to
continue offensive operations into Orangeland to destroy
remaining Orangeland offensive military capabilities.
3. (U) Execution
a. (U) Commander’s Intent
(1) (U) Purpose. Restore the Blueland border.
(2) (U) Method. Maneuver through existing or creat-

ed gaps to bring our combined-arms combat power to
bear against the Orangeland 102d and 103 d Armored
Brigades and the 401 st and 402d Artillery Regiments.
(3) (U) Endstate. The NOG defeated. Our forces po-

sitioned along the Orangeland/Blueland border pre-
pared to continue offensive operations in
Orangeland, if directed.
b. (U) Concept of Operations. This operation will be

conducted in three phases.
(1) (U) Phase I. I MEF forms SPMAGTF-B CJTF-B di-

rects I MEF to CHOP SPMAGTF-B to NAVFOR-B to conduct
amphibious operations in Phase II. The 3 d MAW, as
the main effort, attacks NOG artillery, armor,
command and control, and logistic facilities to
shape the battlespace for subsequent offensive
operations. It provides an ACE to SPMAGTF-B. The
1st and 3d MARDIVs conduct security operations, oc-
cupy attack positions, and prepare to attack in
zone. The 3 d MARDIV provides a command element and a
RLT to SPMAGTF-B, designates a second regiment (-)
(Rein) as the MEF reserve, and provides one infantry
battalion as the MEF TCF. The 1st FSSG provides com-
bat service support to the MEF and continues to
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
build combat power by stockpiling and positioning
supplies and services to support subsequent offen-
sive operations. It provides mobile combat service
support detachments (CSSDs) to 1st and 3d MARDIVs and
a CSSE to SPMAGTF-B. Phase I concludes when Orange-
land forces are unable to coordinate actions between
brigades, mass artillery fires above the battalion
level, and provide ammunition and fuel resupply at
the brigade level.
(2) (U) Phase II
(a) (U) Stage A. The 1st MARDIV, as the main

effort, attacks in zone to form the western
shoulder of the penetration and defeats enemy
forces north of Gray City. The 3d MARDIV attacks
in zone to form the eastern shoulder of the pen-
etration, fixes enemy forces west of Tealton,
and conducts a link up with Blueland forces in
Tealton. The 3 d MAW isolates the MEF battlespace
from enemy reinforcement from the south, at-
tacks to neutralize the 401 st and 402d Artillery
Brigades, and disrupt the 102d and 103d Armored
Brigades. The 1st FSSG continues general sup-
port to the MEF and prepares to establish SPOD
and/or APOD in vicinity of Gray City and forward
combat service support areas (CSSAs). One in-
fantry regiment remains the MEF reserve. NAV-
FOR-B conducts an amphibious assault in support
of I MEF south of Gray City to fix enemy forces.
The first stage concludes with the penetration
of the enemy defenses, the 401 st and 402 d Artil-
lery Brigades neutralized, the 102d and 103d Ar-
mored Brigades disrupted, the main effort south
of PL Black, and the shift of the MEF forward
boundary.
(b) (U) Stage B. The 1st MARDIV, as the main

effort, continues the attack to defeat enemy
forces. The 3 d MARDIV conducts a link up with
SPMAGTF-B (which then CHOPs back to I MEF) and
consolidates the area around Gray City. The 3d
3d MAW continues to isolate the MEF area of op-
eration from enemy reinforcement and interdicts
enemy forces. The 1st FSSG continues general
support to the MEF, on order establishes a
9
UNCLASSIFIED
G-98 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
secondary SPOD and/or APOD at Gray City, and on
order establishes forward CSSAs to support fu-
ture operations. One infantry regiment remains
the MEF reserve. The I MEF disestablishes
SPMAGTF-B after CHOP. The second stage, and this
phase, concludes with the defeat of enemy forces
in Blueland and restoration of the Orangeland/
Blueland border.
(3) (U) Phase III. The 1st FSSG, as the main effort,
rearms, refits, and resupplies the MEF for potential
offensive operations in Orangeland. The 3 d MAW
conducts a pursuit of retreating Orangeland forces.
The 1st MARDIV conducts defensive operations at the
border and prepares for possible offensive opera-
tions into Orangeland. The 3d MARDIV becomes the MEF
reserve. The third phase concludes with MEF forces
prepared for offensive operations in Orangeland.
c. (U) Tasks
(1) (U) 1st MARINE DIVISION (REIN)
(a) (U) Phase I
1 (U) Conduct security operations in zone

in order to deny the enemy’s ability to
conduct reconnaissance operations.
2 (U) Occupy attack positions NLT D-2.
3 (U) Prepare to attack in zone.
(b) (U) Phase II (Main Effort)
1 (U) Stage A. Attack in zone in order to

penetrate and defeat enemy forces north of
Gray City.
2 (U) Stage B
a (U) Continue the attack in zone in or-
der to defeat the Orangeland 102 d and
103d Armored Brigades.
b (U) On order, defeat remaining enemy
forces in zone in order to restore the
Blueland border.
10
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(c) (U) Phase III
1 (U) Conduct defensive and security oper-

ations in zone along the Blueland border.
2 (U) Rearm and refit forces.
3 (U) Be prepared to conduct offensive op-
erations into Orangeland in order to de-
stroy remaining Orangeland offensive
military capabilities.
d
(2) (U) 3 MARINE DIVISION (-) (REIN)
(a) (U) Phase I
1 Conduct security operations in zone in

order to deny the enemy’s ability to con-
duct reconnaissance operations.
2 (U) Occupy attack positions NLT D-2.
3 (U) Prepare to attack in zone.
4 (U) Provide the assistant division com-
mander as Commander, SPMAGTF-B.
5 (U) Provide command element for SPMAGTF-
B.
6 (U) Provide one RLT to SPMAGTF-B as the
ground combat element (GCE).
7 (U) Designate one infantry regiment (-)
(rein) as MEF reserve for phases I and II.
8 (U) Designate one infantry battalion
(rein) as MEF TCF for the duration of the
operation.
(b) (U) Phase II
1 (U) Stage A
a (U) As supporting effort, attack in
zone in order to form the eastern shoul-
der of the penetration and fix enemy
forces.
b (U) Conduct link up with Blueland
forces in Tealton in order to prevent
the enemy from isolating the city.
11
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-100 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
2 (U) Stage B
a (U) Conduct link up with SPMAGTF-B.
b (U) Reassume command of command ele-
ment and RLT upon CHOP of SPMAGTF-B
from NAVFOR-B.
c (U) Consolidate the area vicinity of
Gray City.
(c) (U) Phase III
1 (U) Assume the mission as MEF reserve.

erations into Orangeland in order to de-
stroy remaining Orangeland offensive
military capabilities.
(3) (U) 3d MARINE AIRCRAFT WING
(a) (U) Phase I (Main Effort)
1 (U) Attack the command and control capa-

bilities and logistic facilities of the
102d and 103 d Armored Brigades in order to
reduce their ability to coordinate actions
between the brigades and to provide ammuni-
tion and fuel resupply.
2 (U) Attack the command and control capa-
bilities and logistic facilities of the
401st and 402d Artillery Regiments in order
to reduce their ability to mass fires above
the battalion level and provide ammunition
and fuel resupply
3 (U) Gain and maintain air superiority
within the MEF AO.
4 (U) Provide an ACE to the SPMAGTF-B.
5 (U) Operate and maintain the airfield at
Greentown for the duration of the opera-
tion.
6 (U) Assume responsibilities as sector
anti-air warfare coordinator in the MEF AO.
12
UNCLASSIFIED
Marine Corps Planning Process _____________________________________________________________________________ G-101
UNCLASSIFIED
7 (U) Be prepared to provide close air
support (CAS) and assault support to the
MEF reserve for the duration of the opera-
tion.
8 (U) Be prepared to provide CAS and as-
sault support to the MEF Rear Area Command-
er for the duration of the operation.
(b) (U) Phase II
1 (U) Stage A
a (U) Isolate the MEF AO in order to
prevent enemy reinforcement from Orange-
land.
b (U) Interdict enemy forces south of PL
Black in order to prevent enemy rein-
forcement in the south.
c (U) Be prepared to provide CAS and as-
sault support to NAVFOR-B in order to
support SPMAGTF-B.
2 (U) Stage B
a (U) Continue to isolate the MEF AO in
order to prevent enemy reinforcement
from Orangeland.
b (U)Be prepared to assume follow and
support force to the main effort in or-
der to defeat bypassed units and secure
LOCs.
c (U) Continue to interdict enemy south
of PL Black in order to prevent enemy
reinforcement in the south.
d (U) Reassume command of the ACE upon
CHOP of SPMAGTF-B from NAVFOR-B.
(c) (U) Phase III
1 (U) Provide assault support to the 1 st

FSSG (main effort) in order to assist in
movement of supplies and services forward.
13
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-102 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
2 (U) Pursue enemy forces withdrawing to
Orangeland in order to secure the Blueland
border.
erations into Orangeland.
(4) (U) 1st FORCE SERVICE SUPPORT GROUP (-) (REIN)
(a) (U) Phase I
1 (U) Provide combat service support to

the MEF for the duration of the operation.
2 (U) Provide mobile CSSDs to support 1st
and 3d MARDIVs for the duration of the op-
eration.
3 (U) Provide a CSSE to SPMAGTF-B.
4 (U) Provide a CSSE in order to support
security operations, to include the TCF, in
the MEF rear area.
5 (U) Coordinate with MLC in order to en-
sure required support is provided for the
duration of the operation.
(b) (U) Phase II
1 (U) Stage A
a (U) Prepare to establish SPOD and/or
APOD at Gray City.
b (U) Prepare to establish forward CSSAs
in order to support operations.
2 (U) Stage B
a (U) On order, establish a secondary
SPOD and/or APOD at Gray City.
b (U) On order, establish forward CSSAs
in order to support operations.
c (U) Reassume command of the CSSE upon
CHOP of SPMAGTF-B from NAVFOR-B.
14
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(c) (U) Phase III (Main Effort)
1 (U) Rearm, refit, and resupply the MEF

to conduct potential offensive operations
in Orangeland.
2 (U) Establish CSSAs in vicinity of the
Blueland/Orangeland border in order to sup-
port potential offensive operations in Or-
angeland.
(5) (U) SPMAGTF-B
(a) (U) Phase I
1 (U) Receive forces from 3 d MARDIV, 3d 33

3d MAW, and 1st FSSG.
2 (U) On order CHOP to NAVFOR-B in order
to conduct amphibious operations in support
of I MEF.
(b) (U) Phase II, Stage B
1 (U) On order, CHOP to MARFOR-B.

2 (U) On order, disestablish SPMAGTF-B.
(6) (U) REAR AREA COMMANDER. (All phases.)
(a) (U) Establish a rear area command post

(RACP).
(b) (U) Coordinate security of facilities

within the rear area.
(c) (U) Coordinate host nation security forces

in order to provide security for main supply
routes, LOCs, and critical infrastructure in
zone.
(d) (U) Conduct area management in the MEF

rear area.
(e) (U) Conduct movement control in the MEF

rear area in conjunction with 1st FSSG.
(f) (U) Assume OPCON of TCF.
(g) (U) Coordinate with MSCs for support of

the TCF.
15
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-104 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
(h) (U) Coordinate turnover of rear area with
MARFOR-B.
d. (U) MEF RESERVE
(1) (U) Phase I (Infantry Regiment [-] [Rein]). Be

prepared to conduct counterattack operations and
support the rear area commander.
(2) (U) Phase II (Infantry Regiment [-] [Rein]). Be

prepared to conduct operations in order to exploit
success of main effort.
(3) (U) Phase III (3 d MARINE DIVISION [-] [Rein]).

Be prepared to conduct offensive operations in Or-
angeland.
e. (U) Commander’s Critical Information Requirements
(1) (U) Where are the exploitable gaps in Orange-

land’s first echelon through which the MEF can ma-
neuver?
(2) (U) When will I have enough logistic capability

to support a two-division attack to the Orangeland/
Blueland border without an operational pause?
(3) (U) Are there indications that the enemy first

echelon is withdrawing toward Gray City prior to D-
Day?
(4) (U) Any indications of increased terrorist ac-

tivity in our rear area?
(5) (U) What is the trafficability of the terrain

west of Tealton for armored vehicles?
f. (U) Coordinating Instructions
(1) (U) D-Day, H-Hour. On order.
(2) (U) Geographic Description of the Operations

Area. See Annex C (Operations).
(3) (U) Rules of Engagement. Appendix 6 to Annex C

(Operations).
(4) (U) Fire Support Coordinating Measures. See Ap-

pendix 19 to Annex C (Operations).
16
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(5) (U) Direct Liaison Authorized. Direct liaison
authorized (DIRLAUTH) with supporting commands is
authorized.
(6) (U) Mission-Oriented Protective Posture. Mis-

sion-oriented protective posture (MOPP) level: 0.
(7) (U) Enemy Prisoners of War, Civilian Internees,

and Other Detained Persons. MSC commanders are re-
sponsible for handling enemy prisoners of war
(EPWs), detainees, displaced persons, refugees, and
evacuees in their area of operations prior to re-
lease to 1st FSSG. The FSSG will then hand over EPWs,
detainees, and displaced persons, refugees, and
evacuees to the MLC for further processing. See Ap-
pendix 1 to Annex E (Personnel).
(8) (U) Information Warfare. See Appendix 3 to An-

nex C (Operations).
(9) (U) Evasion & Recovery Operations. See Appen-

dixes 5 and 11 to Annex C (Operations).
(10) (U) Changes. Submit recommended changes to pub-

lished maneuver control and fire support coordinat-
ing measures to this headquarters (G-3).
(11) (U) Host Nation Support and Infrastructure De-

velopment. Host nation support and infrastructure
development will be coordinated by the MLC.
(12) (U) Measures of Effectiveness
(a) (U) The 102d and 103d Armored Brigades are

defeated. Measure of effectiveness (MOE) as-
sessment criteria: cannot coordinate defensive
and/or counterattack operations above battalion
level.
(b) (U) The 401st and 402d Artillery Regiments

neutralized. MOE assessment criteria: cannot
mass fire above battalion level; destroyed
155mm howitzer capability.
a. (U) Personnel. MSC commanders are responsible for

implementing internal force reconstitution; morale,
welfare, and recreation; postal; administration;
17
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-106 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
disbursing; and ecclesiastical programs. See Annex E
(Personnel).
b. (U) Logistics. See Annex D (Logistics/Combat Ser-

vice Support).
(1) (U) Logistics in the JAO is primarily an indi-

vidual Service responsibility. CJTF-B has estab-
lished common, cross-Service, and joint servicing
agreements that provide economies and efficiencies
in certain functional logistic areas that alters the
individual Service’s logistic concept. The MLC will
provide logistic support via prepositioned supplies,
host nation supply, and theater resupply.
(2) (U) (U) MARFOR-B will participate in joint

boards, offices, and centers that facilitate logis-
tic resource prioritization and allocation decision-
making. MSCs provide requirements to the MEF G-4 as
input to MARFOR-B for the following boards:
(a) (U) Theater Sub-Area Petroleum Office.
(b) (U) Joint Civil Military Engineer Board.
(a) (U) Joint Facilities/Installation Utiliza-

tion Board.
(b) (U) Joint Medical Regulating Office.
(c) (U) Joint Mortuary Affairs Office.
(d) (U) Joint Blood Program Office.
(3) (U) Coordinate with MEF G-4 for host nation sup-
port in the following areas:
(a) (U) Line haul and bulk liquid transporta-

tion.
(b) (U) Water supply.
(c) (U) Port and terminal support and servic-

es.
(d) (U) Materiel handling equipment.
18
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
c. (U) Public Affairs. See Annex F (Public Affairs).
d. (U) Civil Affairs. MSC commanders will be thorough-

ly familiar with the applicable provisions of interna-
tional law, treaties, and agreements as they relate to
Blueland and neighboring countries. The MEF civil af-
fairs activities will be governed by CJTF-B policies
regarding noncombatant evacuation, use of indigenous
labor, and coordination with local civil law enforce-
ment organizations. See Annex G (Civil Affairs).
e. (U) Meteorological and Oceanographic Services. See

Annex H (Meterological and Oceanographic Operations).
f. (U) Geospatial Information and Services. Geospatial

information and services and products will be ordered
and delivered in accordance with the procedures con-
tained in Annex M (Geospatial Information and Servic-
es).
g. (U) Medical Services. Echelons I and II of health

service support are provided in the MEF area of opera-
tion with additional support provided by the amphibious
ships, the U.S.S. Mercy, and the fleet hospital located
in the communications zone. All MEF casualties, both
battle and nonbattle, who are not expected to return to
full duty within 7 days of wounding or onset of ill-
ness, will be evacuated from theater via U.S. Air Force
airlift.
a. (U) Command Relationships. Annex J (Command Rela-

tionships).
b. (U) Command Posts and Headquarters
(1) (U) USCINCPAC, Camp H. M. Smith, HI.
(2) (U) JTF-B: Purpletown (NJ 32-14/525390), Blue-

land.
(3) (U) ARFOR-B: Jade City (NJ 32-11/498441), Blue-

land.
(4) (U) NAVFOR-B: LCC-20, Afloat.
(5) (U) AFFOR-B: Purpletown (NJ 32-14/525390),

Blueland.
19
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-108 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
(6) (U) MARFOR-B: Greentown (NI 32-10/566281),
Blueland.
(7) (U) JSOTF-B: Purpletown (NJ 32-14/525390),

Blueland.
(8) (U) CG, I MEF (Main): Greentown (NI 32-10/

596276), Blueland. I MEF (Forward): in trace of main
effort.
(9) (U) CG, 1st MARDIV: Brownburg (NI 32-11/543968),

Blueland.
(10) (U) CG, 3d MARDIV: Greentown (NI 32-10/566281),

Blueland.
(11) (U) CG, 3d MAW: Silverton (NI 32-10/560781),

Blueland.
(12) (U) CG, 1st FSSG: Golden Bay (NI 32-10/576981),

Blueland.
(13) (U) Rear Area Commander: Golden Heights (NI 32-

10/573987), Blueland.
c. (U) Succession to Command
(1) (U) DCG, I MEF.
(2) (U) CG, 3d MAW 1.
(3) (U) CG, 1st MARDIV.
(4) (U) CG, 3d FSSG.
(5) (U) CG, 3d MARDIV.
d. (U) Signal. CJTF-B will provide local telephone,

data, and teletype switching at Headquarters, JTF-B.
CJTF-B will also provide HF and UHF single-channel
voice satellite and SHF multichannel satellite telecom-
munications links among JTF-B and joint task force com-
ponents utilizing existing communications means and
Joint Communications Support Element (JCSE) assets
while deployed to theater. The MSCs and supporting com-
mands are responsible for all internal communications.
Communication, operations, and intelligence liaison of-
ficers will be exchanged with CJTF-B. Air messenger
service will be available on request from AFFOR-B. All
20
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
major subordinate commands will use tactical combat op-
erations (TCO) systems to facilitate dissemination of
information.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
ANNEXES:
A – Task Organization
B – Intelligence
C – Operations
D – Logistics/Combat Service Support
E - Personnel (TBI)
F - Public Affairs
G – Civil Affairs
H – Meteorological and Oceanographic Operations (TBI)
J – Command Relationships
K – Combat Information Systems
L – Environmental Considerations
M – Geospatial Information and Services
N – Space Operations (Omitted)
P – Host Nation Support
Q – Medical Services
S – Special Technical Operations (Omitted)
U – Information Management
W – Aviation Operations
x – Execution Checklist
Z – Distribution
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Colonel, USMC
AC/S G-3
21
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-110 MCWP 5-1

Example of Annex A (Task Organization
UNCLASSIFIED
Annex A
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
ANNEX A TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION SHARP SWORD)

(U)
TASK ORGANIZATION (U)
(U) REFERENCES:None
(U) TIME ZONE: Zulu
(All attachments effective 170001Z Apr 2001)
I MARINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE LtGen THOMAS
HqSvc Bn, I MEF
Command Element, I MEF
Headquarters Group, I MEF
7th Comm Bn (-), I MEF
1st Intel and EW Bn (-), I MEF
1st Intelligence Bn, I MEF
1st Radio Bn (-), I MEF
1st Force Reconnaissance Co (-), I MEF
Det, 3 d Civil Affairs Group, MARFORRES
1st MARINE DIVISION (REIN) MajGen VANDEGRIFT
Headquarters Battalion (-)
1st Marine Regiment
5th Marine Regiment
7th Marine Regiment
11th Marine Regiment (rein)
1st Tank Battalion
4th Tank Battalion (-)
1st Light Armored Reconnaissance Battalion
3d Light Armored Reconnaissance Battalion (-)
3d Assault Amphibian Battalion (-) 1st Combat
Engineer Battalion
1st Reconnaissance Battalion
3d MARINE DIVISION (-) (REIN) BGen HENDERSON
Headquarters Battalion (-)
3d Marine Regiment
4th Marine Regiment
A-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-112 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
th
24 Marine Regiment
12th Marine Regiment (-)
8th Tank Battalion (-)
4th Light Armored Reconnaissance Battalion (-)
4th Assault Amphibian Battalion (-)
1st Combat Assault Battalion
3d MARINE AIRCRAFT WING MajGen GEIGER
MWHS-3
MAG-11
MALS-11
VMFA-232
VMFA-314
VMFA-323
VMGR-352
VMFA(AW)-121
VMFA(AW)-242
VMFA(AW)-225
MAG-12
MALS-12
VMA-231
VMFA-212
VMFA-251
VMFA(AW)-332
VMAQ-1
MAG-13
MALS-13
VMA-211
VMA-214
VMA-311
VMA-513
VMU-1
MAG-16
MALS-16
HMM-161
HMM-163
HMM-164
HMH-361
HMH-462
HMH-465
HMH-466
MAG-39
MALS-39
HMLA-169
HMLA-267
A-2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
HMLA-367
Annex A
HMLA-369
HMM-165
HMM-166
HMM-268
HMM-364
MACG-38
3d LAAD
MACS-1
MASS-3
MWCS-38
MTACS-38
MWSG-37
MWSS-371
MWSS-372
MWSS-373
MWSS-374
1st FORCE SERVICE SUPPORT GROUP (-) (REIN) BGen PATE
H&S Battalion (-)
1st Maintenance Battalion (-)
1st Medical Services Battalion (-)
1st Dental Battalion
1st Supply Battalion (-)
9th Engineer Support Battalion (-) (Rein)
7th Engineer Support Battalion (-) (Rein)
3d Naval Construction Regiment (OPCON)
MEF RESERVE TBD
SPECIAL PURPOSE MAGTF-B BGen Carlson
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
BY COMMAND OF LIEUTENANT GENERAL THOMAS
EDWARD SNEDECKER
Brigadier General, USMC
Deputy Commander
A-3
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-114 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
APPENDIXES:
1 –
Time-Phased Force and Deployment List (Omitted)
2 –
Shortfall Identification
3 –
Force Module Identification (Omitted)
4 –
Deterrent Options (Not used in Marine Corps plans or
orders. Included to conform with CJCSM 3122.03.)
5 – Reserve Component Requirements Summary (TBI)
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Colonel, USMC
AC/S G-3
A-4
UNCLASSIFIED
Example of Annex B (Intelligence)
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
ANNEX B TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION
Annex B
SHARP SWORD) (U)
INTELLIGENCE (U)
(U) REFERENCES:
(a) CJTF-Blueland OPORD 0002-01, 10 April
(b) MARFOR Blueland OPORD 0004-03, 13 Apr 2001
(c) Maps and Charts: Series ONC, sheets G-2 (ORANGE-
LAND,BLUELAND), edition 12; G-3 (ORANGELAND, BLUELAND),
1:1,000,000; Series 1501A, sheets NJ 32-10 (GREENTOWN,
BLUELAND), edition 2; NJ 32-11 (JADE CITY, BLUELAND),
edition 2; NJ 32-15 (PURPLETOWN, BLUELAND) 1:250,000.
(d) Joint Pub 2-0, Joint Doctrine for Intelligence Sup-
port to Operations
(e) Joint Pub 2-01, Joint Intelligence Support to Mili-
tary Operations
(f) Joint Pub 2-02, National Intelligence Support to
Joint Operations
(g) MCDP 2, Intelligence
(h) MCWP 2-1, Intelligence Operations
(i) FM 34-130/MCRP 2-12A, Intelligence Preparation of
the Battlefield
(j) I MEF Intelligence Standing Operating Procedures
(U) TIME ZONE: Zulu
1. (U) Situation
a. (U) Characteristics of the Area of Operations. See

reference (a).
b. (U) Hydrographic, Amphibious, Topographic, and

Weather
(1) (U) Terrain. With a total land area of 63,378

square miles (about the size of Missouri or Flori-
da), Blueland is the smallest of the countries in
the region. It is bounded by Orangeland on the
B-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-116 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
southeast, Berinab on the south, and the Westphala
Sea on the north and east. Topographically, three
mountain ranges dominate Blueland, all eastern ex-
tensions of the Moarbak Chain. The Longara Mountain
Range divides Blueland into a well-watered north and
semiarid south. The northern zone has three subre-
gions: the northwest, with extensive forests; the
north central, with extensive grasslands; and the
northeast (from Cohanab to Cape Donakan), which
boasts of extensive livestock, citrus groves, and
produce. South of these areas is the central plateau
region of Jesara and the oil fields. Moving farther
south towards Beydlek, the land becomes increasingly
arid, with date palm oases and salt marshes (the
largest stretches almost the full width of the coun-
try west of Gray City). At the southern extreme of
Blueland, this arid area merges into the Greater Ho-
betab Desert. During the period covered by this op-
eration plan, it is anticipated that these salt
marshes will be flooded and impassable.
(2) (U) Weather. Except for the coastal strip,

Blueland has a desert climate characterized by lit-
tle cloudiness, light and irregular precipitation,
and very high summer temperatures (June through Au-
gust). The coastal strip has a moderate climate with
mild, cloudy, wet winters (early December through
February) and hot, dry summers. Mean annual precipi-
tation ranges from 60 inches on the northwestern
coastal slopes to less than 4 inches in the central
southern desert sections. Most rainfall occurs from
October through March. The annual frequency of thun-
derstorms is low, the maximum being about 20 days
per year in the coastal and mountain regions. Tem-
peratures range from 38 degrees Fahrenheit to above
100 degrees Fahrenheit in the interior. Two phenome-
na common to Blueland are the sirocco (a persistent,
oppressively hot, dry, dust-laden wind that blows
northward from the southern desert in the summer)
and sandstorms (which may occur during the dry sea-
son). During the dry season, clouds of dust raised
by vehicles will increase detection capabilities in
the desert regions. In the north, during the wet
season, flooding and the exceptionally soft mud will
hinder movement and resupply.
B-2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
c. (U) Estimate of Enemy Capabilities
(1) (U) Situation. The NOG is currently in an oper-

ational pause while it resupplies and re-equips its
units. The resupply process is anticipated to take 2
to 4 days due to lack of transportation assets. It
appears that elements of the 102 d Armored Brigade
and the 202d Mechanized Brigade are pursuing the
Blueland 311th Brigade as it withdraws toward Teal-
Annex B
ton. Contact is being maintained, but apparently the
NOG lacks the logistics to maintain an aggressive
pursuit. All Orangeland and Blueland minefields and
barriers established prior to and during the battle
of Gray City appear to have been cleared and no
longer present an obstacle to movement. Although not
detected, a reconnaissance screen can be assumed to
be out even farther to the north-northeast of Teal-
ton. Other NOG brigades have crossed the Orangeland
border and have now assumed control of the region
south of Gray City.
(2) (U) Capabilities. The Orangeland NOG remains

capable of conducting multiple brigade operations.
They are also capable of occupying and defending the
Jesara oil fields with four brigades supported with
an artillery regiment within 24 hours. They can also
withdraw, but would experience problems due to the
restrictive nature of the LOCs. The NOG also has the
capability to reinforce its leading brigades within
48 hours with four additional brigades or can defend
along the coastal highway. Although Orangeland does
not have the capability to gain or maintain air su-
periority, it can conduct limited air attacks and
possible missile strikes in support of NOG opera-
tions. If lucrative coalition targets are located by
Orangeland forces, their high performance aircraft
may attack coalition targets. THREAT LEVEL 2 will
continue to be in effect since terrorist activity
against U.S. bases and rear areas in Blueland is
likely. Activities have been detected that indicate
Orangeland is conducting operational training in a
chemical environment—the possibility exists that Or-
angeland will use chemical weapons to defend the
continued existence of the regime. Other Orangeland
forces continue to be located in the vicinity of the
eastern border with Cheryan. Due to ongoing tensions
B-3
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-118 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
with the Cheryan government, Orangeland forces are
not expected to be committed elsewhere.
(3) (U) Vulnerabilities
(a) (U) Transportation and Logistics. The

scarcity and uneven distribution of transporta-
tion facilities and routes in southern Blueland
will restrict avenues of attack. While overland
travel is feasible, increased maintenance prob-
lems for his mechanized forces due to the rough
terrain and greatly reduced movement rates will
necessitate use of the road system whenever pos-
sible. Existing logistical support capabilities
severely limit the enemy’s ability to extend op-
erations.
(b) (U) Leadership. Orangeland’s de facto one-

man rule and lack of formal governmental struc-
ture has isolated its leadership making it vul-
nerable to dislocation. There is also a possible
vulnerability inherent in the conflicting val-
ues of the leadership and large sections of the
population that could be exploited.
(c) (U) Economy. Orangeland’s total dependence

upon the oil industry and lack of an indigenous
arms industry makes it particularly vulnerable
to a strategic attack or embargo.
(d) (U) Air Force. The competence of Orange-

land pilots is considered to be fair; however,
they are not known to fly at night or during in-
strument meteorological conditions. These more
challenging missions are often flown by con-
tract, foreign national pilots. Orangeland has
a relatively unsophisticated integrated air
defense system (IADS), centering on a single,
SA-5 system located in the capital. Maintenance
personnel often lack the technical skills nec-
essary to maintain sophisticated air and air de-
fense systems. Their air force formerly relied
upon Eastern European technicians for mainte-
nance and technical assistance. The current
availability of these expatriates is unknown.
B-4
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(e) (U) Land Force. Orangeland army groups are
vulnerable to air attack because they lack a
robust air defense capability. Each group has
an air defense brigade with one SA-6 battalion
(used to protect group headquarters, the artil-
lery regiments, and logistic sites) and two bat-
talions of antiaircraft artillery of varying
caliber. These assets, while adequate when the
NOG attacked Blueland, will not suffice against
Annex B
the modern air threat posed by the MEF.
(f) (U) Command and Control. Command and con-

trol limitations and lack of training degrade
the enemy’s ability to smoothly execute com-
bined-arms operations. The inferiority of Or-
angeland’s training reduces the effectiveness
of their more sophisticated weapons systems.
(g) (U) Navy. The competence of the Orangeland

navy is considered to be good; however, they are
littoral in nature and unlikely to venture out-
side their antilanding and IADS envelopes. They
present a formidable mining and cruise missile
threat to amphibious and naval gunfire (NGF)
ships operating within 50 nm of the coast.
(4) (U) Military Personalities
(a) (U) Field Marshal Chilmand A. Sondo. Field

Marshal Sondo, the revolutionary leader, exer-
cises all power through the General People’s
Congress (GPC). The GPC members are elected by
local Popular committees. However, only candi-
dates approved by the Revolutionary committees
can run for election. The Revolutionary commit-
tees are in turn controlled by the general sec-
retariat, which is personally run by Sondo.
(b) (U) Major General Arey R. Dobhan. MajGen

Dobhan is an aggressive, brilliant, and confi-
dent commander. He received his undergraduate
education in the United States and attended all
levels of military schools within the former
Soviet Union. Thus far, his leadership of the
NOG has been flawless. During military opera-
tions, he has displayed his flair for surprise,
innovation, and aggressiveness. Dobhan is the
B-5
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-120 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
key operational commander in the Orangeland
Armed Forces and is, by far, the most talented.
(c) (U) Brigadier General Sand D. Bakken.

Bakken is the commander of the 102d Armored Bri-
gade, and he currently enjoys “most favored”
status with Sondo. Extensively trained in the
former Soviet Union, Bakken is firmly convinced
that the successful commander must properly co-
ordinate his supporting arms assets to ensure
synchronization and unity of effort. He has as-
sembled a highly competent staff and demands ex-
tremely detailed planning for the simplest of
operations. Considered to be the most competent
armored force commander in the region, he is
contemptuous of the Orangeland air force and its
inability to prevent foreign air strikes
against his country.
(d) (U) Brigadier General Mann E. Teay. Teay

is the commander of 103d Armored Brigade, and he
is currently out of favor with Sondo. Reliable
reports indicate that a recent black market
scandal within his brigade’s supply and mainte-
nance management program, along with his subse-
quent inability to conceal this scandal,
resulted in a personal reprimand from Sondo.
Teay’s initial training was in Sudbania, fol-
lowed by advanced studies in Kanistan. He is as-
sessed to be a very competent and aggressive
commander who has surrounded himself with
equally aggressive staff officers and subordi-
nate commanders.
(5) (U) Commanders’ Idiosyncrasies and Doctrinal

Patterns
(a) (U) Commanders’ Idiosyncrasies. Although

Orangeland’s central government maintains ulti-
mate control of all military operations, they
have shown favor towards individual leaders
within the military. The military hierarchy is
firmly dominated by Field Marshal Sondo who per-
sonally approves all command appointments. Ini-
tiative is perceived as risky, and military
tactics tend to be conservative. One of the few
B-6
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
exceptions is MajGen Dobhan, who is a risk taker
and prefers the offensive whenever possible.
(b) (U) Doctrinal Patterns. Orangeland contin-

ues to follow a modified Soviet doctrinal style
with only those modifications required due to a
predominately illiterate population, effects of
terrain, and restrictions placed upon acquisi-
tion of high technology equipment.
Annex B
(6) (U) Orangeland Centers of Gravity
(a) (U) Orangeland Operational Centers of

Gravity. The NOG is the operational COG, com-
posed of eight separate brigades and two artil-
lery regiments. The NOG has the personal
sponsorship of Sondo and is allowed to recruit
personnel from the remainder of the Orangeland
armed forces. As a result, the quality of per-
sonnel and equipment within this unit is without
equal within Orangeland’s armed forces. The nu-
cleus of the command element of the NOG has been
together for approximately 1 year and has con-
ducted numerous command post exercises and
small-scale field exercises.
(b) (U) NOG Tactical Center of Gravity. The

core of the NOG is the armored striking power of
the 102d and 103d Armored Brigades. Supported by
their respective artillery regiments, these two
brigades have historically been used to exploit
success or conduct counterattacks. They have
been the decisive factor in the previous success
of the NOG against Blueland forces. The NOG can
be expected to husband these forces until the
critical point of the battle.
(7) (U) Orangeland Courses of Action
(a) (U) Most Likely COA. The NOG will conduct

an attack to occupy the Jesara oil fields. The
lead echelon, with one armored brigade (102 d),
and three mechanized brigades (201st, 202d,
203d) supported by one artillery regiment
(401st), will attack and occupy the Jesara oil
fields and the suburban areas of Tealton to the
B-7
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-122 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
east, trying to force us to conduct MOUT opera-
tions. Elements of the NOG (201st Mechanized
Brigade) will probably occupy positions around
and to the north of Jesara oil fields in the
next 24 to 48 hours. The 202 d Mechanized Brigade
is expected to occupy positions to the west. The
203d Mechanized Brigade will move to the south-
east of the oil fields. After taking the oil
fields, expect NOG engineers to establish bri-
gade-sized defensive positions, supported by
extensive minefields and barriers. The 102d Ar-
mored Brigade and 401 st Artillery Regiment are
expected to occupy reserve positions south of
the oil fields and provide fires for the lead
elements of the NOG. Although not likely, rein-
forcements from the second echelon could arrive
within 24 hours. The second echelon will estab-
lish a hasty line of defense south of Gray City
and will consist of one armored brigade (103d)
and three mechanized brigades (204 th, 205th,
206th), supported by an artillery regiment
(402d). The second echelon will exploit the
coastal salt marshes, rugged inland mountains,
and narrow coastal plains to funnel MEF forces
into selected chokepoints. Second echelon pri-
mary tasks will include the security of the main
supply route (Route 1) for supply of the NOG,
facilitating the movement of supplies forward
to NOG brigades, and the establishment of an in
depth defense. It is expected that the NOG will
delegate operational control of the forward de-
ployed brigades to the commander of the 102 d Ar-
mored Brigade, and the rear brigades near Gray
City will be under the operational control of
the commander of the 103d Armored Brigade. NOG
rear elements will continue to be responsible
for defense of the coast from the border to the
oil fields (approximately 150 miles), but large
gaps will most likely exist. Orangeland heli-
copters will operate from forward bases or
forward arming and refueling points (FARPs) to
to support the NOG’s effort to occupy and de-
fend the Jesara oil fields. Advance NOG forces
will be supported by organic antiaircraft arry
B-8
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
artillery (AAA), SA-7s, artillery, and occa-
sional fixed- and rotary-wing close air sup-
port. Although this COA exposes the NOG to the
prospect of defeat in detail, it is attractive
because it seizes the Jesara oil fields and
forces the U.S. to the potential of high casual-
ty in a MOUT environment.
(b) (U) Most Dangerous COA. Orangeland forces
Annex B
will establish a deliberate defense south of
Tealton. The first echelon will establish pre-
pared defenses in depth in the vicinity of Gray
City. By not pressing north to Jesara and Teal-
ton, the first echelon will be able to spend
more time establishing defensive positions and
building disruptive minefields to block the re-
strictive approaches to Gray City. The NOG will
be able to control the mobility corridors lead-
ing to the Gray City chokepoint. The NOG would
have a greater chance of holding onto its terri-
torial gains while inflicting high U.S. casual-
ties. The 203 d Mechanized Brigade will establish
defensive positions northeast of Gray City. The
201st Mechanized Brigade is expected to occupy
positions to the west. The 102 d Armored Brigade
serves as the NOG counterattack force. The 401st
Artillery Regiment provides fires to lead ele-
ments of the NOG. The second echelon will con-
solidate the coastal regions and secure lines of
communication southward towards the border.
Supply lines will be shorter; defenses will be
better prepared. The NOG headquarters will re-
main well south of Gray City. It is expected
that the NOG commander will place the forward
brigades under OPCON of the 102 d Armored Brigade
commander and the rear brigades vicinity Gray
City under OPCON of the 103d Armored Brigade
commander.
2. (U) Mission and Concept of Intelligence Operations
a. (U) Mission. Provide predictive, timely, mission-

specific, all-source intelligence in order to support
planning and execution of offensive operations against
forces in the MEF area of operation.
B-9
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-124 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
b. (U) Concept of Intelligence Operations
(1) (U) The MEF G-2 exercises primary staff respon-

sibility for all intelligence operations. Intelli-
gence operations will integrate all-source national,
theater, and organic MEF intelligence capabilities
to—
(a) (U) Provide early warning and assessment

of enemy threats to MEF operations.
(b) (U) Assess enemy capabilities and deter-

mine his most likely and most dangerous response
to MEF operations.
(c) (U) Detect exploitable weaknesses in enemy

military forces.
(d) (U) Identify enemy responses to ongoing

psychological operations (PSYOP).
(2) (U) The MEF G-2 will provide intelligence sup-

port to all MSCs with priority to the main effort
and its intelligence requirements. Intelligence that
would assist the conduct of the amphibious operation
will be provided expeditiously to NAVFOR-B and the
landing force. Other MSC requirements will be prior-
itized and satisfied as resources permit. The con-
cept of intelligence will remain consistent
throughout all stages of the operation while re-
flecting the differing priorities inherent in the
change of main effort. The collection plan will most
closely reflect the changes required for each stage.
See Appendix 2 (Signals Intelligence), Appendix 5
(Human-Resource Intelligence), and Appendix 7 (Imag-
ery Intelligence).
(3) (U) MSCs will continually review and identify

gaps in intelligence and participate in intelligence
collection efforts.
3. (U) Intelligence Activities
a. (U) Planning and Direction. The MEF G-2 will ensure

adequate intelligence is provided to support operations
at all levels of command. National and theater support
will be coordinated by the G-2 through the JTF-B J-2.
Requests for information (RFIs) from MSC will be
B-10
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
forwarded to the MEF G-2. Requests for theater and na-
tional intelligence support will specify information
required, not means of collection. The MEF G-2 will be
the sole authority to pass RFIs forward for action by
higher headquarters. The National Intelligence Support
Team will be the vehicle by which RFIs are passed to
CJTF-B for resolution. RFIs will be prioritized by
each requesting subordinate command and will include
required update interval and preferred mode of re-
Annex B
sponse. The MEF will publish an RFI status report daily
by electrical message. MSC are responsible for the in-
telligence support of their subordinate units.
(1) (U) Priority Intelligence Requirements. Priori-

ty intelligence requirements (PIRs) will be the fo-
cus of the MEF collection and analysis effort. See
Appendix 1 (Priority Intelligence Requirements) for
PIRs supporting all three stages of this operation.
Additional limited distribution PIRs that support
the deception plan and the knowledge of which would
compromise the deception plan are contained in At-
tachment A to Exhibit 2 to Tab A to Appendix 3 to
Annex C (Operations).
(2) (U) New Requirements. As new intelligence re-

quirements are identified, they will be forwarded
via the chain of command to the G-2. Validated re-
quirements will be disseminated electronically
throughout the MEF and forwarded as appropriate for
theater- and national-level intelligence support.
b. (U) Processing and Exploitation. TBD.
c. (U) Production. The MEF will establish a combat in-

formation center (CIC). The production core of the CIC
will come from the all-source fusion center (AFC), aug-
mented as required by the MSCs. The AFC will conduct
the bulk of intelligence production for the MEF; those
production requirements beyond its capability will be
forwarded to CJTF-B for resolution.
d. (U) Dissemination
(1) (U) Intelligence reports to the MEF G-2 will be

event-driven in the case of indication and warning
(I&W) or other critical intelligence information.
Notification to major subordinate commands by the
B-11
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-126 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
MEF G-2 of significant events will occur as rapidly
as possible via the most expeditious means.
(2) (U) Each MSC will submit INTSUMS to the MEF G-2.
These INTSUMS will cover a 24-hour period. The MEF
will produce and disseminate an INTSUM to the MSC
and CJTF-B.
(3) (U) Intelligence report formats will be in ac-

cordance with the I MEF Intelligence Standing Oper-
ating Procedures.
(4) (U) Intelligence studies will be distributed

via the MEF SIPRNET web-site.
(5) (U) CJTF-B will determine the standards for the

release of information to allies.
(6) (U) Imagery will be disseminated to MSCs via

SIPRNET. Dissemination by MSCs to their subordinate
commands will be by hardcopy.
4. (U) Assignment of Intelligence Tasks
a. (U) Orders to Subordinate Commands and Attached

Units
(1) (U) Establish an intelligence collection plan,

ensuring incorporation of the PIRs contained in Ap-
pendix 1 (Priority Intelligence Requirements) of
this annex and all subsequent published intelligence
requirements.
(2) (U) Intelligence preparation of the battlespace

(IPB) procedures, to include numbering system for
named areas of interest (NAIs) and targeted areas of
interest (TAIs), will be in references (g) and (h).
(3) (U) Report all incidents of loss of organic col-

lection capability (unmanned aerial vehicle crashed,
signals intelligence support team capture, recon-
naissance patrol lost, etc.) to the MEF G-2 immedi-
ately.
B-12
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
b. (U) Requests to Higher, Adjacent, and Cooperating
Units
(1) (U) Provide theater and National Intelligence

Agency support as requested, to include a National
Intelligence Support Team. See Appendix 10 (National
Intelligence Support Team).
(2) (U) Disseminate time-sensitive information col-

lected by national, theater, or adjacent intelli-
Annex B
gence agencies by the most expeditious means
available.
c. (U) Coordinating Instructions
(1) (U) DIRLAUTH between subordinate and attached

commands.
(2) (U) Requests for intelligence support will be

submitted to the MEF G-2.
(3) (U) Intelligence liaison officers to be provid-

ed by the MEF G-2 to the CJTF-B Joint Intelligence
Support Element (JISE), NAVFOR-B, ARFOR-B, and AF-
FOR-B.
5. (U) Communications and Information Systems. See Annex

K (Combat Information System).
6. (U) Miscellaneous Instructions. None.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
APPENDIXES:
1 – Priority Intelligence Requirements
2 – Signals Intelligence
3 – Counterintelligence
4 – Targeting Intelligence
5 – Human-Resource Intelligence
6 – Intelligence Support to Command and Control Warfare
7 – Imagery Intelligence
8 – Measurement and Signature Intelligence
B-13
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-128 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
9 – Captured Enemy Equipment
10 – National Intelligence Support Team
11 – Intelligence Estimate
12 – Intelligence Products
13 – Intelligence Collection Plan
14 – Reconnaissance and Surveillance plan
15 – Geographic Intelligence
16 – Intelligence Operations
17 – Support to Survival, Evasion, Resistance, and Escape
OFFICIAL:
s/
D. DONAHUE
Col, USMC
AC/S, G-2
B-14
UNCLASSIFIED
Example of Annex C (Operations)
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
ANNEX C TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION

SHARP SWORD) (U)
OPERATIONS (U)
(U) REFERENCES:
LAND, BLUELAND), edition 12; G-3 (ORANGELAND, BLUE-
LAND), edition 3, 1:1,000,000; Series 1501A, sheets NJ
Annex C
32-10
(GREENTOWN, BLUELAND), edition 2; NJ 32-11 (JADE CITY,
BLUELAND), edition 2; NJ 32-15 (PURPLETOWN, BLUELAND)
1:250,000.
(d) Joint Pub 3-0, Doctrine for Joint Operations
(e) Joint Pub 3-05, Doctrine for Joint Special Opera-
tions
(f) Joint Pub 3-50, National Search and Rescue Manual
Volume I: National Search and Rescue System
(g) Joint Pub 3-50.1, National Search and Rescue Manual
Volume II: Planning Handbook
(h) Joint Pub 3-50.2, Doctrine for Joint Combat Search
and Rescue
(i) Joint Pub 3-52, Doctrine for Joint Airspace Control
in the Combat Zone
(j) Joint Pub 3-54, Joint Doctrine for Operations Secu-
rity
(k) Joint Pub 3-56.1, Command and Control for Joint Air
Operations
(l) CJCSM 3122.03, 1 Jun 96
(m) MCDP 3, Expeditionary Operations
(n) MCWP 0-1, Marine Corps Operations
(o) MCWP 0-1.1, Componency
(p) MCWP 3-25.4, Marine Tactical Air Command Center
Handbook
(q) MCWP 5-1, Marine Corps Planning Process
(U) TIME ZONE: Zulu
C-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-130 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
1. (U) General
a. (U) Purpose. To provide details and guidance for the

MEF’s conduct of operations in support of CJTF-B Phase
III combat operations.
b. (U) Mission. On order, I MEF, as the main effort,

conducts offensive operations in zone and defeats enemy
forces in order to restore the Blueland border. Be pre-
pared to continue offensive operations into Orangeland
to destroy remaining Orangeland offensive military ca-
pabilities.
c. (U) Area of Operations. The MEF area of operation is

a 150 by 90 nm mile rectangle that encompasses the
coastal area between Purpletown and Gray City. The area
of operation is projected to expand further southward
to accommodate the forward movement of MEF units. To
keep the area of operation to a manageable size as the
area of operation expands to the south, the northern
portion of the area of operation will be turned over to
CJTF-B.
d. (U) Situation. See Basic Order and I MEF INTSUMs.
2. (U) Concept of Operations. See Basic Order.
3. (U) Conduct of Operations
a. (U) Aviation Operations. See Annex W (Aviation Op-

erations) or Appendix 17 (Aviation Operations) if ap-
plicable.
(1) (U) The CG, 3d MAW is designated as tactical air

commander and will coordinate air operations in the
MEF area of operations.
(2) (U) The 3d MAW, together with other I MEF forc-

es, will attack NOG air defenses to achieve the nec-
essary air superiority. During Phase I, 3 d MAW, as
the main effort, shapes the battlespace by attacking
NOG artillery and armor command and control and lo-
gistic facilities. In Phase II, 3d MAW isolates the
battlespace and attacks the NOG COG. In Phase III,
3d MAW pursues retreating Orangeland forces.
(3) (U) The 3d MAW supports the 1st FSSG logistic

build-up.
C-2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(4) (U) All targeting and air tasking order (ATO)
preparations will be coordinated with the JTF-B tar-
geting process.
b. (U) Maritime Prepositioning Force Operations. Mari-

time prepositioning force (MPF) offload operations have
been completed. MPF backload will be conducted upon
termination of the operation. Maritime prepositioning
ships (MPSs) and literage will support CJTF-B opera-
tions.
c. (U) Information Operations/Command and Control War-

fare. See Appendix 3 (Information Operations/Command
and Control Warfare).
d. (U) Counterinsurgency. Not applicable.
e. (U) Nuclear Operations. Not applicable.
Annex C
f. (U) Nuclear Defense Operations. There is a poten-
tial for Orangeland use of chemical weapons. Intelli-
gence reports indicate that should the Orangeland
regime perceive a threat to their survival, they may
feel they would have nothing to lose by the use of
weapons of mass destruction. See Appendix 2 (Nuclear,
Biological, and Chemical Defense Operations).
g. (U) Special Operations. JSOTF-B will conduct stra-

tegic reconnaissance (SR) and direct action operations
in support of operations within the JAO. Priority is to
SR.
(1) (U) Position Special Forces and SEAL SR teams to

observe Orangeland coastal LOCs, locate weapons of
mass destruction, detect command posts, and find re-
supply depots.
(2) (U) Be prepared to conduct direct action mis-

sions to destroy command post and key logistic fa-
cilities, interdict LOCs at vulnerable points, and
seize key terrain to facilitate operations, in pri-
ority.
(3) (U) DIRLAUTH has been authorized between

JSOTF-B and I MEF.
h. (U) Tactical Recovery of Aircraft and Personnel.

See Appendix 5 (Evasion and Recovery Operations).
C-3
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-132 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
i. (U) Rules of Engagement. See Appendix 6 (Rules of
Engagement).
j. (U) Reconnaissance
(1) (U) Ten JSOTF-B reconnaissance teams are cur-

rently operating in or adjacent to the MEF area of
operation to cover CJTF-B TAIs and NAIs. CJTF-B has
established restricted fire areas (RFAs), defined
as a 1,000-meter radius, around each team. See
Appendix 7 (Reconnaissance).
(2) (U) CG, I MEF is responsible for the planning

and conduct of reconnaissance operations support-
ing MARFOR-B operations. All reconnaissance re-
quirements will be submitted to the MEF, G-2. See
Appendix 7 (Reconnaissance).
k. (U) Air Base Operability. All MEF aircraft are

ashore at airfields in Greentown, Silverton, and Golden
Heights, Blueland. See Appendix 8 (Air Base Operabili-
ty).
l. (U) Combat Camera. See Appendix 9 (Combat Camera).
m. (U) Noncombatant Evacuation Operations. See Appen-

dix 10 (Noncombatatant Evacuation Operations).
n. (U) Evasion and Recovery Operations
(1) (U) CJTF-B will exercise primary combat search

and rescue (CSAR) command authority through the
Joint Search and Rescue Center (JSRC) collocated
with the Joint Air Operations Center.
(2) (U) The JSRC coordinates all CSAR operations

within the JAO.
(3) (U) The MEF has primary CSAR responsibility for

its own forces within its area of operation. The MEF
will establish a rescue coordination center (RCC) to
coordinate rescue operations within the area of op-
eration. See Appendix 11 (Escape and Evasion Opera-
tions).
o. (U) Counterattack. See Appendix 12 (Counterattack).
p. (U) Explosive Ordnance Disposal. See Appendix 13

(Explosive Ordnance Disposal).
C-4
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
q. (U) Amphibious Operations. On order, NAVFOR-B con-
ducts amphibious operations in support of MARFOR-B op-
erations ashore.
r. (U) Force Protection. See Appendix 15 (Force Pro-

tection).
s. (U) Rear Area Operations. See Appendix 16 (Rear Area

Operations).
t. (U) Fire Support. See Appendix 19 (Fire Support).
(1) (U) Targeting Cycle. The targeting cycle will

be conducted on a 72-hour cycle in accordance with
reference (j). To avoid confusion among numerous
events and products, each 24-hour period is desig-
nated by a sequential phonetic letter.
(2) (U) Joint Targeting. The JTF-B J-3 will direct
Annex C
the JTF-B targeting process through the Joint Tar-
geting Coordination Board (JTCB). The JTCB will as-
sist the JTF-B in setting priorities, providing
targeting guidance, and determining overall weight
of effort.
(a) (U) MARFOR-B will participate on the JTCB.
(b) (U) The JTCB will meet daily to review and

validate targeting guidance.
(c) (U) CG, I MEF prioritized target nomina-

tions will be forwarded to JTF-B/J-3 and JFACC
representatives at the JTCB via MARFOR-B by the
most expeditious means available using the tar-
get information report (TGTINFOREP) format.
Nominations received by 0600 will be considered
for inclusion in the Joint Integrated Priori-
tized Target List (JIPTL) approved that same
day. Targets above the cut line will be sched-
uled for attack on the next ATO cycle.
(d) (U) Targeting Guidance
1 (U) Target Priorities

a (U) Command and control facilities
(battalion level and higher).
C-5
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-134 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
b (U) Fire support means (battalion lev-
el and higher).
c (U) Logistic facilities (brigade level
and higher).
d (U) Armored units (battalion level and
higher).
e (U) Air defense weapons and units.
2 (U) Target Restrictions
a (U) See Appendix 6 (Rules of Engage-
ment) of Annex C (Operations).
b (U) With the exception of reconnais-
sance operations, no ground cross border
operations will be permitted into Or-
angeland without CJTF-B approval.
c (U) Every effort will be made to limit
damage to the Gray City pipeline and its
associated support facilities.
(3) (U) Laser Guided Weapons Employment. CJTF-B
will assign specific blocks of laser pulse repeti-
tion frequency (PRF) codes to facilitate employment
of laser-guided munitions. Assignment: To be issued
(TBI).
(4) (U) FASCAM Employment
(a) (U) MSC commanders have authority for em-

ployment of short duration scatterable mines.
(b) (U) MSC commanders may plan for use of

long duration scatterable mines but will not em-
ploy them without CG, I MEF approval.
(c) (U) MSC commanders will report the loca-

tion of all air and artillery FASCAM minefields
to the MEF combat operation center (COC).
(5) (U) Fire Support Coordinating Measures (FSCM).

Fire support coordination line (FSCL) 1 is currently
in effect. FSCL 2 will become effective on H-Hour.
MSCs will submit planned FSCMs as developed, to in-
clude overlays, to the MEF COC. See Appendix 19
(Fire Support).
C-6
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
u. (U) Countermechanized Operations. See Appendix 20
(Countermechanized Plan).
v. (U) Breaching Operations. See Appendix 21 (Breach-

ing Plan).
w. (U) Obstacles. See Appendix 22 (Obstacle Plan).
4. (U) Operational Constraints
a. (U) Ground forces will not cross the Orangeland/

Blueland border without CJTF-B approval. CG, I MEF may
approve the positioning of ground reconnaissance ele-
ments across the border.
b. (U) JAO airspace is defined as the airspace from

surface to 70,000 feet mean sea level (MSL).
Annex C
a. (U) Command. See Basic Order.
b. (U) Signal. See Annex K (Combat Information Sys-
tem).
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
APPENDIXES:
1 – Nuclear Operations (Not used in Marine Corps plans or
orders. Included to conform with CJCSM 3122.03.)
2 – Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Defense Operations
3 – Information Operations/Command and Control Warfare
4 – Special Operations
5 – Evasion and Recovery Operations
6 – Rules of Engagement
7 – Reconnaissance
8 – Air Base Operability
9 – Combat Camera
10 – Noncombatant Evacuation Operations
11 – Escape and Evasion Operations
12 – Counterattack
13 – Explosive Ordnance Disposal
14 – Amphibious Operations
C-7
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-136 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
15 – Force Protection
16 – Rear Area Operations
17 – Aviation Operations
18 – Operations Overlay
19 – Fire Support
20 - Countermechanized Plan
21 – Breaching Plan
22 – Obstacle Plan
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Col., USMC
AC/S, G-3
C-8
UNCLASSIFIED
Example of Appendix 3 (Information Operations/Command and Control

Warfare) to Annex C
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
APPENDIX 3 TO ANNEX C TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION

SHARP SWORD) (U)
INFORMATION OPERATIONS/COMMAND AND CONTROL WARFARE (U)
(U) REFERENCES:
Annex C
LAND, BLUELAND), edition 12; G-3 (ORANGELAND, BLUE
LAND), 1:1,000,000; Series 1501A, sheets NJ 32-10
1:250,000.
(d) Joint Pub 3-0, Doctrine for Joint Operations
(e) Joint Pub 3-13, Joint Doctrine for Information
Operations
(f) Joint Pub 3-13.1, Joint Doctrine for Command and
Control Warfare (C2W)
(U) TIME ZONE: Zulu
1. (U) Situation. See Annex B (Intelligence) and I MEF
INTSUMs. As the MEF is now involved in combat operations,
information operations (IO) will focus on command and con-
trol warfare (C2W).
a. (U) Enemy. The primary IO/C2W threat to MEF forces

comes from Orangeland’s intense propaganda campaign di-
rected at the region. Their campaign depicts U.S. oper-
ations as another example of Western imperialism and
colonialism. Orangeland is expected to continue state-
sponsored acts of terrorism.
b. (U) Friendly. See Basic Order. The MEF possesses

significant forces and technological advantages for
C2W. The MEF will coordinate C2W activities via the I
MEF IO Cell and the I MEF Targeting Board. U.S. forces
have extensive PSYOP and public affairs (PA) assets to
C-3-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-138 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
counter the Orangeland psychological and propaganda ef-
forts. Electronic warfare (EW) and physical destruction
will be used in combination to destroy, disrupt, delay,
and degrade enemy command and control.
c. (U) Assumptions. None.
2. (U) Mission. I MEF conducts C2W operations in support

of JTF-B IO against Orangeland in order to protect U.S.
forces and ensure the defeat of Orangeland forces within
the MEF area of operation.
3. (U) Execution
a. (U) Concept of Operations. C2W, supported by intel-

ligence (see Appendix 6 to Annex B [Intelligence]),
will support the MEF through the synchronized use of
deception, physical destruction, EW, OPSEC, PSYOP, PA,
and civil affairs. C2W will be conducted throughout the
operation by shaping and influencing the local popu-
lace, internally displaced persons, and regional ac-
tors, and by deterring potential dissent groups who
might otherwise seek to interfere with MEF operations.
The primary operational offensive C2W effort is direct-
ed at degrading NOG C2 systems. The I MEF IO Cell will
coordinate the C2W activities within the area of opera-
tion, closely integrating the C2W effort into the MEF
targeting process through participation on the I MEF
Targeting Board. MEF C2W objectives will be accom-
plished in the following phases, in accordance with the
Basic Order phases:
(1) (U) Phase I. MEF C2W actions to be taken during

Phase I have five objectives: degrade enemy command
and control communications, support PSYOP opera-
tions, protect friendly forces, support the decep-
tion plan, and support maneuver with physical
destruction.
(2) (U) Phase II. MEF C2W actions to be taken during

Phase II have five objectives: degrade enemy command
and control communications, support PSYOP opera-
tions, protect friendly forces, continue support to
the deception plan, and support maneuver with physi-
cal destruction.
C-3-2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(3) (U) Phase III. MEF C2W actions to be taken dur-
ing Phase III have two objectives: support PSYOP op-
erations and protect friendly forces.
(4) (U) MOEs for each C2W objective are contained in

the appropriate tab to this appendix.
b. (U) IO/C2W Tasks
(1) (U) Military Deception. The MEF conducts decep-

tion operations targeting the NOG commander and his
staff. Any tasking for support or synchronized de-
ception operations will be promulgated by this head-
quarters. Any tactical deception operations planned
by MSCs must be coordinated with the I MEF IO Cell.
(2) (U) Electronic Warfare. EW assets available to

the MEF are limited. Therefore, tactical jamming as-
sets will be directed at the battalions of the 401 st
Annex C
and 402d Artillery Regiments. Theater assets will
generally be directed at brigade-sized units and
larger. Keys to successful EW include coordination
and deconfliction with adjacent forces and theater
assets, pooling of EW assets in theater, and retar-
geting as necessary.
(3) (U) Operations Security. The MEF’s first OPSEC

priority is to protect MEF forces in the area of op-
eration. Large-scale logistic operations, the pres-
ence of the media, a potentially hostile populace,
and the threat of terrorism pose special challenges
in addition to the traditional challenges presented
by conventional Orangeland forces.
(4) (U) Psychological Operations. The MEF has dis-

semination authority for approved PSYOP products and
approval authority for new products tailored for lo-
cal conditions that stay within the purview of the
PSYOP plan. Recommendations for new themes and prod-
ucts must be submitted by the MEF through MARFOR-B
for review and approval.
(5) (U) Physical Destruction. The command and con-

trol capabilities of Orangeland’s artillery units,
brigade and higher units, and intelligence centers
will be targeted for physical destruction. Gain and
C-3-3
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-140 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
loss assessments must be completed before the deci-
sion is made to destroy or degrade any command and
control target.
(6) (U) Assessment criteria for each C2W task are

contained in the appropriate tab to this appendix.
c. (U) Coordinating Instructions. All C2W operations

must be synchronized with the JTF-B concept of IO/C2W.
4. (U) Administration and Logistics. MSCs must submit

daily reports outlining information required for consoli-
dation in the I MEF C2W situation report (SITREP). Informa-
tion cut off time is 2400Z and must be received by the IO
Cell by 0100Z.
5. (U) Command and Control. All communications for C2W

planning and execution will be over a secure means.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
TABS:
A – Military Deception
B – Electronic Warfare
C – Operations Security
D – Psychological Operations
E – Physical Destruction
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Col., USMC
AC/S, G-3
C-3-4
UNCLASSIFIED
Example of Tab A (Military Deception) to Appendix 3 to Annex C
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
TAB A TO APPENDIX 3 TO ANNEX C TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01

(OPERATION SHARP SWORD) (U)
MILITARY DECEPTION (U)
(U) REFERENCES:
(c) Maps and Charts: Series ONC, sheets G-2 (ORANGE
LAND, BLUELAND), edition 12; G-3 (ORANGELAND, BLUE
Annex C
1:250,000.
(d) Joint Pub 3-58, Joint Doctrine for Military Decep-
tion
(U) TIME ZONE: Zulu
1. (U) Situation
a. (U) General. See Annex B (Intelligence) and I MEF

INTSUMs. The MEF is preparing to conduct offensive op-
erations to restore the border of Blueland and will
conduct a deception operation to deceive the enemy as
to the location of the MEF main effort. The MEF’s de-
ception effort is in support of JTF-B deception plan.
The unclassified cover term for the MEF’s deception is
“Wooden Horse.”
b. (U) Enemy
(1) (U) General Capabilities. Orangeland has limit-

ed technological capabilities but a very robust hu-
man intelligence (HUMINT) capability that can be
expected to detect or respond to a deception plan. A
brief synopsis of the enemy’s intelligence capabili-
ties are provided in the table on the following
page.
C-3-A-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-142 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
INTEL TYPE CAPABILITY REMARKS
HUMINT Excellent Agents, sympathizers
Fixed sites; airborne

SIGINT Limited assets
MASINT None
ELINT Limited Fixed sites
IMINT Limited Tactical reconnaissance
(2) (U) Deception Targets. MajGen Dobhan, commander

of the NOG, and his staff are the object of the MEF
deception plan.
(a) (U) Aggressive, innovative, and confident.

Flair for surprise.
(b) (U) Anti-U.S., pro-regime.
(c) (U) Educated in the former Soviet Union

and U.S.
(4) (U) Probable Enemy Courses of Action. See Annex

B (Intelligence) and Basic Order.
c. (U) Friendly
(1) (U) JTF-B Deception Story. The most direct ave-

nue of approach to the border of Orangeland runs
along the coast. NAVFOR-B in support of the JTF-B
main effort will conduct an amphibious operation
along the coast behind Orangeland lines. NAVFOR-B
will link up with MARFOR-B and attack south to rap-
idly defeat Orangeland forces and restore the Or-
angeland/Blueland border.
(2) (U) Critical Limitations. Limiting factors are

time and availability of resources due to ongoing
JTF-B operations.
(3) (U) I MEF Concept of Operations. The 1st MARDIV,

as the main effort, attacks in zone to penetrate and
defeat enemy forces northwest of Gray City. The 3 d
C-3-A-2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
d
MAW, 3 MARDIV to the east and an amphibious landing
to the southeast supports the main effort. The de-
ception will deceive the NOG commander as to the lo-
cation of the JTF-B main effort.
d. (U) Assumptions. The NOG commander is uncertain

whether the JTF-B main effort will come from the west,
the east, or from the sea.
2. (U) Mission
a. (U) Operational Mission. See Basic Order.
b. (U) Deception Mission
(1) (U) Deception Goals
(a) (U) Premature commitment of the 102d and

103d Armored Brigades.
Annex C
(b) (U) Commitment of the 102d Armored Brigade
against the supporting effort.
(c) (U) Withdrawal of the first echelon.
(2) (U) Deception Objective. To cause the NOG com-

mander to perceive that the MEF main effort will
come directly down the east coast or from the sea.
The NOG will reorient defenses toward the northeast
and prematurely commit reserves against the support-
ing attack. The amphibious landing will freeze the
second echelon and force the withdrawal of the first
echelon before it is cut off by the amphibious land-
ing.
(3) (U) Desired Enemy Perceptions
(a) (U) That the NOG commander believes that

the eastern attack is the main attack.
(b) (U) That there is a significant amphibious

assault threat to his LOCs along the coast.
(4) (U) Deception Story. The most direct avenue of

approach to the border of Orangeland runs along the
coast. The 3 d Marine Division, assisted by NAVFOR-B
amphibious landings along the coast, will attack
C-3-A-3
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-144 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
along this avenue of approach to rapidly defeat the
NOG and restore the Orangeland/Blueland border.
3. (U) Execution
a. (U) Concept of the Operation
(1) (U) General. The MEF will portray a series of

events to the NOG commander that will lead him to
conclude that the MEF main effort will attack along
the eastern coast road, link up with amphibious as-
sault forces, and attack directly towards the bor-
der. Numerous indicators of preparations of an
impending amphibious assault and reinforcement of
the 3 d MARDIV will be initiated. Care will be taken
to avoid compromising the actual location of
NAVFOR-B’s amphibious assault. Activities will in-
clude obvious reconnaissance of probable landing
sites, stepped-up extensive patrolling, heavier air
operations, leaflet drops, and employment of decep-
tive communications.
(2) (U) Other IO/C2W Elements
(a) (U) EW/Command and Control (Tab B). Delib-

erate OPSEC violations conducted over unsecured
communications, logistic requests, etc., will
be transmitted. Degradation of the NOG command
and control capability.
(b) (U) OPSEC (Tab C). Set increased terrorist

threat condition (THREATCON) level throughout
area of operation. Strict enforcement of opera-
tions security (OPSEC) and emission control
(EMCON) conditions, particularly in the actual
main effort’s zone.
(c) (U) PSYOP (Tab D). Distribute leaflets

along the coast instructing the indigenous pop-
ulation not to interfere with U.S. forces in the
area and that U.S. forces have no fight with the
civilians.
(d) (U) Physical Destruction (Tab E). Target

C2 nodes that provide potential information of
deception to the NOG, particularly reconnais-
sance elements in the west.
C-3-A-4
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(e) (U) Intelligence Support to C2W (Appendix
6 to Annex B). Alert IO Cell when Orangeland
aerial reconnaissance missions are active. In-
crease obvious reconnaissance and surveillance
activity around probable amphibious landing
sites. Provide initial feedback on success of
deception plan to IO Cell.
(f) (U) Liaison. Establish close coordination

with all organizations required to support the
deception plan, especially NAVFOR-B.
(3) (U) Feedback and Monitoring
(a) (U) Direct feedback will be conducted by

coordinating all available intelligence collec-
tion assets to monitor the effectiveness of de-
ception operations (see Appendix 6 to Annex B
Annex C
[Intelligence]). National and theater assets
should provide indications of NOG units react-
ing to the deception.
(b) (U) The following MOEs will be used to

monitor the degree to which the NOG is deceived
by the deception operations.
1 (U) Physical reorientation of the 102d

and 103d Armored Brigades to the northeast.
2 (U) Orangeland detection of U.S. amphib-
ious reconnaissance activities along likely
landing sites.
3 (U) Interception of Orangeland communi-
cations indicating receipt of deceptive MEF
message traffic.
4 (U) Destruction of Orangeland reconnais-
sance elements forward of the actual main
effort.
(c) (U) Information concerning the MOE will be
reported immediately to the I MEF IO Cell for
assessment.
(4) (U) Means. Execution of the deception plan will

begin immediately, using all available MEF and JTF-B
assets to support the operation.
C-3-A-5
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-146 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
(5) (U) Tasks
(a) (U) I MEF IO Cell. Request reconnaissance

and special operations forces support for the
deception plan through MARFOR-B.
(b) (U) 3d MAW. On order, provide aviation as-

sets in order to conduct airborne reconnais-
sance and insert SOF, force reconnaissance, and
radio reconnaissance teams along the coast.
Provide aviation assets to protect and extract
reconnaissance teams from deception locations.
st
(c) (U) 1 FSSG. Promulgate deceptive logistic
message traffic as directed by the IO Cell.
(6) (U) Risks
(a) (U) Deception is Successful. Risk is low.

The NOG reserve is frozen in place to protect
against the threat to the coast. The 102 d and
103d Armored Brigades reorient to the northeast
against the supporting effort. The main effort
penetrates from the west and forces the NOG to
abandon its prepared defensive positions and
retreat to the border.
(b) (U) Deception Fails. Risk is moderate. The

NOG reserve is available to support defensive
operations. The 102 d and 103d Armored Brigades
move to attempt to counter the main effort pen-
etration.
(c) (U) Deception is Compromised to Allies or

Adversaries. Risk is moderate. Orangeland gov-
ernment uses the deception plan in its propagan-
da campaign; no political impact in Blueland.
The NOG reserve is available to support defen-
sive operations. The 102d Armored Brigade moves
to attempt to counter the main effort penetra-
tion. The 103 d Armored Brigade attacks the
NAVFOR-B landing force before it can be firmly
established ashore.
b. (U) Coordinating Instructions
(1) (U) Coordinate leaflet drops with JSOTF-B and

JFACC.
C-3-A-6
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(2) (U) Coordinate with ARFOR-B to ensure timing
and OPSEC of deception activities.
(3) (U) Exhibit 6 (Execution Schedule) provides de-

tailed coordinating actions, timelines, and respon-
sible units for the deception operation.
(4) (U) All deception activities will be closely

coordinated with JTF-B.
a. (U) Administration
(1) (U) General. Aviation and ground reconnaissance

activities within the deception objection area will
be limited to those that specifically contribute to
the success of the deception plan.
Annex C
(2) (U) Specific. The IO Cell will coordinate all
movement within the deception objective area.
b. (U) Logistics. See Annex D (Logistics/Combat Ser-

vice Support).
5. (U) Communications and Information Systems
a. (U) Command Relationships
(1) (U) Approval. CG, I MEF is approval authority

for execution and termination of Wooden Horse.
(2) (U) Authority. CJTF-B is the supported command-

er for deception. CG, I MEF is a supporting command-
er.
(3) (U) Oversight. The IO Cell retains oversight

responsibility for coordinating theater deception
operations.
(4) (U) Coordination. DIRLAUTH granted between

those units participating in Operation Wooden Horse.
Inform the IO Cell on all matters pertaining to the
planning, execution, and logistics associated with
this operation. The IO Cell will coordinate and en-
sure OPSEC and security compliance for external com-
mands.
C-3-A-7
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-148 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
b. (U) Communications. All communications for decep-
tion planning and execution will be over a secure
means.
6. (U) Security
a. (U) General. Security is paramount to the success of

this deception operation. Violations, no matter how
small or seemingly irrelevant, will be reported immedi-
ately to the I MEF IO Cell via secure means.
b. (U) Specific. The MEF IO Cell will establish a de-

ception operations security control officer to ensure
strict need to know control of security measures asso-
ciated with this deception operation. Additionally,
this appendix will be a limited distribution to only
those units tasked to conduct the deception and those
units whose operations may be affected by enemy reac-
tion to the deception.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
EXHIBITS:
1 – Task Organization
2 – Intelligence
3 – Operations
4 – Administration and Logistics
5 – Command Relationships
6 – Execution Schedule
7 – Distribution
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Col., USMC
AC/S, G-3
C-3-A-8
UNCLASSIFIED
Example of Exhibit 2 (Intelligence) to Tab A to Appendix 3 to Annex C
UNCLASSIFED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
EXHIBIT 2 TO TAB A TO APPENDIX 3 TO ANNEX C TO OPERATION

ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION SHARP SWORD) (U)
INTELLIGENCE (U)
(U) REFERENCES:
Annex C
(GREENTOWN,BLUELAND), edition 2; NJ 32-11 (JADE CITY,
1:250,000.
(d) Joint Pub 3-13, Joint Doctrine for Information
Operations
(U) TIME ZONE: Zulu
1. (U) Mission. Conduct deception operations in support
of the JTF-B deception story against the NOG commander in
order to cause the NOG commander to perceive that the MEF
main effort will come directly down the east coast.
2. (U) Situation
a. (U) Enemy
(1) (U) Target Description. The target of the de-

ception plan is MajGen Dobhan, NOG commander, and
his staff.
(a) (U) Aggressive, innovative, and confident

due to easy victories over Blueland forces.
Flair for surprise maneuvers.
(b) (U) Anti-U.S., pro-regime.
C-3-A-2-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-150 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
(c) (U) Educated in former Soviet Union and
U.S. Trained in both U.S. and Soviet tactics.
(3) (U) Adversary Intelligence Organizations. The

NOG intelligence capability is limited in both col-
lection and analytical capability. It is mainly a
HUMINT-oriented organization, with limited airborne
reconnaissance assets. Although it has adequately
supported the NOG during the initial battles with
Blueland, the volume of information that will be
generated by fast-paced combat operations with the
MEF could overwhelm the NOG G-2. It has a minimal
capability to detect the MEF deception.
(4) (U) Adversary Counterintelligence Organiza-

tions. The NOG G-2 has a strong counterintelligence
capability, but is oriented towards ensuring the
loyalty of NOG officers and detecting foreign agent
activities. The counterintelligence effort is close-
ly controlled at the NOG, with counterintelligence
officers down to brigade level.
(5) (U) Adversary Intelligence Sharing with Other

Countries. Orangeland intelligence exchanges are
limited to open-source information gathered by dip-
lomats and military attaches. Its primary partner in
intelligence exchange is Thrace. This source is a
potential target of the MEF deception plan.
(6) (U) Other Sources and Related Matters. Orange-

land’s international intelligence collection capa-
bility is limited and heavily reliant on the news
media. Judicious use of the media might be a viable
information conduit to Orangeland. There are no oth-
er known sources that are likely to affect the NOG
in sufficient time to support the MEF deception
plan.
(7) (U) Deception and Denial Activities. Orangeland

deception activities are relatively unsophisticated
and limited to diplomatic and low-level tactical ac-
tions. The Orangeland denial capability has histori-
cally been excellent in controlling foreign agent
operations and preventing information leaks through
HUMINT sources.
C-3-A-2-2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(8) (U) Target Reaction. If the deception is suc-
cessful, and MajGen Dobhan believes the MEF main ef-
fort is coming down the coastline in the east and
from the sea, then he will probably react rapidly
and forcefully. He will reorient his defenses toward
the northeast and commit his reserves against the
supporting attack. By moving his forces forward and
while attempting to secure and defend the Jesara oil
fields (most likely COA), he will focus his efforts
in an attempt to cause the maximum number of U.S.
casualties. The NAVFOR-B amphibious assault will cut
his LOC to Orangeland and force him to withdraw his
first echelon forces. If the deception is unsuccess-
ful, then MajGen Dobhan will shorten his LOCs, con-
duct a strong defense in depth south of Tealton. He
will have those reserve forces not committed by the
deception plan at his disposal to use to strengthen
his defensive lines at both positions (most danger-
Annex C
ous COA). MOE to assist in the assessment of the ef-
fectiveness of the deception are contained in Tab A
to Appendix C (Military Deception).
(9) (U) Third-Party Reaction. Blueland forces might

feel slighted if they are not briefed on the decep-
tion plan prior to execution. Otherwise, no adverse
impact is foreseen.
b. (U) Friendly
(1) (U) Impact by Unknowing U.S. Forces. Actions by

U.S. forces outside of the theater will have no im-
pact on the deception plan. NAVFOR-B and AFFOR-B
supporting actions are crucial to the success of the
deception. Uncontrolled operations may confuse the
clarity of the deceptive indicators fed to the NOG,
hinder their analytical recognition of what the de-
ception plan is trying to portray, and compromise
the location of the actual amphibious operation.
(2) (U) Timing. The NOG will require sufficient

time for its HUMINT network to pick up the indica-
tors and pass the information to the G-2. The MEF
rear area actions should begin 7 days prior to exe-
cution of the operation. The NOG will require less
time to detect and analyze tactical indicators with-
in its own area of operation. Reconnaissance and
C-3-A-2-3
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-152 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
targeting actions should begin 3 days prior to exe-
cution of the operation.
3. (U) Intelligence Requirements
a. (U) Priority Intelligence Requirements. See Attach-

ment 1 (Priority Intelligence Requirements).
b. (U) Feedback. Direct feedback will be conducted by

coordinating all available intelligence collection as-
sets to monitor the effectiveness of deception opera-
tions. National and theater assets should provide
indications of NOG units reacting to the deception.
c. (U) Assignment of Intelligence Tasks
(1) (U) Service Intelligence Agencies and Organiza-

tions. The JTF-B JISE will coordinate the collection
and analysis of intelligence by theater and national
intelligence organizations to support the MEF decep-
tion plan.
(2) (U) Commander’s Intelligence Organizations and

Assets
(a) (U) MEF G-2. Coordinate the collection and

analysis of tactical intelligence within the
MEF area of operation to support the IO Cell and
the deception plan.
st
(b) (U) 1 Intel and EW Bn. Provide personnel
and equipment to employ deceptive communica-
tions and conduct reconnaissance activities as
directed by the IO Cell.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
C-3-A-2-4
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
ATTACHMENTS:
A – Priority Intelligence Requirements
B – Biographic Sketch of MajGen Dobhan
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Col., USMC
AC/S, G-3
Annex C
C-3-A-2-5
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-154 MCWP 5-1

Example of Attachment A (Priority Intelligence Requirements) to Exhibit 2

to Tab A to Appendix 3 to Annex C
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
ATTACHMENT A TO EXHIBIT 2 TO TAB A TO APPENDIX 3 TO ANNEX C

TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION SHARP SWORD) (U)
PRIORITY INTELLIGENCE REQUIREMENTS (U)
1. (U) General. All commands participating in the decep-
tion plan are requested to submit PIRs required for plan-
ning and execution of the MEF deception plan in sufficient
time to permit tasking of the collection agency. Those
deception plan PIRs that would compromise the existence of
Annex C
the deception plan itself, will not be repeated in Appendix
1 to Annex B (Intelligence) and will be kept at a limited
distribution.
2. (U) Before Implementation of the Order
a. (U) What are the critical enemy command and control

nodes and communications nodes, links, and sensors that
should not be targeted in order for Orangeland to col-
lect and analyze the deception plan indicators?
b. (U) What is the Orangeland HUMINT capability in the

MEF rear area?
3. (U) Upon Implementation of the Order
a. (U) What is the disposition of the 102 d and 103 d Ar-

mored Brigades?
b. (U) What is the status of NOG communications links

that are not being targeted due to deception plan re-
quirements?
c. (U) What deception plan information is being passed

to the NOG from Orangeland?
d. (U) Where is the NOG commander located?
C-3-A-2-A-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-156 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Col., USMC
AC/S, G-3
C-3-A-2-A-2
UNCLASSIFIED
Example of Appendix 18 (Operations Overlay) to Annex C
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
APPENDIX 18 TO ANNEX C TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERA-

TION SHARP SWORD) (U)
OPERATIONS OVERLAY (U)
(Note: Enemy units and locations are shown for illustration Annex C
purposes only. Normally these are provided on an intelli-
gence overlay.)
C-18-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-158 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Col., USMC
AC/S, G-3
C-18-2
UNCLASSIFIED
Example of Annex D (Logistics/Combat Service Support)
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
ANNEX D TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION SHARP

SWORD) (U)
LOGISTICS/COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT (U)
(U) REFERENCES:
(c) MLC Blueland OPORD 0001-02, 15 Apr 2001
(d) Maps and Charts: Series ONC, sheets G-2 (ORANGE-
1:250,000.
(e) Joint Pub 4-01, Joint Doctrine for the Defense
Transportation System
(f) Joint Pub 5-0, Doctrine for Planning Joint Opera-
tions
(g) DoD Directive 4000.19, Defense Regional Inter-
Service Support Regulation
(h) DoD Directive 4410.6, Uniform Material Movement and
Issue Priority System (UMMIPS)
(i) DoD 4140.25M, Procedures for the Management of
Petroleum Products
(j) OPNAVINST 4740.2, Salvage and Recovery System
(k) MCDP 4, Logistics
(l) MCWP 0-1, Marine Corps Operations
(m) MCWP 0-1.1, Componency
(n) MCWP 4-1, Logistics Operations
(o) MCWP 4-11.6, Bulk Liquids Operations
(U) TIME ZONE: Zulu
1. (U) Situation
a. (U) Enemy Forces. See Annex B (Intelligence).
b. (U) Friendly. See Basic Order and Annex A (Task Or-

ganization).
D-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-160 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
c. (U) Infrastructure. See Annex B (Intelligence). In-
frastructure within the AOR will be limited due to the
relative lack of modernization within Blueland. Host
nation support will include water; A-rations; APOD and/
or SPOD support; petroleum, oil, and lubricants (POLs);
transportation; limited construction equipment and sup-
plies; and skilled and unskilled labor. Blueland will
also provide assistance with EPWs, detainees, and refu-
gee issues.
d. (U) Attachments and Detachments. See Annex A (Task

Organization).
e. (U) Assumptions. Limited host nation support will

be made available, to include SPODS, APODS, bulk liq-
uids, limited transportation, and services. Force de-
ployment will be incremental and significant strategic
prepositioned assets will be committed to this opera-
tion.
f. (U) Resource Availability
(1) (U) All MSCs will notify this headquarters (AC/

(AC/S G-4) immediately whenever resources are found
to be inadequate to support operations. The report
will state the degree of support that can be provid-
ed and recommend appropriate alternatives.
(2) (U) Water. Processed, medically-certified wa-

ter will be provided by Blueland. Distribution as-
sets are not available from Blueland. Water will be
issued at APOD and/or SPOD and other distribution
points as they are established.
(3) (U) A-rations. Annex P (Host Nation Support).
(4) (U) APOD/SPOD Support. Annex P (Host Nation

Support).
(5) (U) POL. Host nation POL is available in limited

quantities. Annex P (Host Nation Support).
(6) (U) Transportation. Adequate transportation as-

sets are available throughout Blueland, to include
road networks, rail lines, and a developed trucking
industry. Due to expected enemy infiltration of spe-
cial operations forces within Blueland, some disrup-
tion of the transportation network can be expected.
D-2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(7) (U) Construction. The construction industry in
Blueland is moderately developed. However, some pro-
duction facilities have been sabotaged by terror-
ists. The remaining construction assets are limited.
(8) (U) Labor. The majority of the skilled labor has

been contracted and is currently committed. Un-
skilled labor is readily available and can be re-
quested through the MEF G-4.
(9) (U) MSR Maintenance. The host nation will pro-

vide the majority of MSR road maintenance repairs
and minor bridge repairs required between APOD and/
or SPOD and operations areas, but not MSR repair
within the forward operations area. The MEF is re-
sponsible for road maintenance within its area of
operation.
(10) (U) Runway Repair. The host nation will provide

limited deliberate runway repair at existing air
bases. See Appendix 5 (Civil Engineering Support
Plan) to Annex D (Logistics/Combat Service Support).
(11) (U) Ports. Eighty percent (80%) of port infra-

structure capabilities will be available to support
U.S. forces. Host nation personnel will be available
to support port operations, and they will conduct
Annex D
those port operations not in support of movement of
military cargo.
(12) (U) Ammunition Constraints. CSR will be pub-

lished for major ground weapon systems and for avia-
tion ordnance.
g. (U) Planning Factors. Use approved planning factors

and formulas, except when theater experience or local
conditions dictate otherwise. When deviating from rou-
tine planning factors, identify the factors used and
the reason for such use.
2. (U) Mission. Provide timely and responsive logistics

and combat service support to I MEF forces in order to con-
duct offensive operations and defeat enemy forces in zone.
3. (U) Execution
a. (U) Concept of Logistics and Combat Service Sup-

port. Logistics and combat service support will be
D-3
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-162 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
provided in accordance with the operation’s concept of
operations.
(1) (U) Phase I. Prior to the commencement of ground

operations, the MEF will conduct shaping operations
to set the conditions for combat operations. Maneu-
ver units will maintain one day of supply (DOS)/day
of ammunition (DOA). During shaping, critical sup-
plies (I, III, and V) will be prepositioned at a
forward CSSA in the vicinity of 3 d MARDIV rear. Pri-
ority of support is to 3d MAW.
(2) (U) Phase II
(a) (U) Stage A. Logistic support will contin-

ue to be pushed into the area of operation by
the MLC. Direct combat service support will be
pushed forward to the mobile CSSDs and the for-
ward CSSA. The 1st FSSG will continue to push
combat service support south and form a second
forward CSSA. Priority of CSS is to 1 st MARDIV.
(b) (U) Stage B. The 1st FSSG will begin estab-

lishing a third CSSA, while general combat ser-
vice support flows primarily through the first
two CSSAs. Priority of CSS is to 1 st MARDIV.
(3) (U) Phase III. 1 st FSSG efforts to rearm, refit,

and resupply the MEF becomes the MEF main effort.
CSS will flow primarily through the CSSAs. Priority
of support is to 3d MARDIV.
b. (U) Tasks
st
(1) (U) 1 FSSG
(a) (U) Task organize units to provide general

and direct combat service support, as appropri-
ate, to MEF units during all three phases.
(b) (U) Provide a CSSE to SPMAGTF-B for am-

phibious operations.
(c) (U) Provide CSS element to support securi-

ty operations, to include the TCF, in the MEF
rear area.
(d) (U) Establish the logistic movement con-

trol center (LMCC).
D-4
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(e) (U) Be prepared to accept EPWs from other
MEF units.
(f) (U) Be prepared to construct and maintain

temporary EPW, enemy deserters, civilian in-
ternees, and detainees facilities. ARFOR-B is
assigned theater responsibility for nontempo-
rary facilities and as rapidly as possible
these personnel will be transferred to MLC
holding facilities.
(g) (U) Be prepared to provide limited logis-

tical support to military civic action in the
area of operation.
(h) (U) Be prepared to provide mortuary af-

fairs support as specified in Appendix 8 (Ser-
vices).
(i) (U) Ensure Marine CSSDs maintain two DOS/

DOA in selected classes of supply. The CSSAs
will maintain three DOS/DOA.
(j) (U) Develop and submit a concept for bulk

POL distribution to the MEF (G-4).
st d
(2) (U) 1 MARDIV and 3 MARDIV. Through employ-
ment of organic capabilities, maintain self-
Annex D
sufficiency in all CSS functional areas to the maxi-
mum extent possible. Coordinate resupply/support re-
quirements with 1 st FSSG as required. Ensure
sufficient mobility for CSS trains. Ensure one DOS/
DOA is available via organic combat service support
capabilities.
(3) (U) 3d MAW. Maintain self-sufficiency in all

combat service support functional areas, to include
aviation peculiar logistic support, through employ-
ment of organic capabilities. Conduct intermediate-
level aviation maintenance support operations aboard
assigned T-AVB in support of aircraft logistic sup-
port requirements. Coordinate resupply and support
requirements via established aviation logistic sup-
port channels or MLC as appropriate. Closely monitor
stock of PGMs. Be prepared to establish and maintain
D-5
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-164 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
FARPs and forward operating bases to support offen-
sive operations.
a. (U) Logistics and Combat Service Support
(1) (U) Supply. The concept of support is built upon

organic resupply from CSSAs via task-organized
Marine CSSDs following in trace of the maneuver ele-
ments. The CSSAs will be supported from the MLC via
NAVFOR-B and host nation support barges and liter-
age, as well as line haul resupply.
(a) (U) Distribution and Allocation
1 (U) APODs and/or SPODs are established

in the communications zone.
2 (U) APODs and/or SPODs will be estab-
lished in the vicinity of the second and
third CSSAs.
3 (U) Current logistic policies and direc-
tives remain in effect.
4 (U) Interservice and interdepartmental
agency agreements will be used in accor-
dance with applicable regulations.
5 (U) Organic resupply will be obtained
from 1 st FSSG in the CSSA.
6 (U) Transportation priority of effort is
for classes I, III, V, and MEDEVACs.
(b) (U) Level of Supply
1 (U) Forces will deploy with required in-

dividual equipment and supplies.
2 (U) Requisitioning and resupply will be
sourced through the MLC. All commanders
will observe the Uniform Material Movement
and Issue Priority System (UMMIPS). See
reference (f).
3 (U) Critical items of supply have been
identified below. MSCs will maintain usage
data and stock levels of these critical
D-6
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
items which include Class I, III (JP-8), V,
VII, and blood products.
l (U) Class I. Water
l (U) Class III. JP-8
l (U) Class V(G).
A974 CTG, 25MM APDS-T LINKED

A975 CTG, 25MM HEI-T LINKED
B542 CTG, 40MM HEDP LINKED FOR MK 19
CIS80 CTG, 120MM APFSDS-T
C791 CTG, 120MM HEAT-MP-T (AA)
D501 PROJ, 155MM APERS ADAM-L
D502 PROJ, 155MM APERS ADAM-S
D510 PROJ, 155MM COPPERHEAD
D514 PROJ, 155MM RAAM-S
D515 PROJ, 155MM RAAM-L
J143 ROCKET MOTOR, 5-INCH
M913 CHARGE, DEMO LINEAR HE
N659 FUZE, CONCRETE-PIERCING
PL87 GUIDED MISSILE, STINGER
PV47 GUIDED MISSILE, TOW IIA
l (U) Class V(A).
A990 CTG 25MM PGU-32/U, SAPHEI-T
E509 BOMB GP, MK-83 MD 4, 1000 LBS
Annex D
F278 BOMB GP, MK 84 MD 6, 2000 LBS
PB69 GM, AGM-65E (LASER) MAVERICK
PD63 GM, AGM-65F (IIR) MAVERICK
PV30 AGM-114K, HELLFIRE
PV89 AIM-9M-8 SIDEWINDER
PU06 AGM088C-1 HARM
l (U) Class VII. All combat vehicles, fixed-
and rotary-wing aircraft, and howitzers are
critical items.
l (U) Class VIII. Blood and blood plasma prod-
ucts. See Annex Q (Medical Services).
(c) (U) Salvage. Salvage efforts are a MSC re-
sponsibility to the salvage collection points
in the area of operation. General guidance is
contained in reference (e).
(d) (U) Captured Enemy Material. Collection,

classification, and disposition of captured
D-7
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-166 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
enemy material is a MEF responsibility. See An-
nex B (Intelligence).
(e) (U) Local Acquisition of Supplies and Ser-

vices. See reference (b) and Defense Acquisi-
tion Regulations.
1 (U) Local acquisition has been of mixed

reliability, both in desired quality and
quantities. Unskilled labor is available,
but JTF-B is concerned about the prospects
of Orangeland infiltrators.
2 (U) All essential contractor services,
to include new and existing contracts, will
be reviewed to determine which services are
essential to execution. Contingency plans
are under development to ensure the contin-
uation of these services should the rear
area situation deteriorate.
(f) (U) POL. See Appendix 1 (Petroleum, Oils,
and Lubricants Supply).
(2) (U) External Support
(a) (U) General guidance on inter-Service lo-

gistic support is contained in references (b)
and (d). Inter-Service support agreements shall
be governed by reference (e).
(b) (U) Support Agreement (DD Form 1144) will

be initiated by the supporting service as re-
quired.
(c) (U) Agreements will be negotiated at the

lowest level possible. One copy of each agree-
ment completed or forwarded to another service
for action will be forwarded to JTF-B J-4 by the
MEF G-4.
(3) (U) Maintenance
(a) (U) General. Commanders are responsible

for all organizational preventive and correc-
tive maintenance of organic ground equipment.
The 1 st FSSG will task organize to provide
D-8
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
intermediate maintenance support in all commod-
ities. Repairs will be performed as far forward
as possible via maintenance contact teams (MCT)
and/or maintenance support teams (MST). Maximum
use of the maintenance float block for on-site
exchange, vice repair, is encouraged. All main-
tenance and maintenance management will be per-
formed per applicable technical manuals. The 3 d
MAW’s organizational- and intermediate-level
aircraft maintenance, support, and maintenance
management will be performed in accordance with
Naval Aviation Maintenance Program (NAMP) and
Marine Aviation Logistics Support Program (MAL-
SP) directives and technical publications. See
Appendix 12 (Maintenance).
(b) (U) Specific Guidance
1 (U) Receiving units will conduct limited

technical inspections (LTIs) and SL-3 in-
ventories on all replacement equipment.
Commanders will ensure that sufficient
technical personnel are assigned to perform
LTIs. Equipment will be operationally ready
and SL-3 complete to the maximum extent
possible.
Annex D
2 (U) Recovery of immobile, inoperative,
or abandoned material is the responsibility
of the using unit.
3 (U) Cannibalization and selective inter-
change is authorized for any combat-
essential equipment that is in category
red.
(a) (U) General. The MEF will establish a

force movement control center (FMCC) to ensure
transportation movement per operational re-
quirements and priorities established by the
MEF COC.
(b) (U) Mobility Support Force and Movement

Feasibility Analysis. The MEF has sufficient
lift resources to execute the required movement
D-9
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-168 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
and transportation tasks. An analysis of rede-
ployment requirements is currently underway.
(5) (U) General Engineering Support Plan. See Ap-

pendix 13 (General Engineering).
(6) (U) Health Services. ARFOR-B is the single item

manager for theater Class VIII support. See
Appendix 9 (Health Services).
(7) (U) Services. See Appendix 8 (Services).
(8) (U) Mortuary Affairs. See Appendix 2 (Mortuary

Affairs).
(9) (U) Ammunition. See Appendix 6 (Nonnuclear Am-

munition).
(10) (U) Aviation Logistic Support. See Appendix 10

(Aviation Logistic Support).
(11) (U) OPSEC Planning Guidance for Logistics.

Maintaining OPSEC in the planning, preparation, and
execution of combat service support is critical to
the success of our mission. Ensure that all logistic
activities promote essential secrecy for operational
intentions, capabilities that will be committed to
specific missions, and preparatory activities. Our
logistic facilities and installations, as well as
our resupply LOCs, must be securely maintained. Ac-
cordingly, MSC commanders will take measures to en-
sure logistic activities provide essential secrecy
of operational intentions.
b. (U) Administration
(1) (U) MSC logistic reports will be incorporated

into the daily SITREP.
(2) (U) Use the following daily SITREP format/in-

structions for daily logistic reporting. Provide lo-
gistic status comments in each category shown below:
G = green, operationally capable
A = amber, operationally capable with significant
limitation (remarks required)
R = red, not operationally capable (remarks
required)
N = not applicable
D-10
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Status= current status
Day X = projected status by day
Category/status/day 1/day 2/day 3/day 4/days 5-7/
days 8-15/days 16-30/
a. (U) Command Relationships. See Annex J (Command Re-
lationships) for command and control relationships ex-
ternal to logistical units.
b. (U) Communications and Information Systems. See An-

nex K (Combat Information Systems) for detailed CIS re-
quirements.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
APPENDIXES:
1 – Petroleum, Oils, and Lubricants Supply
2 – Mortuary Affairs
3 – Sustainability Analysis
4 – Mobility and Transportation
Annex D
5 – Civil Engineering Support Plan
6 – Nonnuclear Ammunition
7 - Supply
8 - Services
9 - Health Services
10 - Aviation Logistic Support (Normally provided in the
aviation combat example plan or order.
11 - External Support
12 - Maintenance
13 - General Engineering
OFFICIAL:
s/
C. L. JOHNSON
Col., USMC
AC/S, G-4
D-11
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-170 MCWP 5-1

Example of Annex J (Command Relationships)
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
ANNEX J TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION

SHARP SWORD) (U)
COMMAND RELATIONSHIPS (U)
(U) REFERENCES:
1:250,000.
(d) Joint Pub 0-2, Unified Action Armed Forces (UNAAF)
(e) Joint Pub 3-0, Doctrine for Joint Operations
(f) Joint Pub 5-0, Doctrine for Planning Joint Opera-
tions
(g) MCWP 0-1, Marine Corps Operations
(h) MCWP 0-1.1, Componency
(i) MCWP 5-1, Marine Corps Planning Process
(U) TIME ZONE: Zulu
1. (U) General
a. (U) Purpose. To establish the command relationships

between CG, I MEF and supported and supporting commands
Annex J
in accordance with references (a) and (b).
b. (U) Scope. This annex is applicable only for the du-

ration of Operation Sharp Sword operations as directed
by reference (a). The command relationships contained
in this annex are effective immediately.
2. (U) Command Lines
a. (U) Service and Functional Components
J-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-172 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
(1) (U) MARFOR-B maintains operational command of
all assigned Marine Corps units through the command-
ers of the MEF and the MLC.
(2) (U) MARFOR-B maintains administrative control

of all Marine forces in theater, including SPMAGTF-
SPMAGTF-B, and 15th MEU (SOC).
(3) (U) CG, I MEF is designated MARFOR-B executive

agent for air operations planning and execution,
DIRLAUTH JFACC. Commander, MLC will submit and coor-
dinate air support requests via CG, I MEF.
b. (U) Other Subordinate Commands. See Annex A (Task

Organization).
c. (U) Augmentation Forces. None.
d. (U) Alternate Procedures. In the event that CG, I

MEF is incapable of carrying out the responsibilities
of command, DCG, I MEF will assume command. In the
event of that the MEF COC cannot command and control
combat operations, the 3d MAW COC will be utilized by
the MEF commander as the interim MEF COC.
3. (U) Support and Coordination Relationships
a. (U) Supporting Military Forces
(1) (U) ARFOR-B
(2) (U) NAVFOR-B
(3) (U) AFFOR-B
(4) (U) MARFORPAC
(5) (U) MARFORRES
b. (U) Coordinating Authorities. MARFOR-B will conduct

necessary coordination with the following authorities:
(1) (U) The JTF-B Joint Rear Area Coordinator is the

coordinating authority for force protection and op-
erations in the communications zone.
(2) (U) ARFOR-B has been designated executive agent

for rear area operations in the COMMZ. ARFOR-B exer-
cises this responsibility through the Commander,
213th Theater Support Command.
J-2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
(3) (U) AFFOR-B has been designated as JFACC, AADC,
ACA, MDC, and JSRC. AFFOR-B is responsible for air
base operations in theater.
(4) (U) NAVFOR-B is responsible for all naval ac-

tivities in the JOA.
(5) (U) JFPOCC is responsible for theater-wide

planning, coordination, and execution of PSYOP.
(6) (U) CG, MLC is responsible for operational lo-

gistics sustainment of MARFOR-B forces.
(7) (U) The MEF rear area commander is responsible

for all MEF rear area operations.
c. (U) Supporting Agencies. See references (a) and

(b).
d. (U) Inter-Service Support Arrangements. See Annex D

(Logistics/Combat Service Support).
e. (U) Coordination with Diplomatic Agencies. Coordi-

nation with the Blueland Chief of Mission and military
attaches will be done through CJTF-B in accordance with
reference (a).
4. (U) Relationships with International and Foreign Com-

mands and Organizations. MARFOR-B will exchange liaison
with appropriate Blueland force organizations.
5. (U) Planning Relationships
a. (U) JTF-B JTCB. MARFOR-B will participate in the

JTCB. I MEF will submit its target nominations to
MARFOR-B.
Annex J
b. (U) ARFOR-B. I MEF has DIRLAUTH for coordination of
cross boundary fires and maneuver and logistical sup-
port of Army units.
c. (U) NAVFOR-B. I MEF has DIRLAUTH for NSFS, embarked

aircraft operations, and amphibious operations plan-
ning. SPMAGTF-B has DIRLAUTH for amphibious planning
with NAVFOR-B.
d. (U) AFFOR-B. I MEF has DIRLAUTH for ATO planning and

execution, airspace control, air defense, SAR, and air-
base operations.
J-3
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-174 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
e. (U) JSOTF-B. I MEF has DIRLAUTH for placement and
support of search and rescue teams in or adjacent to
the MEF AO and aviation support.
f. (U) JFPOCC. I MEF has DIRLAUTH for PSYOP planning

and execution.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
APPENDIX:
1 – Command Relationships Diagram
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Col., USMC
AC/S, G-3
J-4
UNCLASSIFIED
Example of Appendix 1 (Command Relationships Diagram) to Annex J
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
APPENDIX 1 TO ANNEX J TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION

SHARP SWORD) (U)
COMMAND RELATIONSHIPS DIAGRAM (U)
Annex J
J-1-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-176 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Col., USMC
AC/S, G-3
J-1-2
UNCLASSIFIED
Example of Annex X (Execution Checklist)
UNCLASSIFIED
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
ANNEX X TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION

SHARP SWORD) (U)
EXECUTION CHECKLIST (U)
TIME ZONE: Zulu
ACTION HEADQUARTERS TIMING CONDITIONS

d
C2W attack 3 MAW Phase I 102 and 103d
d
against through Armored Brigades
selected NOG Phase II and 401 st and 402d
command and Artillery Regi-
control nodes ments unable to
pass information to
NOG COC.
Isolate MEF 3d MAW D-Day - D+2, Units larger than
battlespace Phase II battalion unable to
from reinforce- move north.
ment from the
south
Main attack 1st MARDIV D+2, Phase Orangeland recon-
II, Stage A naissance screen
destroyed, first
echelon engaged.
Supporting 3d MARDIV D+2-Hour, Shaping operations
attack Phase II completed, initial
barriers breached,
Phaseline Green
reached.
Establishment 1st FSSG D+4, Phase 4 DOS of required
of forward CSSA II, Stage A classes of supply
on hand.
Link-up with 3d MARDIV Phase II, Physical link up at
Blueland forces Stage B battalion level.
in Tealton
Defeat of the 1st MAW Phase II 102 d and 103d
102d and 103d Stage B Armored Brigades
Armored unable to conduct
Annex X
Brigades operations at bat-

talion or higher
level.
X-1
UNCLASSIFIED
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-178 MCWP 5-1
UNCLASSIFIED
ACTION HEADQUARTERS TIMING CONDITIONS

st
Opening of SPOD 1 FSSG On order, SPOD and/or APOD
and/or APOD at Phase II, able to handle
Gray City Stage B throughput of 3 DOS
(FRAGO 3 for per day.
branch plan
CONDOR applies)
Link up with 3d MARDIV On order, Physical link up at
SPMAGTF-B in Phase II, the battalion
vicinity of Stage B level.
Gray City
Pursuit opera- 3d MAW Phase III NOG unable to con-
tions to duct operations at
destroy with- battalion or higher
drawing enemy level.
forces
Restoration of 1st MARDIV; 3d Phase III NOG units larger
the border MARDIV than platoon size
unable to cross the
border, reconnais-
sance screen in
place, and border
posts turned over
to Blueland
authorities.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
GERALD C. THOMAS
Commanding
OFFICIAL:
s/
M.B. TWINING
Col., USMC
AC/S, G-3
X-2
UNCLASSIFIED
Appendix H
Glossary
Section I. Acronyms
A
AAA....................................................................................... antiaircraft artillery
AADC .......................................................................area air defense commander
ACA ..............................................................................airspace control authority
ACE ............................................................................... aviation combat element
AFC.................................................................................. all-source fusion center
AFFOR-B....................................................................Air Force Forces-Blueland
AO.............................................................................................area of operations
AOI ................................................................................................area of interest
APOD............................................................................ aerial port of debarkation
ARFOR-B .........................................................................Army Forces-Blueland
ATO ............................................................................................ air tasking order
B
bn .............................................................................................................battalion
BSDF .....................................................................Blueland Self-Defense Forces
C
C2........................................................................................command and control
C2W ...................................................................... command and control warfare
CAS............................................................................................. close air support
CBAE...................................................commander’s battlespace area evaluation
CCIR ..........................................commander’s critical information requirements
CG ........................................................................................commanding general
CHOP......................................................................change of operational control
CIC.............................................................................. combat information center
CJCSM.......................................... Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff manual
CJTF-B.................................................. Commander, Joint Task Force-Blueland
COA ............................................................................................. course of action
COC .............................................................................. combat operations center
COG ............................................................................................ center of gravity
CONPLAN.......................................................operations plan in concept format
CSAR ............................................................................combat search and rescue
CSR .....................................................................................controlled supply rate
CSS .................................................................................. combat service support
CSSA ........................................................................combat service support area
CSSD ............................................................ combat service support detachment
CSSE ...................................................................combat service support element
H-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
D
DCG ......................................................................... deputy commanding general
det........................................................................................................ detachment
DIRLAUTH ....................................................................direct liaison authorized
DOA........................................................................................ day of ammunition
DOS .................................................................................................day of supply
E
ELINT ...............................................................................electronics intelligence
EMCON ...................................................................................... emission control
EPW .................................................................................. enemy prisoner of war
EW ............................................................................................electronic warfare
F
FARP ...........................................................forward arming and refueling points
FASCAM ................................................................... family of scatterable mines
FMCC .................................................................. force movement control center
FMFM ........................................................................ Fleet Marine Force manual
FRAGO .....................................................................................fragmentary order
FSCL .......................................................................fire support coordination line
FSCM.............................................................. fire support coordination measure
FSSG ..........................................................................force service support group
G
GCE .................................................................................ground combat element
H
HF ................................................................................................. high frequency
HQMC ...............................................Headquarters, United States Marine Corps
HMH ...............................................................Marine heavy helicopter squadron
HML/A................................................... Marine light/attack helicopter squadron
HMM .......................................................... Marine medium helicopter squadron
HUMINT ................................................................................ human intelligence
I
I&W ..................................................................................indication and warning
IADS ....................................................................... integrated air defense system
IMINT ...................................................................................imagery intelligence
INTSUM .............................................................................intelligence summary
IO ...................................................................................... information operations
IPB ......................................................intelligence preparation of the battlespace
Marine Corps Planning Process ________________________________________________________________________________ H-3
J
JAO ..................................................................................joint area of operations
JCSE...................................................... Joint Communications Support Element
JFACC ...................................................... joint force air component commander
JIPTL ................................................ Joint Integrated and Prioritized Target List
JISE ............................................................... Joint Intelligence Support Element
JOPES .......................................Joint Operation Planning and Execution System
JSOTF-B ......................................Joint Special Operations Task Force-Blueland
JSRC ...................................................................Joint Search and Rescue Center
JTF-B .......................................................................... Joint Task Force-Blueland
L
LAAD .............................................................................. low altitude air defense
LMCC ...............................................................logistic movement control center
LOC ............................................................................... lines of communications
LTI .......................................................................... limited technical inspection
M
MACG ........................................................................... Marine air control group
MACS .......................................................................Marine air control squadron
MAG ................................................................................... Marine aircraft group
MAGTF .................................................................. Marine air-ground task force
MALS ............................................................ Marine aviation logistics squadron
MALSP ...........................................Marine Aviation Logistics Support Program
MARDIV ..................................................................................... Marine division
MARFOR-B....................................................................Marine Forces-Blueland
MARFORRES ....................................................... Marine Corps Forces Reserve
MASINT ................................................ measurement and signature intelligence
MAW ................................................................................... Marine aircraft wing
MCDP ........................................................... Marine Corps doctrinal publication
MCO ...................................................................................... Marine Corps order
MCPM ............................................................... Marine Corps Planner’s Manual
MCPP.................................................................. Marine Corps Planning Process
MCRP ...........................................................Marine Corps reference publication
MCT............................................................................. maintenance contact team
MCWP ......................................................Marine Corps warfighting publication
MEF ...........................................................................Marine expeditionary force
METT-T.......................mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support
available-time available
MLC..........................................................................Marine Logistics Command
MOE............................................................................... measure of effectiveness
MOPP............................................................ mission-oriented protective posture
MOUT...........................................................military operations on urban terrain
MPF .......................................................................maritime prepositioning force
MPS ........................................................................ maritime prepositioning ship
MSC .........................................................................major subordinate command
H-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
MSL ............................................................................................... mean sea level

MST .............................................................................maintenance support team
MTACS....................................................Marine tactical air command squadron
MWCS ...................................................Marine wing communications squadron
MWHS ......................................................... Marine wing headquarters squadron
MWSG .......................................................................Marine wing support group
MWSS.................................................................. Marine wing support squadron
N
NAI .................................................................................... named area of interest
NAMP .......................................................Naval Aviation Maintenance Program
NAVFOR-B ...................................................................... Navy Forces-Blueland
NLT.................................................................................................. not later than
nm .....................................................................................................nautical mile
NOG......................................................................... Northern Operational Group
NSFS .............................................................................naval surface fire support
O
OPCON ................................................................................... operational control
OPLAN ...........................................................................................operation plan
OPORD ......................................................................................... operation order
OPSEC .................................................................................... operations security
P
PA .................................................................................................... public affairs
PDE&A ........................................ planning, decision, execution, and assessment
PGM...........................................................................precision-guided munitions
PIR .....................................................................priority intelligence requirement
PL.......................................................................................................... phase line
POL ....................................................................... petroleum, oils, and lubricants
PRF ..............................................................................pulse repetition frequency
PSYOP ............................................................................ psychological operation
R
RACP .............................................................................. rear area command post
RCC ............................................................................ rescue coordination center
RCT................................................................................ regimental landing team
RFA.......................................................................................... restricted fire area
RFI ................................................................................... request for information
RLT ................................................................................ regimental landing team
S
SHF ..................................................................................... super-high frequency
SIGINT ...................................................................................signals intelligence
SIPRNET .................................................secret internet protocol router network
SITREP ......................................................................................... situation report

SOP .........................................................................standing operating procedure
SPMAGTF-B .................................................special purpose MAGTF-Blueland
SPOD .................................................................................seaport of debarkation
SR....................................................................................strategic reconnaissance
T
TAI .................................................................................targeted area of interest
TCF .....................................................................................tactical combat force
TCO ............................................................................ tactical combat operations
TGTINFOREP ...............................................................target information report
THREATCON ............................................................... terrorist threat condition
TPFDD................................................... time-phased force and deployment data
U
UHF ......................................................................................ultra high frequency
UMMIPS.......................Uniform Material Movement and Issue Priority System
USCINCPAC ...............................United States, Commander in Chief, Pacific
Command
V
VMA ................................................................................Marine attack squadron
VMAQ .............................................Marine tactical electronic warfare squadron
VMFA ..................................................................Marine fighter/attack squadron
VMFA(AW)................................... Marine fighter/attack (all weather) squadron
VMGR .................................................Marine aerial refueler transport squadron
VMU .................................................. Marine unmanned aerial vehicle squadron
X
XO.............................................................................................. executive officer
H-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Section II. Definitions
A
acceptability—Operation plan review criterion. The determination whether the
contemplated course of action is worth the cost in manpower, material, and time
involved; is consistent with the law of war; and militarily and politically sup-
portable. (Joint Pub 1-02)
alert order—1. A crisis-action planning directive from the Secretary of De-
fense, issued by the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, that provides essential
guidance for planning and directs the initiation of execution planning for the se-
lected course of action authorized by the Secretary of Defense. 2. A planning di-
rective that provides essential planning guidance and directs the initiation of
execution planning after the directing authority approves a military course of ac-
tion. An alert order does not authorize execution of the approved course of ac-
tion. (Joint Pub 1-02)
area of influence—A geographical area wherein a commander is directly capa-
ble of influencing operations by maneuver or fire support systems normally un-
der the commander’s command or control. (Joint Pub 1-02)
area of interest—That area of concern to the commander, including the area of
influence, areas adjacent thereto, and extending into enemy territory to the ob-
jectives of current or planned operations. This area also includes areas occupied
by enemy forces who could jeopardize the accomplishment of the mission.
(Joint Pub 1-02)
area of operations—An operational area defined by the joint force commander
for land and naval forces. Areas of operation do not typically encompass the en-
tire operational area of the joint force commander, but should be large enough
for component commanders to accomplish their missions and protect their
forces. (Joint Pub 1-02)
assumption—A supposition on the current situation or a presupposition on the
future course of events, either or both assumed to be true in the absence of posi-
tive proof, necessary to enable the commander in the process of planning to
complete an estimate of the situation and make a decision on the course of ac-
tion. (Joint Pub 1-02)
avenue of approach—An air or ground route of an attacking force of a given
size leading to its objective or to key terrain in its path. (Joint Pub 1-02)
B
battlespace—1. All aspects of air, surface, subsurface, land, space, and electro-
magnetic spectrum which encompass the area of influence and area of interest.
(MCRP 5-12C) 2. The environment factors and conditions which must be un-
derstood to successfully apply combat power, protect the force, or complete the
mission. This includes the air, land, sea, space and the included enemy and
friendly forces, facilities, weather, terrain, the electromagnetic spectrum and the
information environment within the operational areas and areas of interest. (pro-
posed for Joint Pub 1-02)
branch(es)—A contingency plan or course of action (an option built into the
basic plan or course of action) for changing the mission, disposition, orientation,
or direction of movement of the force to aid success of the operation based on
anticipated events, opportunities, or disruptions caused by enemy actions.
(MCRP 5-12C)
C
campaign—A series of related military operations aimed at accomplishing a
strategic or operational objective within a given time and space. (Joint Pub 1-02)
centers of gravity—Those characteristics, capabilities, or localities from which
a military force derives its freedom of action, physical strength, or will to fight.
(Joint Pub 1-02)
collection plan—A plan for collecting information from all available sources to
meet intelligence requirements and for transforming those requirements into or-
ders and requests to appropriate agencies. (Joint Pub 1-02)
commander’s critical information requirements—Information regarding the
enemy and friendly activities and the environment identified by the commander
as critical to maintaining situational awareness, planning future activities, and
facilitating timely decisionmaking. Also called CCIR. Note: CCIRs are nor-
mally divided into three primary subcategories: priority intelligence require-
ments, friendly force information requirements, and essential elements of
friendly information. (MCRP 5-12C)
commander’s estimate of the situation—A logical process of reasoning by
which a commander considers all the circumstances affecting the military situa-
tion and arrives at a decision as to a course of action to be taken to accomplish
the mission. (Joint Pub 1-02)
commander’s intent—A commander’s clear, concise articulation of the pur-
pose(s) behind one or more tasks assigned to a subordinate. It is one of two parts
of every mission statement which guides the exercise of initiative in the absence
of instructions. (MCRP 5-12C)
H-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
concept of operations—A verbal or graphic statement, in broad outline, of a

commander’s assumptions or intent in regard to an operation or series of opera-
tions. The concept of operations frequently is embodied in campaign plans and
operation plans; in the latter case, particularly when the plans cover a series of
connected operations to be carried out simultaneously or in succession. The con-
cept is designed to give an overall picture of the operation. It is included prima-
rily for additional clarity of purpose. Also called commander’s concept. (Joint
Pub 1-02)
concept plan—An operation plan in concept format. Also called CONPLAN.
(Joint Pub 1-02)
contingency—An emergency involving military forces caused by natural disas-
ters, terrorists, subversives, or by required military operations. Due to the uncer-
tainty of the situation, contingencies require plans, rapid response, and special
procedures to ensure the safety and readiness of personnel, installations, and
equipment. (Joint Pub 1-02)
contingency plan—A plan for major contingencies that can reasonably be an-
ticipated in the principal geographic sub areas of the command. (Joint Pub 1-02)
crisis action planning—1. The JOPES process involving time-sensitive devel-
opment of joint operation plans and orders in response to an imminent crisis.
Crisis action planning follows prescribed crisis action procedures to formulate
and implement an effective response within the time frame permitted by the cri-
sis. 2. The time-sensitive planning for deployment, employment, and sustain-
ment of assigned and allocated forces and resources that occurs in response to a
situation that may result in actual military operations. Crisis action planners
base their plan on the circumstances that exist at the time planning occurs. (Joint
Pub 1-02)
critical vulnerability—An aspect of a center of gravity that, if exploited, will
do the most significant damage to an adversary’s ability to resist. A vulnerabili-
ty cannot be critical unless it undermines a key strength. (MCRP 5-12C)
D
decision point—An event, area, or point in the battlespace where and when
the friendly commander will make a critical decision. Also called DP.
(MCRP 5-12C)
decision support template—A staff product initially used in the wargaming
process which graphically represents the decision points and projected situa-
tions and indicates when, where, and under what conditions a decision is most
likely to be required to initiate a specific activity (such as a branch or sequel) or
event (such as lifting or shifting of fires). (MCRP 5-2A)
deliberate planning—1. The JOPES process involving the development of

joint operation plans for contingencies identified in joint strategic planning doc-
uments. Conducted principally in peacetime, deliberate planning is accom-
plished in prescribed cycles that complement other Department of Defense
planning cycles in accordance with the formally established Joint Strategic
Planning System. 2. A planning process for the deployment and employment of
apportioned forces and resources that occurs in response to a hypothetical situa-
tion. Deliberate planners rely heavily on assumptions regarding the circum-
stances that will exist when the plan is executed. (Joint Pub 1-02)
direction of attack—A specific direction or route that the main attack or center
of mass of the unit will follow. The unit is restricted, required to attack as indi-
cated, and is not normally allowed to bypass the enemy. The direction of attack
is used primarily in counterattacks or to ensure that supporting attacks make
maximal contribution to the main attack. (Joint Pub 1-02)
doctrinal template—A model based on postulated enemy tactical doctrine. It
generally portrays frontage depths, echelon spacing, and force composition as
well as his disposition of combat, combat support and combat service support
units for a given type of operation. It portrays how the enemy would like to fight
if he was not constrained. (MCRP 5-2A)
E
endstate—1. What the National Command Authorities want the situation to be
when operations conclude—both military operations, as well as those where
the military is in support of other instruments of national power. (Joint Pub
1-02) 2. A set of required conditions that, when achieved, attain the aims set for
the campaign or operation. (MCRP 5-2A)
essential elements of friendly information—Key questions likely to be asked
by adversary officials and intelligence systems about specific friendly inten-
tions, capabilities, and activities, so they can obtain answers critical to their op-
erational effectiveness. Also called EEFI. (Joint Pub 1-02)
event template—A model against which enemy activity can be recorded and
compared. It represents a sequential projection of events that relate to space and
time on the battlefield and indicate the enemy’s ability to adopt a particular
course of action. It is a guide for collection and reconnaissance and surveillance
planning. (MCRP 5-2A)
execute order—1. An order issued by the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff,
by the authority and at the direction of the Secretary of Defense, to implement a
National Command Authorities decision to initiate military operations. 2. An or-
der to initiate military operations as directed. (Joint Pub 1-02)
H-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
F
feasibility—Operation plan review criterion. The determination of whether the
assigned tasks could be accomplished by using available resources. (Joint Pub
1-02)
fragmentary order—An abbreviated form of an operation order, usually issued
on a day-to-day basis, that eliminates the need for restating information con-
tained in the basic operation order. It may be issued in sections. (Joint Pub
1-02)
friendly force information requirements—Information the commander needs
about friendly forces in order to develop plans and make effective decisions.
Depending upon the circumstances, information on unit location, composition,
readiness, personnel status, and logistics status could become a friendly force
information requirement. Also called FFIR. (MCRP 5-12C)
H
high-payoff target—Target whose loss to the threat will contribute to the suc-
cess of the friendly COA. (MCRP 5-2A)
high-value target—Assets that the threat commander requires for the success-
ful completion of a specific COA. (MCRP 5-2A)
I
intelligence preparation of the battlespace—In Marine Corps usage, the sys-
tematic, continuous process of analyzing the threat and environment in a specif-
ic geographic area. Also called IPB. (MCRP 5-12C)
M
main effort—The designated subordinate unit whose mission at a given point in
time is most critical to overall mission success. It is usually weighted with the
preponderance of combat power and is directed against a center of gravity
through a critical vulnerability. (MCRP 5-12C)
mission—1. The task, together with the purpose, that clearly indicates the action
to be taken and the reason therefor. 2. In common usage, especially when ap-
plied to lower military units, a duty assigned to an individual or unit; a task.
(Joint Pub 1-02)
N
named area of interest—A point or area along a particular avenue of approach
through which enemy activity is expected to occur. Activity or lack of activity
Marine Corps Planning Process ______________________________________________________________________________ H-11
within a named area of interest will help to confirm or deny a particular enemy
course of action. Also called NAI. (MCRP 5-2A)
O
on-order mission—A mission to be executed at an unspecified time in the fu-
ture. (Proposed for inclusion in MCRP 5-12C)
operation order—A directive issued by a commander to subordinate com-
manders for the purpose of effecting the coordinated execution of an operation.
Also called OPORD. (Joint Pub 1-02)
operation plan—Any plan, except for the Single Integrated Operation Plan, for
the conduct of military operations. Plans are prepared by combatant command-
ers in response to requirements established by the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs
of Staff and by commanders of subordinate commands in response to require-
ments tasked by the establishing unified commander. Operation plans are
prepared in either a complete format (OPLAN) or as a concept plan (CON-
PLAN). The CONPLAN can be published with or without a time-phased force
and deployment data (TPFDD) file. a. OPLAN—An operation plan for the con-
duct of joint operations that can be used as a basis for development of an opera-
tion order (OPORD). An OPLAN identifies the forces and supplies required to
execute the CINC’s Strategic Concept and a movement schedule of these re-
sources to the theater of operations. The forces and supplies are identified in
TPFDD files. OPLANs will include all phases of the tasked operation. The plan
is prepared with the appropriate annexes, appendixes, and TPFDD files as
described in the Joint Operation Planning and Execution System manuals
containing planning policies, procedures, and formats. Also called OPLAN.
b. CONPLAN—An operation plan in an abbreviated format that would require
considerable expansion or alteration to convert it into an OPLAN or OPORD. A
CONPLAN contains the CINC’s Strategic Concept and those annexes and ap-
pendixes deemed necessary by the combatant commander to complete planning.
Generally, detailed support requirements are not calculated and TPFDD files are
not prepared. Also called CONPLAN. c. CONPLAN with TPFDD—A CON-
PLAN with TPFDD is the same as a CONPLAN except that it requires more de-
tailed planning for phased deployment of forces. (Joint Pub 1-02)
outline plan—A preliminary plan which outlines the salient features or princi-
ples of a course of action prior to the initiation of detailed planning. (Joint Pub
1-02)
P
priority intelligence requirements—1. Those intelligence requirements for
which a commander has an anticipated and stated priority in his task of planning
and decisionmaking. (Joint Pub 1-02) 2. In Marine Corps usage, an intelligence
requirement associated with a decision that will critically affect the overall suc-
cess of the command’s mission. Also called PIR. (MCRP 5-12C)
H-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
R
rear operations—Military actions conducted to support and permit force sus-
tainment and to provide security for such actions. (MCRP 5-12C)
risk—Chance of hazard or bad consequences: exposure to chance of injury or
loss. Risk level is expressed in terms of hazard probability or severity. (MCRP
5-2A)
S
sequel(s)—Major operations that follow the current major operation. Plans for
these are based on the possible outcomes (success, stalemate, or defeat) associ-
ated with the current operation. (MCRP 5-12C)
situation template— A series of projections that portray, based on enemy doc-
trine, the most probable disposition and location of enemy forces within con-
straints imposed by weather and terrain. (MCRP 5-2A)
suitability—Operation plan review criterion. The determination that the course
of action will reasonably accomplish the identified objectives, mission, or task if
carried out successfully. (Joint Pub 1-02)
supporting effort—Designated subordinate unit(s) whose mission is designed
to directly contribute to the success of the main effort. (MCRP 5-12C)
supporting plan—An operation plan prepared by a supporting commander or a
subordinate commander to satisfy the requests or requirements of the supported
commander’s plan. (Joint Pub 1-02)
synchronization matrix—A format for the staff to record results of wargaming
and synchronize the course of action (COA) across time, space, and purpose in
relation to the enemy’s most likely COA. The staff can readily translate a syn-
chronization matrix into a graphic decisionmaking product such as a decision
support matrix. (MCRP 5-2A)
T
targeted area of interest—The geographical area or point along a mobility cor-
ridor where successful interdiction will cause the enemy to either abandon a par-
ticular course of action or require him to use specialized engineer support to
continue, where he can be acquired and engaged by friendly forces. Not all tar-
geted areas of interest will form part of the friendly course of action; only target-
ed areas of interest associated with high-payoff targets are of interest to the staff.
These are identified during staff planning and wargaming. Targeted areas of in-
terest differ from engagement areas in degree. Engagement areas plan for the
use of all available weapons. Targeted areas of interest might be engaged by a
single weapon. Also called TAI. (MCRP 5-12C)
Marine Corps Planning Process ______________________________________________________________________________ H-13
targeting—1. The process of selecting targets and matching the appropriate

response to them, taking account of operational requirements and capabilities.
2. The analysis of enemy situations relative to the commander’s mission, objec-
tives, and capabilities at the commander’s disposal, to identify and nominate
specific vulnerabilities that, if exploited, will accomplish the commander’s pur-
pose through delaying, disrupting, disabling, or destroying enemy forces or re-
sources critical to the enemy. (Joint Pub 1-02)
times—(C-, D-, M-days end at 2400 hours Universal Time (zulu time) and are
assumed to be 24 hours long for planning.) The Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of
Staff normally coordinates the proposed date with the commanders of the appro-
priate unified and specified commands, as well as any recommended changes to
C-day. L-hour will be established per plan, crisis, or theater of operations and
will apply to both air and surface movements. Normally, L-hour will be estab-
lished to allow C-day to be a 24-hour day. a. C-day. The unnamed day on which
a deployment operation commences or is to commence. The deployment may be
movement of troops, cargo, weapon systems, or a combination of these elements
using any or all types of transport. The letter “C” will be the only one used to de-
note the above. The highest command or headquarters responsible for coordinat-
ing the planning will specify the exact meaning of C-day within the
aforementioned definition. The command or headquarters directly responsible
for the execution of the operation, if other than the one coordinating the plan-
ning, will do so in light of the meaning specified by the highest command or
headquarters coordinating the planning. b. D-day. The unnamed day on which a
particular operation commences or is to commence. c. F-hour. The effective
time of announcement by the Secretary of Defense to the Military Departments
of a decision to mobilize Reserve units. d. H-hour. The specific hour on D-day
at which a particular operation commences. e. L-hour. The specific hour on C-
day at which a deployment operation commences or is to commence. f. M-day.
The term used to designate the unnamed day on which full mobilization com-
mences or is due to commence. g. N-day. The unnamed day an active duty unit
is notified for deployment or redeployment. h. R-day. Redeployment day. The
day on which redeployment of major combat, combat support, and combat ser-
vice support forces begins in an operation. i. S-day. The day the President autho-
rizes Selective Reserve callup (not more than 200,000). j. T-day. The effective
day coincident with Presidential declaration of National Emergency and autho-
rization of partial mobilization (not more than 1,000,000 personnel exclusive of
the 200,000 callup). k. W-day. Declared by the National Command Authorities,
W-day is associated with an adversary decision to prepare for war (unambigu-
ous strategic warning). (Joint Pub 1-02)
trafficability—Capability of terrain to bear traffic. It refers to the extent to
which the terrain will permit continued movement of any and/or all types of
traffic. (Joint Pub 1-02)
H-14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
W
war game—A simulation, by whatever means, of a military operation involving
two or more opposing forces, using rules, data, and procedures designed to de-
pict an actual or assumed real life situation. (Joint Pub 1-02)
wargaming—A step-by-step process of action, reaction, and counteraction for
visualizing the execution of each friendly course of action in relation to enemy
courses of action and reactions. It explores the possible branches and sequels to
the primary plan resulting in a final plan and decision points for critical actions.
(MCRP 5-2A)
warning order—1. A preliminary notice of an order or action which is to fol-
low. (DOD) 2. A crisis action planning directive issued by the Chairman of the
Joint Chiefs of Staff that initiates the development and evaluation of courses of
action by a supported commander and requests that a commander’s estimate be
submitted. 3. A planning directive that describes the situation, allocates forces
and resources, establishes command relationships, provides other initial plan-
ning guidance, and initiates subordinate unit mission planning. 4. WARNING
ORDER (Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, DOD) A crisis action planning
directive issued by the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff that initiates the de-
velopment and evaluation of courses of action by a supported commander and
requests that a commander’s estimate be submitted. (Joint Pub 1-02)
Appendix I
References
DODD (Department of Defense Directive)

3025.14 Protection and Evacuation of U.S. Citizens and
Designated Aliens in Danger Areas Abroad
w/ changes 1 and 2 1.
Joint Publications (Joint Pubs)
0-2 Unified Action Armed Forces (UNAAF)
1-02 DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms
1-03 Joint Reporting Structure (JRS) General Instructions
2-0 Joint Doctrine for Intelligence Support Operations
2-01 Joint Intelligence Support to Military Operations
2-02 National Intelligence Support to Joint Operations
3-0 Doctrine for Joint Operations
3-02 Joint Doctrine for Amphibious Operations
3-05 Doctrine for Joint Special Operations
3-13 Joint Doctrine for Information Operations
3-13.1 Joint Doctrine for Command and Control Warfare
(C2W)
3-50 National Search and Rescue Manual Volume I:
National Search and Rescue System
3-50.1 National Search and Rescue Manual Volume II:
Planning Handbook
3-50.2 Doctrine for Joint Combat Search and Rescue
3-52 Doctrine for Joint Airspace Control in the Combat
Zone
3-54 Joint Doctrine for Operations Security
3-56.1 Command and Control for Joint Air Operations
3-58 Joint Doctrine for Military Deception
4-01 Joint Doctrine for the Defense Transportation
System
5-0 Doctrine for Planning Joint Operations
5-00.1 Joint Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for
Joint Campaign Planning
5-00.2 Joint Task Force Planning Guidance and
Procedures
5-03.1 Joint Operation Planning and Execution System,
Volume I, (Planning Policies and Procedures)
I-2 _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Manual (CJCSM)

3122.03 Joint Operation Planning and Execution System,
Volume II, Planning Formats and Guidance
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Instruction (CJCSMI)
3211.01B Joint Military Deception
Naval Publications
NDP 5 Naval Planning
OPNAVINST 4740.2F Salvage and Recovery System
Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications (MCDPs)
1 Warfighting
1-1 Strategy
1-2 Campaigning
1-3 Tactics
2 Intelligence
3 Expeditionary Operations
4 Logistics
5 Planning
6 Command and Control
Marine Corps Warfighting Publications (MCWPs)
0-1 Marine Corps Operations (under development)
0-1.1 Componency
2-1 Intelligence Operations
3-25.4 Marine Tactical Air Command Center Handbook
4-1 Logistics Operations
4-11 Tactical-Level Logistics (under development)
4-11.6 Bulk Liquids Operations
5-11.1 Aviation Planning
5-11.1A Aviation Planning Documents
Marine Corps Reference Publications (MCRPs)
2-12A Intelligence Preparation of the Battlespace
5-2A Operational Terms and Graphics
5-12C Marine Corps Supplement to the Department of
Defense Dictionary of Military and
Associated Terms
Marine Corps Planning Process _________________________________________________________________________________ I-3
Marine Corps Order (MCO)

P3000.18 Marine Corps Planner’s Manual
Army Field Manuals (FMs)
34-130/FMFM 3-23-2 Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield
100-5 Operations
101-5 Staff Organization and Operations
(reverse blank)
Appendix J
Rapid Planning
The goal of rapid planning is to expend less time planning in order to provide the
executing forces with the maximum time allowable to prepare for the mission.
Rapid planning conducted by well-trained, experienced commanders and their
staffs can create a tempo of operations that overwhelm the enemy and achieve
the commander’s objectives. But, hastily conceived, ill-considered plans proba-
bly won’t succeed, and could result in death. Therefore, the commander and the
staff must achieve balance between sufficient time to develop a feasible COA,
sufficient time to coordinate its critical details, and sufficient time to prepare for
its execution. The commander and the staff must be thoroughly familiar with po-
tential contingencies or missions, and every individual involved with planning
must know his role in the planning process. Successful rapid planning is predi-
cated on the unit’s early retrieval or receipt of sufficient intelligence and related
information; planning experience; foresight to make significant preparations in
organizing, training, and equipping; information management; and highly re-
fined, well-rehearsed SOPs. If rapid planning is successful, both planning and
preparation requirements are conducted concurrently.
The speed in which a unit can plan an operation varies with the complexity of
the mission, the experience of the commander and the staff, and METT-T fac-
tors. If time does not allow use of the full, six-step Marine Corps Planning Pro-
cess, then the commander and the planners may use the rapid response planning
process (R2P2), which is a time-constrained version of the full planning pro-
cess. The R2P2 was developed to enable the Marine expeditionary unit (special
operations capable) (MEU[SOC]) to plan and begin execution of certain tasks
within a 6-hour time period. The rapid planning techniques discussed in this ap-
pendix focus on the MEU(SOC) and its 6-hour timeline, but these techniques
may be tailored and employed to meet any unit’s needs. Rapid planning by non-
MEU(SOC) units is usually more effective when conducting routine missions,
standard missions, or tasks for which the unit has been well trained and has es-
tablished SOPs.
1. Actions Prior to Rapid Planning

To best employ R2P2, a unit must develop capabilities in four areas: planning
cells, planning and operations SOPs, intelligence, and information management.
If one of these areas is lacking, effective rapid planning may not be achieved.
J-2_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
a. Planning Cells
The amount of staff turnover in the planning cells, to include the commander, di-
rectly impacts the staff’s ability to plan rapidly; therefore, the composition and
membership of the various planning cells used in rapid planning should remain
standard. This is particularly true during the pre-deployment training program
and deployment of the MEU(SOC) and amphibious squadron (PHIBRON). The
planning cells employed by the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON usually include the
crisis action team (CAT), the battle staff, and the mission planning cells. These
cells must participate in frequent planning exercises that involve real-world sce-
narios similar to those the unit might encounter. These exercises ensure that the
CAT, battle staff, and mission planning cells are thoroughly trained in rapid plan-
ning; their members know their commanders and each other; and the planners
possess situational awareness of likely contingency missions and areas of opera-
tions. Planning cells should understand where they are to meet, what they are to
accomplish, and how much time they have to complete their planning efforts.
The planning cells also must be capable of conducting concurrent (simultaneous
at different echelons of the same command) and parallel (between equivalent
echelons of different commands) planning.
b. Planning and Operations SOPs

SOPs are the cornerstone of rapid planning. The planning SOP should be second
nature to all concerned. Operations SOPs are equally important because they al-
low planners to select proven and practiced tasks that provide solutions to tactical
problems. SOPs allow major subordinate elements (MSEs) to carry out familiar
tasks effectively and efficiently with minimal or no higher-level guidance or
communications. The SOP for each type of mission should include a pre-desig-
nated task organization; equipment and ordnance lists; elements of a landing
plan; mission execution procedures; and an execution checklist with codewords.
The SOPs must be studied, rehearsed, executable on a moment’s notice, and sup-
ported by timesaving factors. For example, standard ordnance packages for likely
missions (e.g., tactical recovery of aircraft and personnel [TRAP], platoon-size
reinforcements) are pre-staged in readily accessible locations in their magazines
in order to reduce the time needed to break out and issue ammunition. In addi-
tion, mission smart packs are created for each mission profile. Smart packs con-
tain specific planning information and SOPs based on the mission profile (e.g.,
light, medium, or heavy helicopter raid). Smart pack planning and coordination
of information are also used as references during mission execution.
c. Intelligence
The commander and the staff must anticipate possible contingencies based on
continual analyses of open-source news and classified intelligence reports. For
Marine Corps Planning Process ________________________________________________________________________________ J-3
each situation, the staff should be equipped with the latest intelligence (e.g., a
MEU[SOC] usually prepares mission folders), possible targets, area studies, and
other relevant information. Periodic reviews of potential contingencies maintain
situational awareness and assist in updating information. When appropriate, a
commander conducts deliberate planning and refocuses unit training based on
likely scenarios. The intelligence staff must also be familiar with the Generic In-
telligence Requirements Handbook (GIRH), which is produced by Marine Corps
Intelligence Activity. The GIRH contains suggested essential elements of infor-
mation for various mission types.
d. Information Management
Due to the time constraints inherent in rapid planning, there is less opportunity
for the commander and the staff to analyze information requirements. Also,
computer technology is increasing the speed and volume of information flow, so
an overabundance of information may obscure vital facts. It is critical that every
participant in the planning process realizes the importance of his mission area
and take positive steps to appropriately share knowledge. Commanders and staff
officers must possess the ability to present clear and concise information. Sim-
ple, concise presentations best support rapid planning.
2. Composition of MEU(SOC) Planning Cells

a. Crisis Action Team
The central planning cell in the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON is the CAT. Al-
though its final composition depends on the commander and METT-T, its basic
composition is established in the command SOP. Three factors to consider in
determining membership in the CAT are the physical space available to accom-
modate the group; the benefits of additional input from a wider array of func-
tional areas; and the drawbacks of too many participants. CAT members of a
MEU(SOC) may include the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders and their
primary staffs, MSE commanders and their operations officers, and subject mat-
ter experts.
Note: Some MEU(SOC)s interchangeably refer to the CAT or the landing force
operations center (LFOC) watch team as the battle staff.
b. Battle Staff
Some MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders employ a battle staff. The battle
staff may consist of staff officers at the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON and MSE
level, plus representatives from attachments and functional areas not included in
the CAT. Ideally, any potential member of a mission planning cell not part of the
J-4_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
CAT should be on the battle staff. The battle staff convenes whenever the CAT
is established, which provides leaders and planners an opportunity to gain identi-
cal situational awareness with the CAT and to prepare for participation in any
mission planning cell. Because there are insufficient personnel in some function-
al areas to staff all mission planning cells simultaneously, the battle staff may
have members that support more than one mission planning cell.
c. Mission Planning Cell

Early in the planning process, the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders des-
ignate a mission commander (usually one of the MSE commanders or the mari-
time special purpose force commander). The mission commander then
establishes his own mission planning cell to plan the details of the operation.
Consideration must be given to the feasibility of separate planning cells due to
limited staff members; therefore, the mission commander may designate more
than one planning cell in order to plan concurrent, contingency, or follow-on
missions. Additionally, a separate reconnaissance and surveillance (R&S) mis-
sion planning cell may be established to plan R&S operations. Each mission
planning cell should include appropriate representation from relevant experts
(e.g., a battalion landing team planning cell might include air and logistic sub-
ject matter experts and Navy representatives). Maintaining the same personnel
in the planning cells throughout the work-up and deployment speeds and im-
proves the planning process (e.g., if the ACE is the primary mission commander
for a TRAP, then the GCE should send the same representative to all TRAP
planning meetings). The planning cell’s working spaces must be pre-designated
so that all cell members know where to report and so that two cells are not com-
peting for the same space. Lower echelon units, such as companies and pla-
toons, must be prepared to plan concurrently with the mission planning cells and
also have a designated planning space.
3. MEU(SOC) Rapid Response Planning Process

R2P2 is a time-constrained, six step process that mirrors the Marine Crops Plan-
ning Process of—
l Mission analysis.
l COA development.
l COA war game.
l COA comparison and decision.
l Orders development.
l Transition.
a. Mission Analysis
Effective mission analysis is achieved through prior familiarization with both

the situation and the type of mission, as well as reliance on intuitive decision-
making (which emphasizes rapid recognition of patterns based on experience,
training, and education). Planning times can be shortened if the MEU(SOC) and
PHIBRON perform anticipatory planning for various contingencies.
Upon receipt/acknowledgement of a warning order or an operation order, an autho-

rized individual immediately orders establishment of the CAT.
The MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders may retain or delegate the authority
to establish a CAT to their operations officers and/or the MEU(SOC) executive of-
ficer and the PHIBRON chief of staff.
The decision to establish the CAT is passed immediately to the other ships.
If it is a standard mission covered by an SOP, the initiation of cross-decking, based

on the SOP, may occur.
Designated personnel in the LFOC watch section produce copies of the order for
the CAT and battle staff (or mission planning cells) and ensure that planning spac-
es are prepared for use.
J-6_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
The CAT and battle staff (or mission planning cells) assemble in their respective
spaces. These spaces should be selected or identified in the SOP to prevent con-
flicts (e.g., the battle staff is to assemble in the wardroom during meal hours). The
CAT and battle staff (or mission planning cells) should be in their spaces and have
copies of the warning order as soon as possible.
Designated staff personnel begin obtaining updated personnel and equipment sta-
tus reports. Ideally, these reports are collected in a manner that avoids distracting
planners from the planning process (e.g., outside the planning cells or on status
boards in the planning spaces).
The MEU(SOC) operations officer serves as the facilitator of the CAT and calls the
group to order.
A designated scribe takes roll or members check in with the scribe upon their arrival.
The CAT determines if there is a need for clarification during mission analysis. If so,
a designated staff member, not involved in the CAT, requests clarification from
higher headquarters.
The CAT confirms cross-deck requirements and considers the need for subject
matter experts based on the nature of the mission. For example, if the mission in-
volves a raid on a chemical weapons site, the CAT may include a nuclear, biologi-
cal, and chemical defense officer.
If expertise in a critical area is lacking, the CAT may initiate the process of obtaining
reach-back expertise.
The meteorology officer provides the latest weather information. The MEU(SOC) S-2
and the PHIBRON N-2 provide an intelligence update. The division of labor between
these two officers should be clearly stated in the SOP to avoid overlap.
The entire CAT then conducts mission analysis in the same manner as the MCPP,
with the following differences:
l Time-constrained units should have their IPB products ready prior to starting
the planning process. During mission analysis, these products are updated if
time permits. If IPB products are not available, the staff generates them.
l Rapid planning requires that SOPs are already understood. Units lacking well-
rehearsed SOPs require additional time in all of the planning steps, leading to
a more deliberate, slower planning process.
l The lack of “orientation” time associated with rapid planning may require an ini-
tial staff orientation. A staff orientation informs the planners of previously un-
known and unresearched mission-related facts.
l At the end of the mission analysis, a mission commander may be assigned.
The next phase of mission analysis is the issuance of the commanders’ planning
guidance. The beginning of this phase depends, however, on whether and how
the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders use the battle staff. The workings
of the CAT may be viewed directly by the battle staff or the mission planning
cells via video teleconferencing or a channel on the ship’s secure, closed-circuit
television, which affords them the same situational awareness as the CAT. If the
battle staff or mission planning cells do not have connectivity with the CAT,
they can conduct their own version of mission analysis simultaneously with the
CAT. However, the results of the CAT’s mission analysis must be provided to
the battle staff or the mission planning cells to ensure that all planners have the
same situational awareness. Orientation of the staff occurs shortly after comple-
tion of the mission analysis in order to allow the battle staff or the appropriate
mission planning cells (identified during mission analysis) to convene in their
designated spaces.
The MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders (beginning with the supporting com-
mander) provide their planning guidance to the CAT and the battle staff/mission
planning cells at the conclusion of mission analysis (or any required staff orientation).
A mission commander may be assigned at this point.
The supported commander follows with his intent, assessment of centers of gravity
and critical vulnerabilities, mission priorities (relative to ongoing, standby, and fol-
low-on), COA considerations/restrictions, timing, phasing, warfighting function con-
siderations, and other significant information that addresses planning for R&S as
well as the main mission(s).
The commander’s guidance reflects the experience and proficiency of his staff.
The supporting commander provides any additional guidance.
The MEU(SOC) S-3 provides the planning timeline and assigns definite times for
completing each step.
The locations for planning and any required augmentation for their planning cells
are determined.
Augmentees acknowledge their requirements and identify themselves to the mis-

sion commander.
Participants adjourn to their respective mission planning cells once mission analy-
sis is complete and the mission is assigned.
Based on the type of mission assigned, the mission commander may also direct
commencement of specific preparations by his forces. For example, if the ACE
has been assigned to conduct a TRAP, the ACE can simultaneously prepare the
standard package of aircraft while the pre-designated ground force draws the
standard list of ordnance and prepares mission-associated equipment.
J-8_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
b. Course of Action Development
For simplicity purposes, this step of the R2P2 process assumes that the mission
commander is developing COAs.
The mission commander begins COA development by convening his mission plan-
ning cell and conducting roll call.
The mission commander may quickly review significant material from the first step
of the process if some cell members were not present for mission analysis. This re-
view may include an intelligence brief by the S-2 and a presentation by the S-3 on
the mission and the CAT’s mission analysis.
The mission commander summarizes the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders’

guidance and then presents his own.
If information is required to support COA development, the commander directs spe-

cific members of his mission planning cell to gather the required information.
The mission planning cell then begins to develop COAs.
Depending on the guidance received from the MEU(SOC), PHIBRON, and mis-
sion commanders, the mission planning cell may initially concentrate on specific
COAs. COAs are developed as in the Marine Corps Planning Process, but effec-
tive COA development relies on intuitive decisionmaking and operational SOPs
in order to meet the reduced timeline of R2P2. The planning cell develops each
COA considering such factors as—
l R&S link-up procedures (if applicable).

l Movement from the ship to the objective.
l Movement from objective back to the ship.
l Fire support.
l Command and control.
l Task organization.
l Special equipment.
l General timeline
The mission planning cell prepares graphics and narratives for each COA. COAs
are typically broken into phases and evaluated to ensure they are suitable, feasible,
acceptable, distinguishable, and complete.
If surface reconnaissance is required, then the R&S mission commander convenes

his own planning cell and simultaneously conducts R&S COA development.
To ensure that the parallel planning efforts of the primary and R&S mission
planning cells are coordinated, liaison personnel from each cell remain in con-
stant contact; e.g., an R&S coordinator moves from planning cell to planning
cell while keeping in close contact with the MEU S-3. Since R&S elements are
normally inserted prior to other forces, the R&S cell must develop its COAs in a
shorter period of time, but the R&S effort must support the information needs of
the primary mission commander.
The next step in the process is the COA brief. The COA brief can be presented to
the CAT, the entire battle staff or only to the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON com-
manders, the MSE commanders, the primary mission commander, and a few key
staff officers. The R&S planning cell normally briefs first (probably while the
primary mission planning cell is still developing COAs). At the conclusion of
the R&S COA brief, the R&S portion of the operation can immediately move on
to COA wargaming.
At this point, the primary mission commander has completed COA development
and his planning cell is preparing its own brief. The MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON
commanders may approve the R&S COA before receiving the COA brief for the
primary mission. Alternatively, the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders
could delay COA wargaming, as well as COA comparison and decision for the
R&S mission, until deciding on a COA for the primary mission, but this delay
would drastically reduce time needed to prepare and launch R&S forces.
The COA brief for the primary mission is then given to the CAT and the battle staff.
(If the battle staff concept is not employed, standby and follow-on mission planning
cells and designated additional staff officers and attachment leaders may also at-
tend the COA brief.) The brief follows the unit planning SOP, but typically opens
J-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
with the MEU(SOC) S-3 reviewing any on going/projected missions and providing
updates/clarifications obtained from HHQ.
The MEU(SOC) S-2 and the PHIBRON N-2 provide an updated intelligence picture,
focusing on changes since their last brief and including any answers received to
PIRs/CCIRs or RFIs.
The mission commander quickly summarizes the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON mis-
sion, the envisioned endstate, measures of effectiveness, and the COAs. He pre-
sents the sketch; describes expected events by phase; and provides the task
organization, timeline, concept of fire support, other significant details, and a list of
key advantages/disadvantages for each COA.
c. Course of Action War Game
Once all the COAs have been briefed, staff officers (to include appropriate at-
tachment leaders and subject matter experts) develop their estimates of support-
ability as per unit SOP. To assist in reaching quick conclusions and to avoid any
Marine Corps Planning Process _______________________________________________________________________________ J-11
oversights, each staff officer uses a prepared matrix that lists each consideration
relevant to his area of concern (e.g., the S-4 could address supply quantities and
transportation means). Each SOP-designated staff member prepares an indepen-
dent estimate that is based solely on his area of expertise and includes each
friendly COA’s strengths and weaknesses, associated risks, and asset shortfalls
as it applies to a warfighting function, staff section, or attachment. These esti-
mates assist senior commander’s in reaching their decisions. The order of brief-
ing the estimates is established in the planning SOP.
Identify which COAs are unsupportable, if all are equally supportable, or if one is
superior to the others.
Identify any salient facts requiring the attention of the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON
commanders.
Address impact of a COA on SOPs.
Address impact of COAs on future operations (e.g., if “X” amount of helicopter and
flight deck time is used today, “X” amount will be available tomorrow).
An intelligence officer is also usually tasked to produce an estimate from the enemy
commander’s perspective. The enemy commander’s viewpoint (as expressed by
the S-2/N-2) and staff discussion of hypothetical situations serve as additional war-
gaming within the time constraints of the planning process. At a minimum, this esti-
mate identifies the most dangerous (hardest to counter) COA.
The MSE commanders (not assigned as the mission commander) also provide
concise estimates.
The scribe records the information on a clearly visible staff estimate worksheet.
An execution matrix or synchronization matrix is started at this point in the planning

process.
The mission commander makes the final input (to avoid influencing staff estimates)
and explains why a COA is selected.
Rapid planning wargaming differs from the Marine Corps Planning Process in
that it may be conducted internally within each staff section rather being con-
ducted as one large war game where all MSEs and staff sections are represented.
If time permits, the latter method is preferred.
J-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
d. Course of Action Comparison and Decision
Based on personal experiences and information acquired from COA wargaming,

the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders compare the COAs and rapidly
reach a decision. Although the supported commander is the lead decisionmaker,
he typically seeks concurrence from his counterpart, particularly when signifi-
cant reliance is placed on assets from the supporting command. The command-
ers may accept a single COA, modify a COA, or decide to execute something
entirely different. Unless the situation is changing rapidly, both time constraints
and continuous involvement of the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON staff should pre-
clude significant COA alterations. In announcing their decision, the commanders
provide their refined commander’s intent and any additional guidance needed to
finalize the plan.
e. Orders Development
During orders development, all echelons involved in the operation complete re-
quired detailed planning for the approved COA. This vertical and horizontal
flow of information among the chain of command and all elements of the
MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON is vital to concurrent planning and preparation. If
the mission forces or supporting echelons encounter any difficulties or if the sit-
uation changes, the mission planning cell is alerted immediately and the
MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders are notified if any potential, significant
alterations to the COA arise. If changes in the situation threaten the suitability of
J-14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
the COA, and if time permits, the commanders may direct the staff and the mis-
sion planning cell to return to an earlier step in the planning process.
The mission commander immediately passes the results of COA comparison and
decision to his forces to assist their planning and preparations.
The mission commander and the mission planning cell continue to update and for-
ward planning details as changes occur.
Plans for supporting or contingency missions may also be developed (e.g., mass
casualty, MEDEVAC, platoon-size reinforcement, initial terminal guidance, link-up,
evasion and recovery plan).
Supporting echelons (e.g., ships, other MSEs) receive updated information from
their liaison officers inside the mission planning cell.
The mission planning cell produces a confirmation brief, which essentially serves
as the draft operation order.
The MEU(SOC) S-3 creates and delivers a written concept of operations in addition
to other documents required by higher headquarters. To save time and ensure co-
ordinated execution, the commander may not approve the completed final order
until after the confirmation brief.
f. Transition
The commander approves the mission for execution immediately following the
confirmation brief; therefore, the confirmation brief is the primary tool used to
transition from planning to execution. It is also the optimum means of final co-
ordination within the time available and it can serve as a form of rehearsal. The
brief’s purpose is to ensure that those involved in executing the plan completely
understand the plan and achieve situational awareness.
The brief also ensures agreement among force elements, since all critical partic-
ipants are present. Because the confirmation brief is primarily for those who
have a role in executing the mission, all available members of the mission plan-
ning cell and the mission force should attend. Supporting elements (e.g., ships
personnel) not represented in the mission planning cell should also attend. All
standby and follow-on mission planning cells that might be affected by the pri-
mary mission should also observe the brief. The CAT and battle staff members
should attend to provide expertise and answer questions.
Using the format in the unit planning SOP, the confirmation brief is conducted
by the mission commander. The SOP provides the format and media (e.g.,
small-scale maps, sketches) for each participant’s brief in order to avoid over-
laps or omissions. The presentation media are collected by the scribe and assem-
bled into a smart pack that may serve as the written order.
Note: An initial version of the smart pack may be assembled during orders de-
velopment, but it should not be issued until sanctioned by the commander at the
confirmation brief.
The original confirmation brief’s contents, together with any resulting changes
or decisions, must be provided to the R&S force (particularly if no representa-
tive attended) to ensure that the final, approved mission is understood.
The brief’s major focus is on actions occurring in the objective area. The com-
mander of the element executing these actions (e.g., the raid force commander)
provides a detailed explanation of the intended actions and the specific tasks as-
signed to subordinate elements. During the brief, the commanders and their
staffs identify any potential problems. Conflicts that arise from the brief are re-
solved or planned for prior to the completion of the brief. Additional planning
must occur if anything is briefed that is not yet planned for or coordinated
The primary mission confirmation brief is usually limited to an hour. The

MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON commanders may schedule confirmation briefs for
standby or follow-on missions following completion of the primary mission
brief. Upon completion of the primary mission brief, various elements of the
force may conduct supporting briefs to the same audience. The commander then
designates time for subordinate element leaders to accomplish any remaining
preparations and rehearsals. A final inspection of troops and equipment is con-
ducted to ensure mission readiness. During the period before launch of forces,
the MEU(SOC) and PHIBRON command echelons supervise the final prepara-
tions and coordination of subordinate elements and prepare for their own role in
command and control of the operation. SOPs establish C2 procedures for vari-
ous types of operations except that preparation time is limited. Assumptions and
preconditions are revalidated as much as possible. Branch and sequel planning
should occur.
J-16 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
4. Sample Planning Matrix

This following matrix is only a sample. Units normally develop their own time-
lines and SOPs.
COMMAND AND CONCURRENT AND

TIMELINE WHO STAFF ACTIONS PRODUCTS PARALLEL ACTIONS
MISSION ANALYSIS
0:00–0:30 CAT Receipt of mission Mission statement Battle staff forms
Commander’s orientation Commander’s intent Cross-deck requirements
Break out IPB and Commander’s planning Command and staff supervision
intelligence folders guidance
Conduct mission analysis Updated IPB products
Specified tasks
Implied tasks
Essential tasks
Constraints (must do)
Restraints (must not do)
Assumptions
Resource/SME shortfalls
COG analysis
Approved CCIRs
0:30–0:50 Battle staff Initial staff orientation Warning orders Acknowledge receipt
Determine information Planning schedule Issue planning schedule

requirements
RFIs R&S planning
Commander’s planning
guidance Initial staff estimates Command and staff supervision
COA DEVELOPMENT
0:50–1:10 Battle staff Convene planning cells (if not COAs written and graphics R&S planning/brief
already done) developed (ime and distance
identified) Command and staff supervision
Update IPB/intelligence
Each potential response force
Develop COA(s) commander prepares actions in
objective area plan
Air support requirement to car-

rier battle group
Staff/subordinate command
estimates
Commander’s wargaming guid-

ance and evaluation criteria
COMMAND AND CONCURRENT AND

TIMELINE WHO STAFF ACTIONS PRODUCTS PARALLEL ACTIONS
COA WAR GAME/COA COMPARISON AND DECISION
1:10–1:30 Battle staff Conduct COA war game War game results Response force/support ele-
ment planning
Refine COAs/IPB Warning orders
Command and staff supervision
COAs briefed Concept of operations
Compare/evaluate COAs Execution matrix
Commander makes decision Refined staff estimates
Identify branches/sequels
Updated CCIRs
ORDERS DEVELOPMENT
1:30–3:00 Battle staff Refine IPB Timeline Develop timeline/plan
Prepare OPORD Graphic and overlay R&S launch
Order reconciliation Fire support plan Command and staff supervision
Order crosswalk Landing plan Cross-decker return
OPORD approval Communications plan Final planning conference
Execution checklist
Warning orders
Concept of operations message

to higher headquarters
Charts/maps
Confirmation briefing slides
TRANSITION
3:00–4:00 Battle staff Confirmation brief/issue the Total understanding by all hands Response force commander
order of the plan briefs response force/support
elements
4:00–6:00 Amphibious Drills All hands ready to execute Develop alternate/sequel plan(s)
task force mission
1-4_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 5-1
Notes
1. MCDP 5, Planning (July 1997) p. 4.

2. MCDP 6, Command and Control (July 1996) p. 113.
3. MCDP 1, Warfighting (June 1997) p. 86.
4. Robert Debs Heinl, Jr., Col, USMC, Retired, Dictionary of Military and
Naval Quotations (Annapolis, MD: United States Naval Institute, 1996) p. 320.
5. Leadership: Quotations From the Military Tradition, ed. Robert A. Fitton
(Boulder, CO: Westview Press, Inc. 1990) p. 76.
6. MCDP 5, p. 64.
7. Ibid, p. 89.

mcwp5 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

mcwp5 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

mcwp5 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MCWP 5-1

U.S. Marine Corps

PCN 143 000068 00

Unless otherwise stated, whenever the masculine or feminine gender is

CHANGE 1 to MCWP 5-1

1. This change adds new Appendix J, Rapid Planning.

3. File this transmittal sheet in the front of the publication.

BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS

DISTRIBUTION: 143 000068 01

Chapter 1. Planning Overview

Reviewed and approved this date.

BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS

DISTRIBUTION: 143 000068 00

commands typically consist of larger staffs, have a. Top-Down Planning

The Marine Corps Planning Process is an inter- b. Single-Battle Concept

1002. The Marine Corps a. Mission Analysis

Figure 1-1. Steps in the Marine Corps Planning Process.

wargamed against selected threat COAs. Course e. Orders Development

INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS

IDENTIFY THE HIGHER HEADQUARTERS’ MISSION STATEMENT

organized, prepared to plan as required, and begin l Personal reconnaissance results.

b. Identify Purpose of the Operation d. Prepare and Refine Intelligence and

r. Draft a Warning Order Infiltration

Once the commander approves or modifies the re-

l Reserve. friendly maneuver, and dictates the time and place

(2) Shaping Actions. Shaping sets condi- l Updated IPB products.

Course of Action Development

“Decisionmaking requires both the situational awareness to recognize the

INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS

MISSION STATEMENT UPDATE INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION COMMANDER’S DESIGNATED

3001. Inputs a. Update Intelligence Preparation of

l What do I want to do? d. Refine Center of Gravity Analysis

e. Develop Initial Courses of Action (2) Course of Action Refinement. U s i n g

commander uses the collected data during COA l Force protection.

l Commander’s intent and guidance. 3003. Outputs

Course of Action War Game

4003. Outputs n Synchronization matrix.

Course of Action Comparison and Decision

“The first principle of a [commander] is to calculate what he must do, to see if

INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS

WARGAMED COA(s) GRAPHICS AND

subordinates in several separate meetings or a. Perform Course of Action

INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS

INITIAL TASK ORGANIZATION

l Updated intelligence and IPB products. c. Orders Reconciliation

THE ORDER OR PLAN

c. Confirmation Brief how subordinate commanders intend to accom-

Marine Corps Planning in

1. Types of Joint Planning

2. The MCPP and Joint Planning

Figure A-1. MCPP Interface with the Deliberate

Marine Corps Order P3000.18, Marine Corps Planner’s Manual, establishes

Figure A-2. MCPP Interface with the Crisis Action

As stated in MCDP 1-2, Campaigning, maximum impact is obtained when all

1. Command and Control

Organization for Planning

Planning is an event-dominated process. Therefore, planning organizations

2. Planning, Decision, Execution, and

Figure C-1. Planning, Decision, Execution, and Assessment Cycle.